Biesseworks Instructions For Use PDF Free

BiesseWorks
Machining operation programming system
Instructions for use
2.1
5804A0073 ENGLISH
Serial number
Publication information
Copyright © 2002 BIESSE S.p.A.. All rights reserved.

Code: Edition: Revision: Approved: ctg vsw
5804A0073 2 0 (07, 2004) 03/0183M A 2.1.0 307
1 (06, 2005) 05/0050M A 2.2.0 208
List of updates
Revision: Added: Eliminated: Modified:
0 general revision
1 chapter section chapter
8 1.6 2, 4, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15
section Appendix
5.2 B
Section
1.6, 1.7, 6.5, 6.11, 10.1,
10.2, 17.3, 17.4, 19.2,
20.1, 20.2, 21.6, A.4
This manual has been prepared by BIESSE for use by clients only and it contains information
protected by copyright. It must not be photocopied or reproduced in any form, either fully or in part,
without the prior written consent of BIESSE.
The manual is supplied together with the software. It must therefore be kept in a safe, easily
accessible place known to those using it. It must be used with care throughout the working life of
the software, and must be handed over if the latter is passed on to third parties. BIESSE will not be
considered responsible or liable for damage resulting from incorrect use of the documentation.
It is assumed that the BiesseWorks user also has a good working knowledge of the machine and
of Microsoft Windows NT/2000/XP operating system environments.
Information on trade marks

BiesseWorks is a registered trade mark of BIESSE S.p.A..
SmartSketch is a registered trade mark of Intergraph Corporation.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073.fm140605

3
4 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073.fm140605

Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Publication information .............................................................................................................. 3
Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 11
Preliminaries
1 Software presentation
1.1 Applications or application software ................................................................................. 15
1.2 Utilities .............................................................................................................................. 15
1.3 Structure of applications ................................................................................................... 16
1.4 Structure of utilities ........................................................................................................... 21
1.5 The zoom instruments ...................................................................................................... 21
1.6 Using the mouse .............................................................................................................. 21
1.7 Keyboard commands ....................................................................................................... 23
2 Applications
2.1 Editor ................................................................................................................................ 25
2.2 ToolManager .................................................................................................................... 41
2.3 MachineConfiguration ...................................................................................................... 45
2.4 WorkTableTooling ............................................................................................................. 50
3 Utilities
3.1 BatchRun ......................................................................................................................... 57
3.2 BackupManager ............................................................................................................... 60
4 General settings
4.1 Personalising the tool bar ................................................................................................. 61
4.2 Description of the Setup dialogue box ............................................................................. 62
4.3 Password ......................................................................................................................... 74
4.4 Language setting ............................................................................................................. 74
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

5
Table of Contents
5 Basic programming concepts

5.1 Description of the piece ................................................................................................... 75
5.2 The geometric profile ....................................................................................................... 77
5.3 Types of machining operation that can be programmed .................................................. 77
Tooling
6 Cataloguing of tools/aggregates
6.1 Basic concepts ................................................................................................................. 85
6.2 Notions on saving data .................................................................................................... 88
6.3 Class management .......................................................................................................... 88
6.4 Type management ........................................................................................................... 91
6.5 Recording tools ................................................................................................................ 93
6.6 Recording thickness tracers ............................................................................................ 98
6.7 Recording insertions ....................................................................................................... 99
6.8 Group management ...................................................................................................... 100
6.9 Dialogue box Filters ....................................................................................................... 102
6.10 Aggregate management ................................................................................................ 103
6.11 Notes regarding the creation of aggregate 21 ............................................................... 109
6.12 Notes regarding the creation of a chip deflector ............................................................. 110
7 Operating section and magazine management

7.1 Consulting the machine data .......................................................................................... 111
7.2 Basic tooling concepts .................................................................................................... 118
7.3 Operating section tooling ............................................................................................... 120
7.4 Tool magazine tooling .................................................................................................... 124
7.5 Aggregate tooling ........................................................................................................... 126
7.6 Inconsistency between the tooling saved and the machine/tool data ............................ 128
8 Work table management

8.1 The work table configuration document ......................................................................... 129
8.2 Description of the quick menu options ........................................................................... 132
8.3 Description of the position input window ....................................................................... 137
8.4 Parametric type positioning ............................................................................................ 138
8.5 Non-parametric type positioning .................................................................................... 144
8.6 Deletion of the tooling from the machining operation program ..................................... 145
8.7 Remove the work table supports ................................................................................. 145
8.8 ........................................................................................Display of the properties table 145
8.9 Consultation of the positioning points ............................................................................ 145
8.10 Display of the shaped piece ........................................................................................... 145
8.11 Simultaneous tooling of a number of pieces on the same origin ................................... 146
6 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

Table of Contents
9 Management of the tools with the balluff device

9.1 Management of tools/aggregates ................................................................................... 147
9.2 Tooling ............................................................................................................................ 149
9.3 Managing a malfunctioning chip ..................................................................................... 150
10 Data import, backup and restore

10.1 Import machine data and tool database ........................................................................ 151
10.2 Backup/restore machine data and tool database .......................................................... 154
11 Management of the machine axes and the working units

11.1 Resetting the machine axes ........................................................................................... 157
11.2 Moving the machine axes .............................................................................................. 157
11.3 Forced movement of the working units .......................................................................... 157
Use/Programming
12 The machining program

12.1 Use of the commands area ............................................................................................ 162
12.2 Using the Normal cursor tool .......................................................................................... 163
12.3 Using the Graphic output tools ....................................................................................... 163
12.4 Updating the graphics area ............................................................................................ 163
12.5 Deleting parts of the document ...................................................................................... 164
12.6 Copying parts of the document ...................................................................................... 164
12.7 Consulting the set data .................................................................................................. 164
12.8 Program creation phases ............................................................................................... 164
12.9 Creating the document ................................................................................................... 165
12.10 Opening the document ................................................................................................... 168
12.11 Saving the document ..................................................................................................... 169
12.12 Saving the document in different formats ...................................................................... 169
12.13 Printing the document .................................................................................................... 170
12.14 Program functions .......................................................................................................... 171
12.15 Program optimisation .................................................................................................... 188
12.16 Program simulation ........................................................................................................ 192
12.17 Processing the program and creating the ISO file ......................................................... 195
12.18 Backup/restore machining programs and macros ......................................................... 195
13 Creation of profiles with the EGA instruments

13.1 Drawing procedures ...................................................................................................... 199
13.2 Definition of parameters used to draw with EGA tools ................................................... 200
13.3 Tools used to create the drawing ................................................................................... 204

7
Table of Contents
13.4 Creating a text ............................................................................................................... 217

13.5 Breaking up a GEO/ROUT ............................................................................................. 219
14 Creation of the profiles with SmartSketch

14.1 Creating drawings .......................................................................................................... 223
14.2 Menu CAM ..................................................................................................................... 223
14.3 Tool bars ....................................................................................................................... 224
14.4 Using the quick menu .................................................................................................... 225
14.5 Procedure allowing the CAD to interact with the Editor application ............................... 226
14.6 Using the bar Technology ............................................................................................. 226
15 Programming machining operations

15.1 Milling programming ....................................................................................................... 229
15.2 Programming boring operations ..................................................................................... 250
15.3 Programming cutting operations .................................................................................... 257
15.4 Programming "insertions" .............................................................................................. 266
15.5 Programming piece thickness tracing ............................................................................ 268
15.6 Notes on boring program symmetry ............................................................................... 269
15.7 Notes for programming using the chip deflector ............................................................ 269
15.8 Notes for programming milling interpolated with axis C ................................................. 271
15.9 Notes on programming vertical milling in YZ/XZ ............................................................ 272
15.10 Notes for programming milling using aggregate 21 ....................................................... 273
15.11 Notes on programming milling with the sharp corner .................................................... 274
15.12 Notes for milling with “multipassers” .............................................................................. 274
15.13 Notes for programming a machining operation with the “repositioning” ......................... 276
15.14 Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out data items ......................................... 276
15.15 Notes for milling operations on the mirror origin ............................................................ 277
16 Automatic program parameter setting

16.1 Variables ........................................................................................................................ 279
16.2 Creating variables .......................................................................................................... 281
16.3 Using variables .............................................................................................................. 285
16.4 Predefined VBScript instructions ................................................................................... 285
17 Macros
17.1 Creating macros ............................................................................................................. 290
17.2 Saving macros ............................................................................................................... 292
17.3 Description of dialogue box List of macros ................................................................... 293
17.4 Opening, modifying and saving the macro ..................................................................... 294
17.5 Activation/deactivation of the macros ............................................................................ 294
17.6 Inserting macros into the program ................................................................................. 295
17.7 Macros for cleaning the hoods ....................................................................................... 295

Table of Contents
17.8 Horizontal aggregate boring macro ................................................................................ 295

17.9 Macros for unloading the electrospindle ........................................................................ 296
18 Importing graphic files

18.1 Automatic mode ............................................................................................................. 297
18.2 Manual mode ................................................................................................................. 297
19 Planning DXF files

19.1 List of drawing commands ............................................................................................. 305
19.2 “BiesseWorks DXF” type formalism ............................................................................... 306
19.3 “CNI DXF” type formalism .............................................................................................. 323
19.4 How to set the formalism ................................................................................................ 328
20 Running the programs

20.1 Creating ISO files using BatchRun ................................................................................. 329
20.2 Running the programs and the list ................................................................................. 335
20.3 Restarting the program after a machining suspension ................................................... 335
20.4 Stop/cancel running of the program ............................................................................... 335
21 Using the XNC

21.1 The Positions application software ................................................................................. 337
21.2 Machine axes reset ........................................................................................................ 345
21.3 Moving the machine axes .............................................................................................. 346
21.4 Moving the operating section elements .......................................................................... 348
21.5 Running single programs ............................................................................................... 349
21.6 Job list ............................................................................................................................ 352
21.7 Procedure when opening a job list ................................................................................. 358
21.8 Procedure when filling in a job list .................................................................................. 358
21.9 Running the job list ......................................................................................................... 365
21.10 Debug application software ............................................................................................ 367
Appendices
A Examples
A.1 General boring program ................................................................................................. 373
A.2 Boring program for a “non standard” side ...................................................................... 376
A.3 Milling program ............................................................................................................... 378
A.4 Boring program with parametric tooling ......................................................................... 382

9
Table of Contents
B List of programming commands

B.1 Boring commands .......................................................................................................... 387
B.2 Cutting commands ......................................................................................................... 393
B.3 Milling commands .......................................................................................................... 397
B.4 Drawing commands ....................................................................................................... 402
B.5 Function commands ....................................................................................................... 414
C VBscript commands and Editor constants

C.1 VBscript Commands ...................................................................................................... 419
C.2 Editor Constants ............................................................................................................ 426
Glossary .................................................................................................................................... 429

Introduction
Introduction
Purpose and limits of the manual

This manual is aimed at the software user, and provides information that must be read before the
software is used on a PC. If the PC on which the software is installed is connected to a machine it
will also be necessary to consult the relative Instructions for use.
Given the complexity of the subjects dealt with, the procedures described in this document must
only be carried out by persons with the necessary technical expertise (qualified operators).
Conventions
Parts of the text that must not be overlooked are highlighted and preceded by the symbols
described and illustrated below.
Text marked with this symbol indicates imminent dangers, and the contents must
therefore be taken into careful account in order to prevent a serious accident.
Text marked with this symbol indicates procedures to be used and actions to be
taken to avoid any damage to goods and property.
This symbol is used to indicate points of particular importance that must not be overlooked.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a701k0009.fm140605

11
Introduction
12 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a701k0009.fm140605

Preliminaries
BiesseWorks is a machining operation programming system, compatible with Microsoft Windows

2000/XP operating systems only, that comprises a series of software described as “applications or
application software” and a certain number of “utilities”.
1.1 Applications or application software

The applications or application software are those softwares that, by means of a special user
interface, allow creation of the drawings and machining programs, listing of tools and tooling-up of
the machine itself.
Editor (main application); used to create the machining programs (“documents”) containing
the data required to operate the machine and produce the finished panels. It also allows the
other application software to be started, and interacts with some of them.
ToolManager; used to list the tools to be employed.
MachineConfiguration; used to tool-up the operating section and the tool magazines.
WorkTableTooling; used to tool-up the work table.
1.2 Utilities
The utilities are sofwares that carry out utility functions, such as creating a copy of the data
(backup) and multiple generation of ISO format files for the NC.
BackupManager; used to create a copy of the data required.
BatchRun; used to process the selected files and create files in ISO format.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

15
1.3 Structure of applications

The applications comprise the following elements:
Heading bar (page 16).
Body of the application (page 16).
Menu bar (page 20).
Tool bars (page 20).
Status bar (page 20).
1.3.1 Heading bar

The heading bar is located at the top of the application, and contains the name of the software, the
title of the document and the buttons used to reduce to icon (A), enlarge (B) and close the
application (C).
Figure 1
1.3.2 Body of the application

The body of the application is represented by the central area, in which the contents of the
application are displayed. These contents vary according to the application to which they belong,
and they comprise the following elements:
Graphics area (page 17)
Data area (page 17)
Tree list area (page 17)
Commands area (page 18)
Software windows (page 18)
Quick or context menu (page 20)
16 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

Graphics area
This area is used to display all the graphics, that is to say the elements forming the machine, the
drawings of machining operations, etc.. Two types of graphics area are illustrated below.
Figure 2
Data area
The data area comprises a table with a series of rows and columns. Each cell corresponds to a
data field. To enlarge the columns, position the cursor between two headings in the column itself,
then when a double arrow appears press the left mouse button and drag the cursor.
Figure 3
Tree list area

The area with the tree list varies on the basis of the pertinent application and consists of a list of
items organised into a hierarchical structure (in branches) that make interaction possible with other
parts of the said application. Two types of tree list are illustrated below:
A list of machining operations;
B list of tools.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

17
Figure 4
Commands area
The commands area is the part of the Editor application in which the program rows are entered.
Each program row represents a command or a function. A number of rows entered in sequence
form the whole machining operation.
Figure 5
Software windows
The software windows, known as “dialogue boxes”, are boxes that are used to dialogue with the
current application. The command fields and data fields in the dialogue boxes are described and
illustrated in the following paragraphs.
Command fields
The command fields are buttons or boxes used to enable certain functions or to confirm the
settings entered. To enable a command field, click the left mouse button to select it.
Search button
displays the search boxes in which the folders containing files to be opened are indicated.
18 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

Option button
enables an option and at the same time disables another one. This button is enabled simply by
clicking with the mouse.
Marker boxes
used to enable or disable one or more options.
Data fields
The data fields are the write-enabled areas inside a frame in which it is possible to enter the values
required. There are two types of data field, “write-enabled” ones and “preset” ones.
Write-enabled:
these are the data fields in which the text cursor appears, and in which it is possible to enter the
data required using the PC keyboard.
Preset:
these are data fields containing a list of items. The value is entered by selecting the item required
with the mouse.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

19
Quick or context menu

The quick menu is a menu created to facilitate operations within the various applications, and it
comprises a list of items containing the most frequently used commands. To display the quick
menu, position the cursor in any area within the application (for example on a table or in an image)
and click the right mouse button.
Figure 6
1.3.3 Menu bar

The menu bar is located under the heading bar and contains the menus.
Figure 7
1.3.4 Tool bars

The tool bar is made up of command buttons or command fields. It shows the most frequently
used commands, allowing them to be activated quickly.
Figure 8
It can be dragged to any point on the screen, using the handle provided. To return it to its original
position, simply double-click the mouse on the bar title itself.
1.3.5 Status bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the application, and displays information on the current
application.
20 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

1.4 Structure of utilities

The utilities do not all have the same structure. Each utility has its own structure, which varies
according to the functions of the utility itself (refer to chapter 3).
1.5 The zoom instruments

These tools are used to change the percentage with which the Editor application and
WorTableTooling application graphics areas are displayed, so as to show a specific area in greater
detail. The buttons to be used are the following: , , .
To display the Zoom in pointer used to increase the size of the graphics area image, click on .
To enlarge a certain portion of the graphics area, create a selection using the Zoom in pointer.
To display the Zoom out pointer used to decrease the size of the graphics area, click on . To
reduce the image, select it with the Zoom out pointer and click on the left mouse button.
To restore the image in the graphics area to the default size, click on .
1.6 Using the mouse

The mouse is used to move around inside the applications. When it is used, a pointer or cursor will
be displayed on screen to indicate the point in which the next operation will be carried out.
The left mouse button is used as follows:

click once to select the elements and items in each area of the application;
enlarge the graphical elements in the tooling window with a click;
click once to select the data fields and command fields in the dialogue boxes;
click once to select the tool bar buttons or menu commands;
display the data dialogue boxes, using a double click to select the items in the areas with tree
lists, table fields, graphic elements, etc.
create a selection area around the graphic elements to highlight them (see figure9). To do this,
place the cursor close to the elements you wish to select, then press the left mouse button and
drag the mouse to create an area that contains the elements required.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

21
Figure 9
select the one or more elements in the graphic area of the Editor application software. To
perform this operation, press the SHIFT key, place the cursor on the element to be selected
and press the left-hand button of the mouse; the selected element turns red. To continue the
selection, press the SHIFT and CTRL button and click on the required element.
associated with the CTRL button make a multiple selection of lines in the data area of the
ToolManager application software or of the graphic elements in the WorKTableTooling and
MachineConfiguration application software (including the tooling window).
The right mouse button is used as follows:

display the quick menu, by clicking on an area of the application, for example a status bar, a
surround bar, a table or on a graphic element in the tooling window (see paragraph “Quick or
context menu” page 20);
to tool-up the machine (see paragraph7.2).
select a single element of the profile in the graphic area of the Editor application software and
display the quick menu at the same time. Place cursor on item to select, press SHIFT and right
click mouse.
view the technical data, tool holder etc., listed in the dialogue box of the MachineConfiguration
application.
22 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

1.7 Keyboard commands

Some of the keys on the keyboard can be used to carry out certain operations, such as copying,
saving, opening, etc.
Pressing ALT and a letter key together opens the menu and selects an option. The letter to be
used with the ALT key is the one that is underlined (see figure 10).
Figure 10
The following tables give a description of the functions of the CTRL, SHIFT, TAB, ALT, ESC and
ARROW keys.
CTRL key Description

CTRL + N Creates a new document.
CTRL + O Opens the document.
CTRL + S Saves the document.
CTRL + P Prints the document.
CTRL + Z Cancels one or more of the operations performed.
CTRL + X Cuts the selected program row.
CTRL + C Copies the selected program row.
CTRL + V Pastes the selected program row.
CTRL + A Selects the whole text of the document.
CTRL + F Finds the word required.
CTRL + H Replaces a text string.
CTRL + SPACE Inserts a new parameter in the program row.
CTRL + SHIFT + SPACE BAR View parameters list in controls area, with text
cursor.
CTRL + SPACE BAR Shows lost parameters in the programming row
the text cursor is in, so that you can check or
modify their value.
CTRL + U Updates the selected program row but not the
graphics.
CTRL + R Updates the graphics.
SHIFT key Description

SHIFT + F4 Deletes the machining operation selected in the
graphics area.
SHIFT + F2 Displays the properties dialogue box.
SHIFT + F3 Opens the CAD to modify geometry.
SHIFT + F5 Displays the panel data dialogue box.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

23
SHIFT key Description

SHIFT + F6 Displays the variables dialogue box.
SHIFT + F7 Displays the program description dialogue box.
SHIFT + DOWN or UP ARROW KEY Selects or unselects a number of rows in a table.
SHIFT + TAB Returns to the previous box.
Generic keys Description

ALT + RIGHT ARROW KEY Explodes a machining operation.
ALT + LEFT ARROW KEY Implodes a machining operation.
ALT + F4 Closes the dialogue box.
ARROW KEYS Used to scroll through the rows in the table and
select an item in any one of the options lists.
F3 Repeats the search operation on the text string.
TAB Used to move from one box in the table to the next,
or to jump from one command field to another in
the dialogue boxes.
ESC Used to quit the dialogue boxes quickly without
saving.
24 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

2 Applications
2 Applications
The BiesseWorks machining operation programming system comprises four applications

(application softwares):
Editor
ToolManager
MachineConfiguration
WorkTableTooling
2.1 Editor
The Editor application is used to program the machining operations to be carried out on the
machine, with the support of an external CAD (SmartSketch). To start the application, use the Start
menu on the Windows applications bar (see figure 11).
Figure 11: Windows START menu
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

25
2 Applications
Structure of the body of the application

Figure 12: Editor
The body of the application displays the working document (Editor application document) which
consist of 4 areas:
tree list area; displays the hierarchy of machining operations. Click the left mouse button on
the “+” symbol in front of the icon and name to expand the list, or click the “–” symbol in front of
the icon and name to close it.
import area; displays the drawing imported in CID or DXF format.
graphics area; displays the drawing of the panel and of the machining operation.
commands area; displays the program rows relating to the machining operation shown in the
graphics area.
Information on the status bar

The Editor application status bar contains the data relating to panel dimensions. When the flashing
traffic light appears on the right hand corner of the status bar this indicates that a data item
has been modified and it is necessary to carry out an update using the button .
Information on colours
To set the colours used in the various areas of the application, display the Editor Environment card
of Setup (see chapter 4).
26 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
The quick menu

The quick menu shows the list of most commonly used commands which vary depending on the
position of the mouse cursor in the document.
The options of the quick menu are reported below followed by a brief description.
Cut; deletes the drawing or selected text.
Copy; copies the drawing or selected text.
Paste; inserts the previously copied or cut drawing or text.

Delete; deletes any empty spaces between the rows in the commands area.
Properties...; displays the properties window for the drawing elements selected or for the
programming row on which the cursor is positioned.
Edit the geometry...; accesses CAD to modify the drawing. To enable this function the CAD must
be run from the Editor application.
Insert; inserts the machining operations in the document. The options available are the same as
those listed in the menu Insert (see page 30).
Operations; the item Divide machining operation is used to split the selected string, ROUT or
GEO, creating a new ROUT or GEO string for each geometric profile it contains.
Explode; expands the program row containing the cursor, displaying all the elements that make it
up one after the other.
Implode; reduces all the program rows for the same geometry or the same machining operation to
a single row.
Update; updates the drawing based on the new settings.
Diagnostics...; displays the dialogue box with the diagnostics data for the whole machining
program. This is activated after the machining program has been optimised.
Diagnostics for this line...; displays the dialogue box with the diagnostics for the selected program
row. This is activated after the machining program has been optimised.
Highlight non-optimised lines; highlights the program rows that the optimiser has been unable to
optimise.
Zoom in; enlarges a portion of the graphics area.
Zoom out; reduces a portion of the graphics area.

Adapt import view; adapts the imported drawing to the size of the import area.
Adapt program view; adapts the drawing to the size of the graphics area.
Automatic import...; automatically imports the DXF or CID type document. This button only
appears in the Editor application software if the CAD graphics area has been indicated in the
Setup to be used in place of the Editor graphics area.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

27
2 Applications
Menu bar
The following are the menus with descriptions of all the options they contain.
File
New;
creates a new document.
Open;
opens a document.
Close;
closes the current document.
Save;
stores the data in a file with extension BPP.
Save as;
creates a copy of the current document with a different name.
Environment variabiles...;
displays the dialogue box Parameter table with the list of variables of type Environmental.
Macros;
displays the dialogue box with list of all macros created (see chapter 17).
Commands;
displays the dialogue box used to define the commands to be made visible in the program rows.
Import;
import DXF or CID document into active document (see chapter 18).
Export;
convert active document by generating a file in format DXF, CID or WMF. To be saved in DXF or
CID the document must contain not only the geometry but also the machining operation, i.e. the
ROUT or ROUTG commands.
Create macro...;
displays the dialogue box to create macros (see chapter 17).
Macro properties...;
displays the dialogue box used to consult the data in macros that have been created.
Print;
prints the current document.
Print preview;
displays the result of a program row printout.
Set printer;
displays the dialogue box used to define the printer characteristics.
Settings...;
displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.
Exit;
exits the Editor application.
28 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Edit
Undo;
cancels one or more of the operations performed.
Copy the text;

copies the selected text to the commands area so that it can be pasted onto another document (for
example TXT, DOC, etc.).
Cut;
deletes the selected text from the commands area.
Copy;
copies the selected text to the commands area.
Paste;
inserts the cut or copied text into the commands area.
Delete; deletes any empty spaces between the rows in the commands area.
Select all;
selects all the text in the commands area.
Properties...;
displays the properties window for the drawing elements selected or for the programming row on
which the cursor is positioned.
Edit the geometry...;

accesses CAD to modify the drawing. To enable this function the CAD must be run from the Editor
application.
Explode; expands the program row containing the cursor, displaying all the elements that make it
up one after the other.
Implode; reduces all the program rows for the same geometry or the same machining operation to
a single row.
Find;
finds the text required in the commands area.
Repeat;
repeats the search for the text required in the commands area.
Replace;
replaces a text row in the commands area.
Add comment;
changes the program row selected in the commands area into a comment.
Remove comment;
changes the comment selected in the commands area into a program row.
Add indent;
inserts an indent in the commands area at the beginning of the selected row.
Remove indent;
removes the indent in the commands area at the beginning of the selected row.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

29
2 Applications
Next parameter;
inserts the single parameters available to complete the program row in sequence.
Display parameters;
displays a list of parameters that can be used to complete the program row.
Insert
Instructions;
inserts VBScript instructions.
Macros;
displays the dialogue box to enter the macros in the program (see chapter 17.6 “Inserting macros
into the program”).
Bores;
allows access to boring operations list (see chapter 15):
Basic;
used to access the basic options list.
• Generic bore;
creates a boring operation to be performed with the vertical or horizontal spindle.
• Vertical bore;
creates a boring operation to be performed with the vertical spindle.
• Horizontal bore;
creates a boring operation to be performed with the horizontal spindle.
• System bore;
creates a “parametric system” type boring operation to be performed with the vertical
spindle.
• Bore with C axis on straight side;
creates a boring operation on the flat side of the panel, to be performed using the C axis.
• Bore with C axis on circular side;
creates a boring operation on the curved side of the panel, to be performed using the C axis.
• Bore from geometry;
assigns the parameters relating to the boring operation to be performed using the vertical or
horizontal spindle to a circle.
Macro;
used to view list of macros to enter in program. The option only displays if the boring macros
have been enabled (see paragraph 17.5 “Activation/deactivation of the macros”).
Cuts;
used to access list of cutting operations performable with circular blade tools (see chapter 15):
Basic;
• X cut;
creates a cut along the X axis on the top or bottom side of the panel.
• Y cut;
creates a cut along the Y axis on the top or bottom side of the panel.
• Generic cut;
creates an angled cut on all sides of the panel.
30 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
• Format piece;
creates a squaring operation centred on the panel.
• Rectangular cut;
creates a squaring operation not centred on the panel.
• Cut from geometry;
changes the lines of a selected geometry into cuts.
Inserts a call-up for a macro;
used to view list of macros to enter in program. The option only displays if the cutting macros
Millings;
used to access the options list for milling and cutting operations (see chapter 15):
Basic;
used to access the basic EGA options list.
• Milling;
used to create a drawing to which machining parameters can be attributed (ROUT
command).
• Milling from geometry;
associates the selected drawing with a milling operation (ROUTG command).
• Define geometry;
used to create the drawing (GEO command). Consult chapter 13.
• Pocketing;
empties the selected profile.
• Text;
this makes it possible to create a text to which to attribute the machining operation
parameters (command GEOTEXT).
• End of path;
terminates the drawing.
• Starting point;
defines the X and Y co-ordinates for the drawing start point.
used to view list of macros to enter in program. The option only displays if the milling macros
Lines;
used to access the EGA options list to create lines; for a more detailed description please
consult paragraph ““Line” type tools”, page 204.
• Line given end point;
creates a line using the co-ordinates of a known end point as reference value.
• Line given length and angle;
creates a line using a length and the angle of the line with respect to the X axis positive
direction as reference values.
• Line given angle and final X;
creates a line using the X co-ordinate of the end point and the angle of the line with respect
to the positive direction of the X axis as reference values.
• Line given angle and final Y;
creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of the end point and the angle of the line with respect
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

31
2 Applications
• Chamfer;
creates a chamfer.
• Line given length and final X;
creates a line using the X co-ordinate of its end point and a length as reference values.
• Line given length and final Y;
creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of its end point and a length as reference values.
• Line given length and tangency to previous item;
creates a line using the length and the tangency to the preceding element as reference
values.
• Line given end point angle and tangency to previous item;
creates a line using the end point co-ordinates, the angle of the line with respect to the
positive direction of the X axis and the tangency to the preceding element as reference
values.
• Line given end point and tangency to previous item;
creates a line using the end point co-ordinates and the tangency to the preceding element
as reference values.
• Incremental line given end point;
creates a line, defining the end point co-ordinates as increases to the end point co-ordinates
of the preceding element.
Curves;
used to access the EGA options list to create curves; for a more detailed description please
consult paragraph ““Curve” type tools”, page 208.
• Curve given end point and centre;
creates a curve using the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve and the co-ordinates of a
known end point as reference values.
• Curve given end point and tangency to previous item;
creates a curve using the co-ordinates of the end point of the curve and the tangency to the
preceding element as reference values.
• Connector A;
creates a connection radius between the selected element and the preceding one (of type
A).
• Connector B;
creates a connection radius that can be used to machine door and window frames (of type
B).
• Curve given end point and radius;
creates a curve using the radius of the curve and the co-ordinates of the end point of the
curve as reference values.
• Curve given angle and centre;
creates a curve using the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve and the angle of the curve
with respect to the positive direction of the X axis as reference values.
• Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point determined);
creates a curve with a known start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve
and the tangency to the following element as reference values.
• Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined);
creates a curve with unknown start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve
and the tangency to the following element as reference values.
32 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
• Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point determined);
creates a curve with a known start point, using the radius of the curve and the tangency to
the following element as reference values.
• Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined);
creates a curve with an unknown start point, using the radius of the curve and the tangency
to the following element as reference values.
• Curve given end point radius and tangency to previous item;
creates a curve using the co-ordinates of the end point of the curve, the radius of the curve
and the tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
• Curve given angle centre radius and tangency to previous item;
creates a curve using the radius and the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve, the
tangency to the preceding element and the angle of the curve with respect to the positive
direction of the X axis as reference values.
• Curve using three points;
creates a curve passing through three points.
• Incremental curve given angle and centre point;
creates a curve using the centre of the curve, which is obtained by incrementing the co-
ordinates of the end point for the preceding element, and the angle of the curve with respect
• Incremental curve given radius and end point;
creates a curve using the radius of the curve and the end point, which is obtained by
incrementing the co-ordinates of the end point for the preceding element, as reference
values.
Figures;
used to access the EGA options list to create figures; for a more detailed description please
consult paragraph ““Figure” type tools”, page 210.
• Ellipse;
creates an ellipse.
• Oval;
creates an oval.
• Circle given centre and radius;
creates a circle using the centre and the radius as reference values.
• Circle given three points;
creates a circle passing through three points.
• Rectangle;
creates a rectangle with or without chamfers/radiusing.
• Polygon;
creates a polygon with or without chamfers/radiusing.
• Star;
creates a star-shaped drawing with or without chamfers/radiusing.
Insertions;
used to access the options list for insertion operations, for example hinge and hinge mounting
plate fixing operations, etc.
Insertion;
enters the INSERT command between the programming rows (see chapter 15).
Insertion from geometry;
enters the INSERTG command between the programming rows (see chapter 15).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

33
2 Applications
Tracers;
used to access the list of options for use of the thickness tracers.
Tracer;
enters the command for piece tracing between the programming rows (see chapter 12).
Functions;
used to access the options list to carry out auxiliary operations (see chapter 12):
Basic;
• ISO code;
inserts ISO codes between the program rows.
• Move piece;
moves the panel origin.
• Rotate geometry;
rotates the drawing.
• Geometry scale;
applies a scale factor to the drawing.
• Move geometry;
moves the drawing.
• Wait for piece positioning;
inserts a suspension between the program rows to allow transfer, rotation or overturning of
the panel.
• Sides from geometry;
changes the drawing elements into sides of the panel.
• Side from geometry on side faces;
creates one side from the geometry created on one of the four standard side faces.
• Side from geometry using section plan;
creates one side from the geometry created on face zero and on one of the four standard
side faces.
• Circular side;
creates a side with a curved surface.
• Straight side;
creates a side with a flat surface.
used to view list of macros to enter in program. The option only displays if the functions
macros have been enabled (see paragraph 17.5 “Activation/deactivation of the macros”).
Display
Zoom in;
enlarges a portion of the graphics area.
Zoom out;
reduces a portion of the graphics area.
Adapt program view;

adapts the drawing to the size of the graphics area.
34 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Adapt import view;

adapts the imported drawing to the size of the import area.
Highlight non-optimised lines;

highlights the program rows that the optimiser has been unable to optimise.
Import background;
displays the imported drawing according to the side of the panel selected.
ToolBar:
Main;
enables or disables the Main tool bar.
Edit;
enables or disables the Edit tool bar.
Tools;
enables or disables the Tools tool bar.
Graphic output;
enables or disables the Graphic output tool bar.
Technology;
enables or disables the Technology tool bar.
Machining operations;
enables or disables the Machining operations tool bar.
Status bar;
enables or disables the Status bar.
Custom Toolbar 00;
enables or disables the customized tool bar. There are five available commands, and each
command is used to view a bar to be customized.
Graphic options...;
displays the dialogue box used to enter the graphic characteristics of machining operations.
Program
Piece data;
displays the dialogue box used to enter the main panel data.
Variables;
displays the variables window in the active document (see paragraph 16.1 “Variables”).
Description;
displays the dialogue box used to enter notes.
Automatic update;
updates the graphics and the program row automatically.
Update graphics;
updates the drawing based on the new settings.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

35
2 Applications
Tools
Optimise;
optimises the machining program.
Create NC Code;
processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run on the machine.
Create NC Code on file...;
processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run on the machine. Also
allows the generated file to be given a name and saved in a specific directory.
Simulate;
processes the machining program and displays the simulator window.
Add to job list;

adds the current program to the list table, when the List application is running, or to the Positions
application when the List application is closed. This function is enabled only on the machine and
can only be executed by enabling AUTOMATIC from the Positions application (see chapter 21).
Diagnostics...;
displays the dialogue box with the diagnostics for the whole machining program. This is activated
after the machining program has been optimised.
Diagnostics for this line...;

displays the dialogue box with the diagnostics for the selected program row. This is activated after
the machining program has been optimised.
CAD;
starts the CAD SmartSketch.
Table tooling;
starts the WorkTableTooling application to tool-up the work table.
Delete table tooling;

eliminates the work table tooling data from the machining program.
Machine tooling...;
opens the dialogue box used to tool-up the machine.
Machine configuration...;
starts the MachineConfiguration application to configure the machine.
Tools...;
starts the ToolManager to catalogue tools.
Windows
Cascade windows;
arranges open documents in cascade.
Tile horizontally;
arranges open documents side by side horizontally.
Tile vertically;
arranges open documents side by side vertically.
Editor and CAD:
36 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Tile vertically;
arranges the CAD and the Editor application side by side horizontally.
Tile horizontally;
arranges the CAD and the Editor application side by side vertically.
Help
Subjects;
displays the on-line Help.
Information on Editor;
displays the software release information window.
Description of buttons
The following is a list of the Editor application tool bars, with a description of the buttons.
Main bar
Button Description
Creates a new document.
Opens a document.
Stores the data in a file with extension BPP.
Deletes the selected element.
Copies the selected text to the commands area so that it can be pasted onto
another document (for example TXT, DOC, etc.).
Inserts the cut or copied text into the commands area.
Prints the current document.
Restores the cursor to a pointer.
Enlarges a portion of the graphics area.
Reduces a portion of the graphics area.
Adapts the imported drawing to the size of the import area.
Adapts the drawing to the size of the graphics area.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

37
2 Applications
Button Description
Displays the SW release information window.
Displays the on-line Help.
Tools bar
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box used to enter the main panel data.
Displays the variables window in the active document (see paragraph 16.1
“Variables”).
Updates the drawing according to the new settings. The need to carry out an
update is indicated by a flashing traffic light on the status bar (see paragraph
“Information on the status bar”, page 26).
Optimises the machining program.
Processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run
on the machine.
Processes the machining program and displays the simulator window.
Adds the current program to the list table, when the List application is
running, or to the Positions application when the List application is closed.
This function is enabled only on the machine and can only be executed by
enabling AUTOMATIC in the Positions application (see chapter 21).
Starts the CAD SmartSketch.
Starts the WorkTableTooling application.
Starts the MachineConfiguration application.
Starts the ToolManager application.
Displays the dialogue box used to tool-up the machine.
Displays the dialogue box used to set the software default values.
38 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Edit bar
Button Description
Changes the selected program row in the commands area into a comment.
Changes the selected comment in the commands area into a program row.
Inserts an indent in the commands area at the beginning of the selected row.
Removes the indent in the commands area at the beginning of the selected
row.
Graphic output bar

Button Description
Displays or hides the elements drawn in the graphics area.
Displays or hides the type of tool correction.
Displays or hides the tool lead-in and lead-out paths.
Displays the machining thickness.
Units bar
Button Description
Used to display the Machining operations tool bar used to program boring
operations.
Used to display the Machining operations tool bar used to program cutting
operations.
Used to display the Machining operations tool bar, to program milling
operations, and the bar used to draw the profiles in EGA mode
.
Used to return to the start geometry/machining operation commands, when
commands for the creation of lines, curves, etc. are being used.
Used to access the list of tools to draw lines.
Used to access the list of tools to draw curves.
Used to access the list of tools to draw geometric figures.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

39
2 Applications
Button Description
Used to display the Machining operations tool bar to carry out insertion
operations, for example hinge and hinge mounting plate fixing operations
etc.
Used to display the Machining operations tool bar used to insert the
command ordering thickness tracing of the piece between program rows.
Used to display the Functions tool bar to program auxiliary operations.
Used to view the tool bar to insert macros between the program rows. This
button can only be seen if the active machining macros have been enabled.
Technology bar
Button Description
Changes the drawing into a boring operation.
Changes the drawing into a cutting operation.
Changes the drawing into a milling operation.
Changes the drawing into a geometry.
Changes the drawing into an insertion operation, for example into a hinge
mounting plate fixing operation, a hinge fixing operation, etc.
Changes the drawing into a side of a piece with flat surfaces.
Changes the drawing into a side of a piece with curved surfaces.
Defines a geometric element as a side of the piece.
not active.
not active.
Imports the DXF or CID type document manually. This button only appears in
the Editor application software if the CAD graphics area has been indicated
in the Setup to be used in place of the Editor graphics area.
Imports the DXF or CID type document automatically. This button only
appears in the Editor application software if the CAD graphics area has been
indicated in the Setup to be used in place of the Editor graphics area.
40 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
2.2 ToolManager
The ToolManager application is a tool database. It allows the tools to be used in the machining
operation to be catalogued, recording all their technical characteristics in a file. To run this
application, click on the button in the Editor application or use the Start menu in the Windows
applications bar (see figure 11).

Figure 13: ToolManager
The body of the application is divided into two areas:

tree list area; displays the hierarchy of tools, divided according to the class to which each tool
belongs. Click the left mouse button on the “+” symbol in front of the icon and name to expand
the list of tools in a specific class. Click the left mouse button on the “–” symbol in front of the
icon and name to close the list of tools. When a tool is selected from the tree list, the tool with
the same name in the table will change colour.
data area; indicates the technical characteristics of the tools recorded.
To display the list of tools by name, type, diameter, etc., click on the title of the column
required.
To modify fields in the table, use the quick menu (see chapter 6).
To select a number of rows in the table in sequence, click on the row you wish to start from,
press the SHIFT key and click on the row you wish to finish on. To select a number of non-
adjacent rows, press CTRL and click on the rows you wish to highlight.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

41
2 Applications
The quick menu

The quick menu of the ToolManager application software allows tool cataloguing to be managed
directly on the table or tree structure list (for information on its use, refer to paragraph “The
application quick menu”, page. 87).
Copy tool; creates a new tool by copying the characteristics of the selected tool.
Delete tool; eliminates the selected tool.
New tool; displays the dialogue box used to create a new tool.
Modify tool; modifies the data for the selected tool.
Modify Value ->; modifies the value of the selected tool.
Rename tool; renames the selected tool.
Add tool to a new group; adds the selected tool to a new group.
Add tool to an existing group; adds the selected tool to an existing group that is already present in
the list.
Menu bar
Main
Settings;
Import Data;
displays the dialogue box used to import the machine data.
Export data;
displays the dialogue box used to export the machine data.
Save tools;
saves the data relating to tools in the database.
Exit;
exits the ToolManager application.
Tools
New tool;
displays the dialogue box used to create a new tool.
Tool class manager;
displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool class.
Tool type manager;

displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool type.
42 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Filters
Activate filters;
displays the dialogue box used to find the tools required.
Groups manager;
displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the groups of tools.
View
Status bar;
Setup Bar;
enables or disables the Settings bar bar.
Filters bar;
enables or disables the Shows the filters window bar.
Help
Help Index;
Information on ToolManager...;
displays information on the software version.
The following is a list of the ToolManager application tool bars, with a description of the buttons.
Main bar
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool class.
Displays the dialogue box used to catalogue the tool type.
Displays the dialogue box used to create a new tool.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

43
2 Applications
Filters bar
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box used to find the tools required.
Displays the dialogue box used to consult and modify the groups of tools
created.
Settings bar
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box used to import data from the NC to the software.
Saves the data entered.
Updates the ToolManager application software, loading the data stored in the
NC or in the PC.
Indicates when the machine is moving.
44 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
2.3 MachineConfiguration
The MachineConfiguration application allows the parts of the machine to be configured and the
magazines, operating section and aggregates to be tooled.
It comprises a graphics area representing the machine. Click the mouse on an element in the
graphics area to enlarge it; double click to view the information window containing the technical
characteristics of the element itself.
To run this application, click on the button in the Editor application or use the Start menu in the
Windows applications bar (see figure 11).
Figure 14: MachineConfiguration
Information on colours in the graphics area

To set the colours used in the various areas of the application, display the Machine card of Setup
(see chapter 4).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

45
2 Applications
The quick menu

The quick menu of the MachineConfiguration application allows the display of the elements
present in the graphics area to be managed.
Show all; used to display the whole of the graphics area image.
Show previous item in foreground; used to enlarge the selected image.
Show top item in foreground; used to display the element immediately above the one displayed in
the foreground.
Information on the item; used to display the technical characteristics of the selected element.
Menu bar
Most of the commands in the MachineConfiguration application are used by the Technician to
configure the machine, and for this reason only the menus that can be used by the operator will be
illustrated and described here.
File
Settings;
Import data;
displays the dialogue box used to import the machine data.
Machine data wizard;

to be used by Biesse technicians only.
Exit;
closes the MachineConfiguration application.
Database
Main Unit;
Processing centres;
Operating sections;
Vertical boring units/electrospindles manager;
Boring units;
Spindles;
displays the dialogue box with the list of spindles.
46 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Working areas;
Axes;
displays a list of all the existing axes.
Tool magazines;
shows the dialogue box showing the list of magazines.
Origins;
displays a list of all the existing origins.
Aggregates;
displays the dialogue box showing the list of aggregates.
Tooling
Maching tooling;
displays the dialogue box Machine tooling used for video tooling of the operating section (see
paragraph 7.3 “Operating section tooling”).
Magazine tooling;
Magazine tooling displays the dialogue box used for video tooling of the tool magazines (see
paragraph 7.4 “Tool magazine tooling”).
Aggregate tooling;
Aggregate tooling displays the dialogue box used for video tooling of the aggregates (see
paragraph 7.5 “Aggregate tooling”).
Tools
Distance between spindles;
displays the dialogue box with the data relating to the distance between spindles (see paragraph
“Display the distances between spindles”).
Software limits;
displays the dialogue box containing the data regarding the operating section working field (see
paragraph “Consult the software limits”).
Data tables;
displays a dialogue box with a list of the machine components.
View
Status bar;
Machine data bar;
enables or disables the Machine data bar.
Tooling bar;
enables or disables the Tooling bar.
General bar;
enables or disables the General bar.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

47
2 Applications
Tool bar;
enables or disables the Tool bar.
Machine status;
shows the status of the machine.
Help
Help subjects;
Information on MachineConfiguration;
displays the SW release information window.
The following is a list of the MachineConfiguration application tool bars, with a description of the
buttons.
Machine data bar

Button Description
Displays the dialogue box with the list of machine components.
To be used by Biesse technicians only.
Displays the dialogue box with the list of spindles.
Displays a list of all the existing origins.
Displays a list of all the existing axes.
Displays the dialogue box with the list of magazines.
48 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box with the list of aggregates.
Tool bar
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box with the data relating to the distance between
spindles.
Displays the dialogue box containing the data regarding the operating
section working field.
Tooling bar
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box Machine tooling used for video tooling of the
operating section.
Displays the dialogue box Magazine tooling used for video tooling of the tool
magazines.
Aggregate tooling Displays the dialogue box used for video tooling of the
aggregates.
General bar
Button Description
Displays the dialogue box used to import data from the NC to the software.
Saves the data entered.
Updates the MachineConfiguration application software, loading the data

stored in the NC or in the PC.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

49
2 Applications
2.4 WorkTableTooling
The WorkTableTooling application is used to prepare the work table, position the panel on the table
and arrange the table elements (stops, suction cups, etc.) in the correct position to avoid damage
during machining operations. To run this application, click on the button in the Editor
application or use the Start menu in the Windows applications bar (see figure 11).

Figure 15: WorkTableTooling
The body of the application displays the work table configuration document which consists of two
areas:
graphics area; displays the work table and the panel to be machined.
tree list area; displays all the element to be used to configure the work table.
The quick menu

The quick menu is used to manage the work table tooling (for information on its use, refer to
chapter 8, page 129). The menu options are not always enabled because their activation depends
on the element type of the selected work table.
Show; shows the selected element in the foreground.

Show all; shows the whole work table.
Copy; copies the selected work table element.
50 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Paste; inserts the work table element that has been copied.
Eliminate; removes the selected work table element.

Select; used to select a number of work table objects simultaneously.
Rotation; turns the work table objects.
Make working area mirror; makes the working area a mirror area.
Tool symmetrical panel support; tools up the two symmetrical supports in the same way.
Restrict the panel support to the origin; restricts the selected panel support to its origin, only if it
has been set as mobile.
Set as active piece; makes the selected piece active, thus allowing it to be modified.
Move piece; moves the piece to another origin.
Duplicate the piece and tool it to origin...; inserts the piece on another origin.
Show machining operations; displays machining operations on the piece.
Check positions; used to check whether the work table objects have been positioned correctly.
Move all selected objects to the same position; moves all the selected objects to the same
position.
Positions; displays the dialogue box used to define the positioning values for the selected work
table object.
Properties; used to display the dialogue box containing the properties of the selected object.
Menu bar
File
New;
starts a new document.
Open;
opens documents with the extension PCF.
Close;
closes the document.
Save;
overwrites the data of the active PCF document or memorises the data of the new document in a
file with extension PCF.
Save as..;
creates a copy of the current PCF document with a different name.
Set as default;
memorises the active work table configuration document as the default configuration.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

51
2 Applications
Import file type wrb/tls;

imports files with the extension WRB and TLS.
Save piece;
saves the tooling.
Save and quit;
confirms the tooling and closes the WorkTableTooling application, returning to the Editor
application.
Change table configuration;

modifies the configuration of the work table.
Print;
prints the current document.
Print preview;
displays the print-out results for the current work table.
Set printer...;
displays the dialogue box used to define the printer characteristics.
Settings;
Exit;
exits the WorkTableTooling application.
Modify
Cancel;
cancels one or more of the operations performed.
Cut;
deletes the selected element.
Copy;
copies the selected element.
Paste;
pastes the cut or copied element into the graphics area.
Reset;
clears the document and deletes all the elements present in the graphics area.
Resets tooling in the panel;

resets the tooling associated with the piece loaded on the work table.
Panel parameters;
displays the list of parameters.
List of variables;
displays the variables list.
Update the dxf folders;

updates the folders containing machine component files with extension DXF.
52 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
Parameter tooling (relative values);

enables the parametric positioning of work table objects (mobile supports, shapeable suction cups,
etc.).
Non-parameter tooling (absolute values);

disables the parametric positioning of work table objects (mobile supports, shapeable suction
cups, etc.).
Positions;
displays the window with the position values for the selected object.
Removable tables...;
displays the window with the list of mobile supports and side stops supports defined as removable,
i.e. that can be removed manually from the work table surface.
Insert
Piece;
inserts the piece on the work table.
Exit
Simulate;
processes the machining program and displays the simulator window.
Optimise;
optimises the machining program.
Post Process;
processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run on the machine.
Show the tooling on origin...;

displays the window through which a non-modifiable preview document can be generated showing
the tooling referring to a new origin.
Display
Toolbar;
enables or disables the Main tool bar.
Status bar;
Operations bar;
enables or disables the Operations tool bar.
Adapt zoom;
restores the image to normal dimensions, adapting it to the area.
Zoom in;
enlarges a portion of the graphics area.
Zoom out;
reduces a portion of the graphics area.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

53
2 Applications
Normal cursor;
restores the cursor to a pointer.
Zoom in on active piece;

Enlarges the piece on the work table.
Tooling information;
displays the tooling information.
Tooling positions;
displays the table with the positioning values for work table objects.
Display shaped piece;

displays the shape of the piece to be machined (marked option), if non-standard sides have been
created.
Properties;
displays the properties list for the selected element.
Window
New window;
creates a new work document by making a copy of the open file.
Cascade;
arranges open documents in cascade.
Tile;
arranges the open documents horizontally on the screen without overlapping them so they can all
be seen.
Change to tooling mode;

enables work table tooling.
?
Help;
Information on WorkTableTooling...;
displays information on the software version.
54 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

2 Applications
The following is a list of the WorkTableTooling application tool bars with a description of the
buttons.
Main bar
Button Description
Opens a new document, to create a new configuration.
Opens files with extension PCF.
Imports files with extension WRB and TLS.
Saves the data in a file with extension PCF.
Displays the print-out results for the current work table.
Cleans the document, deleting all the elements in the graphics area.
Prints the current work table.
Displays a list of properties for the selected work table element.
Used to change to tooling mode. Only active if the application is run

independently, that is to say not in connection with the Editor application.
Restores the image to normal dimensions, adapting it to the area.
Enlarges a portion of the graphics area.
Reduces a portion of the graphics area.
Enlarges the piece on the work table.
Restores the cursor to a pointer.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

55
2 Applications
Operations bar
Inserts the panel on the work table.
Saves the tooling operation.
Confirms the tooling operation and exits the WorkTableTooling application,

returning to the Editor application.
Quits the WorkTableTooling application without saving and returns to the
Editor application.
Processes the machining program and displays the simulator window.
Optimises the machining program.
Processes the machining program and generates an ISO file that can be run
on the machine.
Displays the dialogue box used to enter the main panel data.
Displays the parameters list.
Displays the list of tooling positions.
Displays the window through which a non-modifiable preview document can

be generated showing the tooling referring to a new origin.
56 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0025.fm140605

3 Utilities
3 Utilities
The BiesseWorks machining operation programming system comprises the Applications,

described in chapter 2, and the following Utilities:
BatchRun
BackupManager
3.1 BatchRun
BatchRun is a utility used to process files with extension CID, DXF and BPP, generating ISO
format files that can be run on the machine. To start it, click on the Start menu in the Windows
application bar and then on the items: Programs, BiesseWorks, Tools, BatchRun. For a detailed
description of how to use BatchRun, see “Creating ISO files using BatchRun” on page 329.
Figure 16: BatchRun
The body of BatchRun is divided into two areas:

jobs area; displays a list of jobs.
import area; displays the imported files with extension CID, DXF and BPP.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0026.fm140605

57
3 Utilities
The following lists and describes the buttons.
Button Description
Exits the application and saves the settings.
Exits the application without saving.
Displays the dialogue box used to set up the application.
Processes the files.
Saves the settings.
Opens the file with information on the processed files.
Displays the dialogue box used to find the files to be imported to BatchRun.
Copies the file selected in the import area.
Pastes the file cut or copied previously to the import area.
Deletes the selected file from the import area or the selected job from the
jobs area.
Cleans the import area, deleting all the files present.
Displays the dialogue box used to modify the main panel data.
Displays the dialogue box used to find the file with extension LAY containing
the DXF file import keys.
Optimises the selected file.
Processes the selected file and displays the simulator window.
Processes the selected file, generating a file with extension ISO to be run on
the machine.
Displays the dialogue box used to modify variables.
Restores the initial data defined in the files, deleting settings made from
within the BatchRun application.
58 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0026.fm140605

3 Utilities
Button Description
Creates a new job.
Modifies the name of the job.
Description of the import area quick menu

Add items; displays the dialogue box used to find the files to be imported to BatchRun.
Copy; copies the file selected in the import area.

Paste; inserts the file cut or copied previously in the import area.
Remove items; deletes the selected file.
Rename; renames the selected file.
Set piece data; displays the dialogue box used to modify the main panel data.
Find dxf key file; displays the dialogue box used to find the file with extension LAY containing the
DXF file import keys.
Reset list; cleans the import area, deleting all the files present.
Description of the jobs area quick menu

New; creates a new job.
Delete; deletes the job created.
Rename; renames the job.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0026.fm140605

59
3 Utilities
3.2 BackupManager
BackupManager is a utility used to create copies of the machine data and machining programs.
For a detailed description of how to use the BackupManager, see 10.2 “Backup/restore machine
data and tool database” on page 154 and “Backup/restore machining programs and macros” on
page 195.
To start BackupManager click on the Start menu in the Windows application bar and then on the
items: Programs, BiesseWorks, Tools, BackupManager.
Figure 17: BackupManager
Description of fields
Copy; used to make a copy of the data required.
Restore; used to restore the copied data.
Data; enables copying of all the machine data, the tooling data and the tool database.
Tool bitmap; enables copying of all the image files created; for example files with the extension
bmp.
Programs; enables copying of all the programs created.
Macros; enables copying of all the macros created.
60 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0026.fm140605

4 General settings
4 General settings
This chapter provides the necessary information for personalising the working environment and
the tool bars and for defining the default technological data.
4.1 Personalising the tool bar

To speed up the most common operations, you can insert customised tool bars with the buttons
you use most. Click on the menu Display and one of the five options available, e.g. on the option
Custom Toolbar 00. Place the cursor on the toolbar button, right click on the mouse and click on
Customize.
Figure 18
E
D
A
C
A; List of available buttons.
B; List of buttons to insert in toolbar.
C; Commands to organise the buttons by moving them up and down.
D; Command to reset operations and reset buttons on toolbar when the window opens.
E; Command to save settings and close the window.
Toolbar creation procedure

1. Move buttons from area A to area B by double clicking.
2. Organise the buttons using buttons C.
3. Confirm with button E.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

61
4 General settings
4.2 Description of the Setup dialogue box

The Setup dialogue box enable you to set the default data for applications and consists of a series
of cards, each for a different type of data. To display it, select the menu File and the option
Settings... or click on .
The descriptions shown below concern the data fields that can be accessed using the
level 5 password. The description of the disabled fields, exclusively for the
technician’s use, is shown in the instructions for the Service.
Figure 19: Setup
Editor Environment card

This card is used to set the display mode in the Editor application.
2D CAD ; allows the CAD application graphics area to be used to draw and display all the
programmed machining operations, disabling the Editor graphics area.
CAM ; enables the default setting that allows all programmed machining operations to be
displayed in the Editor graphics area.
Show milling errors in CAD; enables or disables display of alarm messages when a drawing is
modified in the CAD integrated with the Editor application software.
Show macro messages; enables or disables display of alarm messages when macros are created.
62 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

4 General settings
Show standard side number; shows the number of each side of the panel.
Show piece data on opening; activates the window containing the variables used to define the
main characteristics and dimensions of the panel, when creating a new machining program.
Activate colour; used to display the program rows in the colours set in the Environmental data box.
Environmental data; used to set the colours with which to display the texts that appear in the
command area of the Editor application software.
Graphic view colours; used to set the colours in which the elements appearing in the graphics area
are displayed.
Machining operations card

This card is used to set certain data regarding the machining operations that can be performed on
the machine.
Active Inputs and Outputs; used to define which options appear in the data field Lead-in Type ->
and the data field Lead-out Type -> in the machining operation programming windows.
Piercing Z; used to define the position beyond which the tool cannot go after having perforated the
piece. Used in through machining operations.
Precision (mm); mainly used to correct the distance between centres of the spindles in the boring
units during conversion into “millimetres” or into “inches”.
3D Curve Segment (mm); used to set the length of the segments into which a 3D curve or a helix
will be discretized. A very low value will increase the number of segments and allow a greater level
of precision.
User correction; used to select the tool correction mode, that is to say to define the position of the
tool with respect to the machining path.
Machine card
This card is used to set the cartesian co-ordinates system in the MachineConfiguration application,
defining the arrangement of the cartesian axes on the machine and the references for angles and
inclinations. It also allows definition of the colours used for the elements displayed.
Item colours; used to set the colours in which the elements appearing in the graphics area are
displayed. For each element drawn it is possible to define the colours for the Edge field, the Filling
field and set the Line field type.
Global colours; used to set the colours that define the status of elements in the graphics area of
the Machine Configuration application.
Use a single DXF ; used to associate a single DXF file with the whole machine (default value 0).
Use a background image ; used to display a 3D representation of the machine in the background
of the graphics area of the MachineConfiguration application and in the tooling windows.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

63
4 General settings
Tools card
This card is used to define tool default data.
Safety distance for boring tools; defines the default safety distance for boring tools.
Safety distance for milling tools; defines the default safety distance for milling tools.
Safety distance for cutting tools; defines the default safety distance for cutting tools.
Default diameter for cutting tools; defines the default diameter of cutting tools.
Default image; used to assign a default image in BMP format to a tool. Tick the box if you wish the
system to assign a default image to the tool created, if there is no pre-set image for that tool.
Show bitmap in tool table ; used to display the BMP format of the selected tool in the ToolManager
application tree list area.
Automatic class management; enables automatic calculation of speed, according to the tool
diameter, with reference to the curves shown in the data for that tool class.
Optimiser card
This card is used to define optimiser default data.
Box Optimisation type; ; used to select the type of optimisation. The three options are connected to
the fields in the Typical optimisation data box.
Order by job list; used to arrange the machining operations in the order found in the source
program.
Order by time; used to reduce machining times to a minimum.
Order by type; used for ordering the machining operations on the basis of the type
(W_CUTTING, W_ROUTING, etc.).
Change direction allowed; used to change the working direction of a profile, to adapt the
machining operation to the tool being used (according to the direction of rotation). Enable the field
by clicking on the marker box.
Symmetrical programs; enables optimisation of the programs defined as symmetrical, i.e. with the
field Symmetry of the dialogue box Piece variables enabled. The box must be marked.
Box Typical optimisation data; fields connected to the options selected in the Optimisation type
box.
Direction X+; forces the optimiser to order boring operations so that the processing centre
always moves in the positive X direction.
Direction X-; forces the optimiser to order boring operations so that the processing centre
always moves in the negative X direction.
Change tool order; authorises the optimiser to group together machining operations that use
the same tool. In this way it is possible to reduce the number of tool change operations and
the time required to start up and shut down the electrospindle.
Optimise first boring operation; forces the optimiser to insert boring cycles at the start of the
machining program.
Sort tools; forces the optimiser to group together machining operations that use the same tool.
64 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

4 General settings
Order by tool direction; forces the optimiser to group together boring operations according to
their working direction.
BoxTool change options

Unload spindles; used to unload tools from the spindles on which automatic tool change
procedures have been carried out. This operation is carried out at the end of a machining
operation. To enable this function, tick the marker box.
BoxVarious data
Enable sw limits; enables verification of the spindles and checks that they comply with
software limits. This operation is carried out during the optimisation phase. To make this test
available, enable the field by clicking on the marker box.
Through mach. at end; enables the optimisation criteria of the through and non through
machining operations. When the box is checked, the optimiser first carries out the non-through
machining operations and then the through machining operations.
Best drop; used to make a selection from the various possible combinations of spindles that
can be used in a single boring run. In this case, if it finds more than one combination of
spindles, the CAM is able to select the best one.
User card
Card used to define the directrixes on which all the applications and utilities work.
Main sector; displays the folder for the sector in which the current machine folder is located. There
are four different sectors: BIESSE_MACHINE; PROTEC_MACHINE; GENERIC_MACHINE;
COMIL_MACHINE.
Machine name; name of the current machine.
; displays the dialogue box with a list of the versions of all BiesseWorks modules.
; displays the table showing a list of options enabled in the software. The table consists of two
columns: column Option with a list of all the options present in the software; column Enabled (0/1)
indicating whether the option is included or otherwise in the software. 1 = option present; 0 =
option not present.
Insertion data card

The data in this card is for the use of Biesse technicians only.
Work tables card

Password card
This card is used to enable users to carry out modifications on certain software data.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

65
4 General settings
Password; used to enable new users by entering the password (see paragraph “Password
activation”, page 74).
Change Password; indicates the enabled users and allows them to be selected in order to change
the password (see paragraph “Password level management”, page 74).
General card
Card used to set certain values that determine general operation of the BiesseWorks modules.
Large buttons; used to display large buttons on the tool bars. The size of these buttons is 32 by 32
pixel.
Small buttons; used to display small buttons on the tool bars. The size of these buttons is 16 by 16
pixel.
User buttons; used to customise the size of buttons on the tool bars. Enter the value in pixel in the
field Dimensions (the default value is 24).
Unit of measurement; used to define the default unit of measurement. When a unit of
measurement is set, for example “millimetres”, and you wish to use another unit of measurement
during programming operations, for example “inches”, it is possible to force the setting by typing
the value followed by an asterisk plus the unit of measurement (e.g. 500*inch).
Language; used to change the software language. Reboot the application after selecting.
Job list card

The data in this card is for the use of Biesse technicians only. The settings must not be modified for
any reason.
Tooling card
This card is used to define certain aspects relating to display of the tooling dialogue boxes.
Show data tree in machine tooling; shows the tree list area in the Machine tooling dialogue box.
Show data tree in magazine tooling; shows the tree list area in the Magazine tooling dialogue box.
Store last item in foreground; stores the last display setting used in the Machine tooling dialogue
box, and displays the box in this way when it is next opened.
Check aggregate subspindle tooling; enables the system to check whether the tools and
aggregates are compatible.
66 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

4 General settings
DXF Definition card

This card is used to define the settings used to import files in DXF format. For more detailed
information please see Chapter 19
Active type; used to establish the formalism, that is to say the type of rules, used when importing
DXF files.
Parameters; list of parameters to which are associated the keys for the DXF layers to be imported.
The list of parameters varies according to the type of formalism selected in field Active type (for a
description of the parameters, refer to chapter 19, page 305).
Keys; lists the keys to use in order to generate the syntax of the DXF layers to import. The list
varies according to the type of formalism selected in the field Active type. The listed keys can be
modified, in other words, they can be personalised (see chapter 19, page 305).
, used to save a file with extension LAY containing the keys configuration defined in the card.
This file can be used to set the DXF files to be imported to BatchRun.
, opens a keys configuration.
String Separator; separator character for alphanumeric values used for the layer syntax. Default
value.
Symbols are effected by capitals; used to enable or disable the “case sensitive” function, i.e. to
distinguish lower from upper case letters. For example, for the keys in the table to be recognised
by the system they must correspond to ones originally defined in the layer; the capitals or lower
case letters must be correctly typed (the word “panel” will not be recognised if “Panel” or “PANEL”
is written). The black box flag indicates the function is enabled.
Piece X dimension; used to define the default value of the dimension of the piece on the X axis.
This value is automatically taken up if it is not indicated in the imported DXF layer.
Piece Y dimension; used to define the default value of the dimension of the piece on the Y axis.
Piece Z dimension; used to define the default value of the dimension of the piece on the Z axis.
DXF Tolerance; used to define the precision of decimal figures for DXF conversion.
Unit of measurement; used to define the default unit of measurement. The unit of measurement
indicated in this field is used by the system in the case where a specific unit of measurement has
not been defined in the file in DXF format.
Import layer in alphabetical order; this makes it possible to decide the order with which to import
the layers of the DXF, if the BIESSE type of formalism is chosen (option BiesseWorks DXF). The
enabled box indicates that the DXF layers are imported in alphabetical order. The disabled box
indicates that the layers imported have not been arranged at all but keep the order they were
created in.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

67
4 General settings
Figure 20: Definition of symbols in the software settings (setup).

Table of parameters A and table of symbols (blocks) B.
Input Output card

Card used to define the Post Processors assigned to the machine and any parameters required for
them.
; button used to define the default direct into which to download the ISO files.
Import from NC card

The data contained in this card are used by the modules performing input of machine data from the
various NCs (XNC, NC4xx etc.). Part of this data is used in the MachineConfiguration application,
during import phases, as default values for all missing data items.
Confirm dimensions; enables the message confirming the dimensions of each element.
Confirm speed; enables the message requesting confirmation of machining speed data for
imported machine components.
Confirm diameter; enables the message requesting confirmation of data relating to the minimum
and maximum diameter of tools compatible with the imported spindle data.
Insert DXF ; enables the message confirming the name of the DXF file to be associated with each
element.
Magazine position if unknown; enables the message confirming the magazine tool holder, if this is
not specified in the import tables.
Insert slide positions; enables the message confirming the number of positions on the slide, if this
number is not found in the PLC tables.
68 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

4 General settings
Spindle diam. (mm); default value for the minimum/maximum diameter of tools compatible with the
spindle to be assigned to spindles that do not have this value.
Rotation speed(rpm); default value for the minimum/maximum rotation speed to be assigned to
tools and aggregates that do not have this value.
Working speed(mm-mn); default value for the minimum/maximum machining speed (advance) to
be assigned to tools and aggregates that do not have this value.
Lowering speed(mm-mn); default value for the minimum/maximum lowering speed to be assigned
to tools that do not have this value.
Clockwise spindle, Anticlockwise spindle, Indifferent spindle; are used to define the default
direction of rotation to be assigned to imported boring spindles.
Confirm rot. speed; used to enable the message confirming the rotation speed for each boring tool.
Boring coupling; used to define the type of coupling for boring tools.
TPTCHAggregate coupling; used to define the type of coupling for milling tools and for aggregates.
Blade coupling; used to define the type of coupling for circular blade cutting tools.
Milling data card

This card is used to define the default settings that appear in the milling programming windows.
These values will also be used when importing a technological DXF file in which the technology
has not all been specified.
Box General Data

Type; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue boxes are opened.
Tool; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue box is first opened.
Diameter; used to set the default diameter of the tool proposed when the dialogue box is
opened.
Depth; used to set the default machining depth proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Through; defines the fact that, when the window is first opened, the machining depth must be
a through machining operation.
Box Speed
Working Speed; used to define the tool speed of advance during the machining operation.
Rotation speed; used to define the tool rotation speed during the machining operation.
Lowering Speed; used to define the tool lead-in speed at the start of the machining operation.
Lead-out Speed; used to define the tool lead-out speed at the end of the machining operation.
Box Typical Data

Correction; used to establish the position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory.
Reverse possible; enables the automatic procedure that allows the software to decide whether
to maintain or reverse the tool direction of advance during the machining operation.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

69
4 General settings
Enable Zs Ze; enables the management of field Starting Z and data field End Z, both defined
during the programming phase. If the check box is disabled, the CAM does not manage the
data defined in the two above-mentioned fields.
Runs; used to define the default number to display in field Vertical runs of the milling operation
dialogue box.
Over-material; used to define the amount of material to be removed during finishing of the
machining operation.
Min dec. length ; used to define the point close to the piece corner where the electrospindle
must begin to slow down. The value is expressed in millimetres and represents the minimum
distance from the corner that can be used by the system in the case where a lower value has
been entered in field Decel. Dist. mm of the milling operations dialogue boxes.
Sharp corners; enables an automatic procedure that allows the software to interpret and run
programmed sharp edge machining operations.
Corner lead-out; used to define the default value of the distance to be maintained between the
tool and the piece when the tool comes out near the sharp edge.
Corner angle; used to define the default value for the tool lead-out angle to create the sharp
edge.
Floating; used to enable the software to use the copier. By enabling the box, that field in the
milling dialogue box is opened.
Chip deflector; used to enable the software to use the chip deflection aggregate. The ticked
box enables you to access the data field in the milling dialogue box to use the chip deflection
aggregate.
Box Input Output

Lead-in type; used to establish the type of tool lead-in proposed when the dialogue boxes are
opened.
Lead-out type; used to establish the type of tool lead-out proposed when the dialogue boxes
are opened.
Lead-in angle; used to define the tool lead-in angle with respect to cartesian plane X-Y.
Entry Dist; refers to translation of the machining operation point of origin further forwards or
further back along the same path. Only used on closed profiles.
Decel. Dist; used for the distance between the tool deceleration point and the point of
geometrical discontinuity. Slowdown takes place both when the tool approaches the end of the
geometry, and when it moves away from that point.
Lead-out angle; used for the tool lead-out angle with respect to the cartesian plane X-Y.
Overlap Dist; used for the distance between the tool lead-in point and the tool lead-out point.
% Radius; used to define the default value for the tool lead-in and lead-out radius.
Lead-out Delta; used to define the default value of the tool lead-out delta.
Comp. without Lead-in Lead-out; defines the fact that, in the absence of tool lead-in and lead-
out, automatic compensation will be carried out in any case in the air.
Comp. on Lead-in Lead-out; defines the fact that tool lead-in and lead-out will be carried out
with compensation.
Enable percentage speed; enables percentage speed management. The enabled field
modifies the data setting in field Work.Speed [mm/min] of the milling operation windows. In this
70 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

4 General settings
case, in fact, this data item takes on another meaning; the value to enter no longer concerns a
speed but rather a percentage used to increase or decrease the speed value entered in tool
data field Std WorkSpd.
For example, in the case where the tool to be used has a working speed of 3000 mm/min, in
order to modify it and reduce it to 1500 mm/min, the number 50 (3000 x 50% = 1500) and not
1500 must be entered in field Work.Speed [mm/min] of the machining windows.
Default angle; used to define the default angle according to the type of lead-in or lead-out
selected in the top list.
Cutting data card

This card is used to define the default settings that appear in the cutting programming windows.
Box General Data

Tool; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Thickness; used to set the thickness of the tool proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Depth; used to set the machining depth proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Box Speed
Lowering Speed; used to define the tool lead-in speed at the start of the machining operation.
Box Typical Data

Correction; used to establish the position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory.
Total thickness; used to establish the thickness of the machining operation, that is to say the
thickness of the groove being cut.
Runs; used to define the default number to display in field Vertical runs of the cutting operation
dialogue box.
Blade tolerance; this is used to define the minimum position (mm) required to guarantee that
one passage is superimposed on another passage of the tool during the machining operation.
Allows any errors caused by worn tools to be reduced to a minimum. When the value 1, value
0 or a value less than 0.1 is input, the machine interprets this data as though it had been set at
1.
Reverse possible; enables an automatic procedure that allows the software optimiser to
reverse the tool’s direction of movement during the machining operation, according to the
direction of rotation of the blade. This procedure improves the blade’s machining quality, as
during the machining operation the material towards the inside of the panel is compressed,
thus preventing the surfaces from chipping.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

71
4 General settings
Reverse tool working direction; enables an automatic procedure that allows the software to
reverse the tool’s direction of movement only during the machining operation.
Radius correction; enables correction of the blade radius during the machining operation.
Box Multiple runs

Step; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool to
bring it back to the working position for the preceding step.
SAFETY; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the
tool to bring it back to the safety position.
Position; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
for a distance equal to the set position.
Impact; enables an automatic procedure that during the multiple passes checks the rerising of
the tool taking it back to the point of contact with surface of the piece.
Boring data card

This card is used to define the default settings that appear in the boring programming windows.
Box General Data

Tool; used to establish the type of tool proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Diameter; used to set the thickness of the tool proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Depth; used to set the machining depth proposed when the dialogue box is opened.
Box Speed
Lowering speed; used to define the tool lead-in speed at the start of the machining operation.
Box Typical Data
Runs; used to define the default number to display in field Vertical runs of the boring operation
dialogue box.
Lowering distance; used to define the default point at which the tool must begin slowing down
during through machining, i.e. the distance between the point and the piece's lower surface.
Box Multiple runs

Step; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool to
bring it back to the working position for the preceding step.
SAFETY; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the
tool to bring it back to the safety position.
72 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

4 General settings
Position; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
for a distance equal to the set position.
Impact; enables an automatic procedure that, during multiple runs, controls raising of the tool
to bring it back to the position in which it contacts the surface of the panel.
Editor windows card

This card is used to select which data fields of the machining operations are to be enabled and to
define which fields are to be displayed in the first card of the machining dialogue boxes.
Check box Piece data; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first card
of dialogue box Piece variables. Check the boxes of the required fields.
Check box Boring windows; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first
card of the boring operations dialogue box. Check the boxes of the required fields.
Check box Cutting windows; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first
card of the cutting operations dialogue box. Check the boxes of the required fields.
Check box Milling windows; used to select which of the listed fields are to be displayed in the first
card of the milling operations dialogue box. Check the boxes of the required fields.
Visible parameters list; used to enable the assisted selection of parameters or variables,
transforming some writable data fields A into default data fields B in which the list of variables
created and basic parameters are displayed.
A B
Show the full tool list; used to enable the selection of the tool to use in the machining operations
window, disabling the selection of the type, i.e. data field Tool Type. When this check box in the
machining operations windows is checked, data field Tool Code displays the complete list of all the
tools.
Input and output level; used to select in which card of the machining operation windows to display
the data fields used to define the type of tool lead-in/lead-out from the piece.
Help images level; used to select which help image (0, 1 or 2) to display in the dialogue boxes.
Show description in the operations windows; displays data field Aggr21 angle in the boring and
milling operation dialogue box for enabling or disabling the use of aggregate 21.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

73
4 General settings
4.3 Password
The password is an alphanumeric code that is used to protect certain data from possible
tampering. There are a number of levels of password, according to the software use. A high level
password will enable all possible operations to be carried out and will allow the data to be saved in
a permanent manner.
Password activation
To enable new users to have one of the 5 password levels available, display the Setup dialogue
box and click on card Password. Enter the code in the appropriate data field, click on command
Confirm and on button Save and exit.
Password level management

To associate a password to each individual user level or to modify the password associated to a
specific user level, display the Setup dialogue box and click on card Password. Select the required
user level from the list and enter the code in field Insert new password and in field Confirm
password. Confirm the setting by clicking button Confirm .
4.4 Language setting

To set the language, display the Setup dialogue box, insert the fifth level password, click on card
General and choose the language in data field Language. Close the Setup dialogue box by
clicking on button Save and exit. Close the open applications and then reopen them to activate
the language set.
74 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a710k0003.fm140605

The term programming indicates the creation of a file with extension BPP (Editor application
document or machining program) containing the data for the machining operations to be
performed by the machine on the panel.
5.1 Description of the piece

Description of the standard panel sides:
side 0: top part of the panel;
side 1: left hand part of the panel;
side 2: front part of the panel;
side 3: right hand part of the panel;
side 4: rear part of the panel;
side 5: bottom part of the panel.
Figure 21
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

75
Corners of the panel

Each panel side uses as reference points the corners (figure 22) from which to start in order to
carry out any type of machining operation.
Figure 22
The reference corners are used to establish the zero point from which to start in order to determine
the co-ordinates of geometric drawings; the drawing will change position according to the corner
selected.
The drawing illustrated in figure 23 shows an example of two bores with the same co-ordinates,
machined starting from different corners.
Figure 23
76 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

5.2 The geometric profile

The geometric profile represents the shape to be machined (cut, bore, mill) and can be created
with the use of the EGA (assisted graphic editor) instruments in the Editor application software
(see chapter 13), of the integrated CAD SmartSketch (see chapter 14), or through the use of an
external CAD (see chapter 19). The profile represents the working trajectory of the tool the
machining operation parameters must be associated with, i.e. informations about the speed of the
tools, speed of the work, passages to be performed with the tool etc.
5.3 Types of machining operation that can be

programmed
It is possible to program both vertical and horizontal boring, milling and cutting operations. Vertical
operations are carried out with the tool positioned perpendicular to the work table (ref. A figure 24),
whereas horizontal operations are carried out with the tool positioned parallel to the work table (ref.
B figure 24).
Figure 24
Boring operations
Boring operations can be “optimised” and “non optimised”. Both types can be carried out using the
boring unit spindles or the electrospindles. The NC will automatically search for tools according to
the data set (diameter, type of bit, etc.) selecting the spindles best suited for the type of work
started from among the ones present in the machine configuration.
There is only one difference between these two types of machining operation, which relates to the
order in which the machining program is carried out. In the case of “non optimised” machining
operations the program will be carried out in sequence, as created by the operator, whereas in the
case of “optimised” machining operations the machining program will be processed by the NC, to
select the fastest route to be used for machining operations.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

77
List of programmable boring operations (see paragraph 15.2, page 250):

General boring on any of the faces of the piece.
Figure 25
Vertical boring on side 0 or on side 5 of the piece.
Figure 26.
Horizontal boring on side 1, side 2, side 3 or side 4 of the piece.
Figure 27
Boring using axis C, to be carried out on linear or circular sides.
Figure 28
78 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

Boring system, i.e. types of parametric and repetitive boring, to be carried out on side 0 and
side 5 of the piece:
centre-bore type; carries out a row of bores placing the first bore at the centre of the panel and
distributing the other at equal distances from each other. The bores machined are always
centred on the panel, whatever its size.
Figure 29
centre-space type; carries out a row of bores placing the centre of the distance between the
first two bores at the centre of the panel and distributing the other at equal distances from
each other. The centre of the distance between the bores is always at the centre of the panel.
Figure 30
correction with movement type; carries out a row of bores calculating that machining
operations stop at the set position; this position regards the distance of the last bore from the
end of the panel (ref. A, figure 31).
Figure 31
A
correction at centre type; carries out a row of bores, correcting them so that they are centred
on the panel according to the variation in its length.
Figure 32
Geometric boring, i.e. boring based on a geometric pattern, to be carried out on each side of
the piece.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

79
Milling operations
Milling operations are carried out using a geometric profile. The profile can be imported (see
chapter 18) or created using EGA mode (see chapter 13) or using SmartSketch (see chapter 14),
which interacts directly with the Editor application. Milling operations are carried out with the tools
fitted on the collet spindles or aggregates installed on the electrospindles.
List of programmable milling operations:

Machining the contour of the panel using a geometric drawing as a profile.
Figure 33
Machining operations on any side of the piece by creating figures or geometric drawings on
which to carry out a milling (ref. A, figure 34) or pocketing operation (ref. B and C, figure 34).
Creation of texts for milling on any of the piece's faces (ref. D, figure 34).
Figure 34
B
A
C
80 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

Cutting operations
It is possible to program various types of cutting operation to be carried out using the circular blade
tools fitted in the electrospindles or on the units present in the slots.
List of programmable cutting operations (see paragraph 15.3, page 257):
Cuts in the direction of axis X, to be carried out on side 5 and side 0 of the piece.
Figure 35
Cuts in the direction of axis Y, to be carried out on side 5 and side 0 of the piece.
Figure 36
Angled cuts on all sides of the piece
Figure 37
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

81
Cuts around the perimeter of the piece in order to square it, to be carried out on side 5 and
side 0 of the piece.
Figure 38
Rectangular cuts to be carried out on side 5 and side 0 of the piece.
Figure 39
Cuts obtained from a geometric drawing, to be carried out on each side of the piece.
Figure 40
82 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a705k0022.fm140605

Tooling
Cataloguing the tools and aggregates means recording their physical and technical characteristics
in a database to be used when tooling-up the machine.
This operation is managed by the ToolManager application for tools, and by the
MachineConfiguration application for aggregates.
Before actually carrying out tooling-up of the machine, you should always check that the tools
fitted are present in the tool database, and if not you should record them.
When the software is connected to the machine, before making modifications to the database,
always check the state of the alarm indicator . If it shows red this indicates that the machine is
moving to carry out a reset or a machining operation; in this case modification is not allowed. If if
shows green this indicates that the machine is stopped and that it is possible to carry out any type
of modification.
The flashing disk on the status bar indicates that the data is being modified, and it is not possible to
run any program until the modifications have been saved.
The data provided in the following chapter is expressed in millimetres. If the unit of
measurement is set to inches in the Setup, the data in BiesseWorks applications will be
expressed in inches.
6.1 Basic concepts

Cataloguing of cutting, boring and milling tools has been designed so that tools can be grouped
together on the basis of a scale of hierarchy, giving each tool a “type”, a “class” and a “group”.
The “class” represents the starting level in the tool hierarchy. When a tool is assigned to a “class”
this means it is distinguished from other tools on the basis of the machining operations that it can
be used to carry out. The “class” must be assigned when the tool is created, so that it will be
associated with other tools that carry out the same machining operation.
The following classes listed below are the default classes which are displayed only when enabled.
C_Routing; defines all mills that are used to carry out boring or milling. All the various types of
mill must be assigned to this “class”.
C_Cutting; defines circular shaped tools (blades) used to carry out cutting. All the various
types of circular blade tool must be assigned to this “class”.
C_Drilling; defines tools used to carry out boring operations. All the various types of bit must
be assigned to this “class”.
C_Inserting; defines the insertion of hinges, hinge mounting plates, cabinet suspension
brackets, guides etc., which for management purposes are catalogued as and considered to
be tools.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

85
C_Tracing; defines the thickness tracer, which for management purposes is catalogued as
and considered to be a tool.
C_Edging; defines the tools in the gluing unit.
C_Blowing; defines the tools in the blowing aggregate.
C_Trimming; defines the double edge trimming tools to install in the double edge trimming
aggregate.
C_Trimming; defines the scraping tools to install in the scraping aggregate.
The “type” represents the second level in the hierarchy. When a tool is assigned to a certain type
this means it is distinguished from other tools on the basis of its physical characteristics. The type
must be assigned when the tool is created, so that it will be associated with other tools that fulfil
the same requirements. For example, all candle mills must belong to the same type.
The “group” is the last level in the hierarchy. This classification is not compulsory like the preceding
ones, as all the tools used to carry out specific machining operations are assembled under this
heading. For further clarification please see paragraph 6.8 on page 100.
To facilitate tool cataloguing operations, Biesse offers a database with a preset list of “class” and
“type” items. To use these settings, launch the ToolManager application and record the tools only.
To create new “types” or new "classes”, launch the ToolManager application and follow the
instructions below:
Display the dialogue box used to create new “classes” (see paragraph “Class management”
on page 88).
Display the dialogue box used to create new “types” (see paragraph “Type management” on
page 91).
As regards the aggregates, Biesse offers a preset list containing all the aggregates available.
When acquiring new ones, these can be catalogued according to paragraph 6.10 “Aggregate
management” on page 103.
Certain commands relating to tool management, such as create, modify and delete, might
not be active, as they require a suitable password. To enter the correct level of password,
please consult paragraph 4.3 on page 74.
Use of the data area table

Certain tool management operations can be carried out directly using the table in the data area.
Double click on an item in column CODE to modify the data of each single tool. The dialogue
box Tool parameters is displayed. For a description of the fields in the window, see paragraph
6.5 on page 93.
To modify a value in the table, double-click on a box in the column required. If the value cannot
be modified, a short message will be displayed indicating the reason for the failure of the
operation.
Display tools according to their technical and physical characteristics using the filters window.
For a description of the window, see paragraph 6.9 on page 102.
To perform certain operations, for example creation of a tool, rapidly, use the quick menu by
clicking on any point in the table.
86 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

The application quick menu

The quick menu can be used to manage tool cataloguing, working directly on the data area or on
the tree list. To display the menu, position the cursor on a box in the table or on an item in the tree
list.
To create a tool by copying the characteristics of an existing one, select the tool to be copied in
the tree list or in the table, then select the item Copy tool in the quick menu. Dialogue box Tool
parameters is displayed, then enter the missing data. For a description of the fields, consult
paragraph 6.5, page 93.
To delete a tool from the database, select the tool to be deleted in the tree list or in the area
table, then select the item Delete tool in the quick menu.
To create a new tool, select any tool in the tree list or in the table, then select the item New tool
in the quick menu. Dialogue window Tool parameters is displayed, then enter the missing
data. For a description of the fields, consult paragraph 6.5, page 93.
To modify the data for a tool, select the tool to be modified in the tree list or in the table, then
select the item Modify tool in the quick menu. This displays the dialogue box Tool parameters
(see figure 43 page 93) in which it is possible to modify the missing data. Click on before
closing the window.
To modify a tool value, select the box in the column required (for example diameter) and then
select the item Modify Value -> in the quick menu. Enter the new value. If you wish to change
the values in the whole column, tick the marker box. Click on to confirm the operation.
To rename a tool, select the tool to be renamed in the tree list or in the table, then select the
item Rename tool in the quick menu. Enter the new name and click on before closing the
window.
To add a tool to a new group, select the tool required in the tree list or in the table, then select
the item Add tool to a new group (see paragraph 6.8, page 100).
To add a tool to an existing group, select the tool required in the tree list or in the table, then
select the item Add tool to an existing group (see paragraph 6.8, page 100).
To create a new tool class, in the tree list select the item TOOL TABLE, display the quick
menu and select New class. For a description of the fields, see paragraph 6.3, page 88.
To consult or modify the data of a class, select from the tree list the name of the required class
and double click with the left mouse button, or display the quick menu and select Modify class.
For a description of the fields, see paragraph 6.3, page 88.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

87
6.2 Notions on saving data

Saving the data is divided into two processes:
the first simply relates to saving the data in the temporary memory, using the button inside
the dialogue boxes;
the second relates to final saving of the data, using the button on the
ToolManagerapplication tool bar. The data is then stored on the hard disk, for software
installed on the office PC, or in the NC, for software connected to the machine.
When any data is saved in a temporary manner, the floppy-disk on the status bar will start to flash
and will continue to do so until a final save has been performed using . Should you wish to
restore the data to the values set before modifications to the application software, click on ; this
will update the application software and reset the previous data, providing that has not been
pressed. For example, if you make temporary modifications using alone, and you then wish to
return to the original data without making the modifications final, use .
When the ToolManager, application is closed, if the data has not been saved an information box
will be displayed requesting that this operation be carried out. Click on to save and close the
application software, click on to close the application software without saving the data, or click
on to exit the window without doing anything.
To avoid the risk of data loss in the event of a computer crash or power cut, save the
settings periodically; a flashing disk on the status bar indicates that it is necessary to save
the data.
6.3 Class management

Certain commands relating to class management, such as create, modify and delete, might
In order to manage the classes, display dialogue box Tool class manager, select menu Tools and
option Tool class manager, or click on the button of the tool bar.
88 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

Figure 41: dialogue box Tool class manager
; Creates a new class.
; Creates a new class by copying the data from the selected one.
; Displays the data window of the selected class.
; Deletes the selected class.
; Memorises the new class added to the list in the temporary RAM.
Create
To create a new class, click on and set the following data fields:
Code; name of the class.
Description; data field reserved for comments.
Pre-set type; reference ID allowing the post processor to recognise the class to which the tool
belongs. If you enter a value between 0 and 2 the machining operations in field Machining list will
be highlighted.
A value of “0” will select the machining operation W_Drilling;
A value of “1” will select the machining operation W_Drilling and W_Routing;
A value of “2” will select the machining operation W_Cutting.
Machining list; list of machining operations to be associated with the class. The ID setting will
determine selection of the machining operation.
Type list; list of types to be associated with the class. To create new items to be added to the list,
display the relative dialogue box (see paragraph 6.4 “Type management”).
All types; enable the marker box by clicking the mouse to associate all the items in the list of types
with the class.
Data area; table of read-only fields displaying the diameter, rotation speed, speed of advance and
lowering speed of the tools. Through this area it is possible to generate reference graphs on the
basis of general values set in the following data fields:
Diameter [mm]; write the reference diameter value.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

89
RotSpd [rpm]; type in the value for the rotation speed in rpm, according to the reference
diameter.
Work.Speed [mm/min]; type in the value for the speed of advance in mm/min., according to
the reference diameter.
Lower.Spd [mm/min]; type in the value for the lowering speed in mm/min., according to the
reference diameter.
To enter the values in the table, click on .

To modify the values in the table, select the row required and click on .
After modifying the value in the data field required, click on to display it in the table.
To delete a row in the table, select the row and click on .
Input of the data is facultative, and it is possible to set an indefinite number of tool diameter
values with relative speed values.
This data is useful when creating new tools, if you wish the tool rotation speed, speed of
advance and lowering speed to be calculated automatically when the tool diameter value is
entered (see paragraph “The cutting tools” on page 96, data field: Speed parameters box).
Minimum Maximum; box containing the fields relating to speed variation expressed in millimetres
per minute. These fields are used as control values for the data entered in the data area. To enable
them, click on the marker boxes.
RotSpd [rpm]; rotation speed.
Work.Speed [mm/min]; speed of advance.
Lower.Spd [mm/min]; lowering speed.
Close the window illustrated in figure 41 and save the settings.
Consultation and modification

To consult or modify the data of a particular class, double click in a list item to select it;
alternatively, use button . In the case of a modification, close the dialogue box Tool class
manager using button .
Delete
To delete a class from the list, select the item required and click on . Close the dialogue box
Tool class manager using button .
90 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

6.4 Type management

Certain commands relating to type management, such as create, modify and delete, might
To display the type management window, select the menu Tools and the option Tool type manager
or click on the tool bar.
Figure 42: dialogue box Tool type manager
; Creates a new type.
; Creates a new type by copying the data from the selected one.
; Displays the data window of the type selected.
; Deletes the type selected.
; Memorises the new type added to the list in the temporary RAM.
Create
To create a new type, click on button or, if starting with an existing data type, click on button
. Define the following fields:
Code; type name.
Class list; list of classes to be associated with the selected type.

Preset data field; list of images depicting the tools. Scroll through the list and select the item to
wish to associate with the type.
Priority level; priority level used by the optimiser to decide the order in which tools are to be used.
A low value represents a higher priority; if a tool is given a value of 0 this means it has top priority.
Type ID; unique number to assign to the type and used by the system for type management.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

91
DXF; button to find the file with extension DXF to be associated with a tool type. The file selected
is used to display an image in the Editor application software graphics area, so that it is possible,
for example, to distinguish a machining operation carried out with a “lance” type tool from a
machining operation carried out with a “countersunk” type tool. Associate a DXF file to each type
of tool so that graphic representations of the machining operations created can be distinguished
according to the type of tool used.
Description; data field reserved for comments.

If you wish to display the class definition window to create a new class or view the data for existing
classes, click on . For further information regarding class management, please see the
paragraph 6.3 on page 88.
To create a new type using data copied from an existing type, select an item in the list and click on
. Enter the name of the new type and save.
Close the window (see figure 42) and save the settings.

To consult or modify the data of a particular type, double click in a list item to select it; alternatively,
use button . In the case of a modification, close the dialogue box Tool type manager using
button .
Delete
To delete a type from the list, select the item required and click on . Close the Tool type
manager dialogue box and save the settings.
92 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

6.5 Recording tools

Enter the correct level of Password in the Setup dialogue box.
To create new tools, select the menu Tools and the option New tool, or click on the tool bar.
Figure 43: dialogue box Tool parameters
Fill in the fields in the window and click on button to save the settings. The tool created will be
added to the list of tools in the application table.
The compilation of the fields in the window varies according to the type of tool to catalogue; to
record the boring and milling tools, refer to the following paragraph, to record cutting tools, refer to
page 96.
Milling and boring tools

To record or modify milling and boring tools, define the following fields in dialogue box Tool
parameters :
Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select the class you wish to associate with
the tool to be created: C_Routing for a milling tool and C_Drilling for a boring tool. If you wish to
add new items to the list or view the data for a class, click on (see paragraph 6.3).
Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the tool. If
you wish to add new items to the list or view the data for a type, click on (see paragraph 6.4).
Code; field used for the tool name.
Coupling; preset list of existing couplings. Select the coupling you require.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

93
Description; field used for comments.
BMP search button; button that associates an image in bitmap format with the tool created.
Displays the window using the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
in which the tool image files are stored. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the
relative square in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the tool
when tooling-up the machine using the MachineConfiguration.
DXF search button; button used to find the DXF extension file containing the tool section. After
entering the DXF file, click on Run 3D simulation of the tool and change the section into a 3D
drawing. When the drawing is saved it creates a file with the same name and extension bmp in the
folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp\ Custom. Click on the BMP search
button and select the drawing to enter it in the relative square in the dialogue box.
Dir. of rotation; box used to set the tool direction of rotation. Enable one of the two option buttons
using the cursor. The field is not used in the case of boring tools.
Diameter [mm]; tool diameter expressed in millimetres.
Length [mm]; tool length expressed in millimetres.

For boring tools, the length is the distance between the lower tip of the tool and the nose of the
spindle (ref. A, figure 44).
For milling tools, the length is the distance between the lower tip of the tool and the nose of the
electrospindle (ref. B, figure 44).
Figure 44
ISO 30
HSK
A B B
C C
Max Diameter [mm]; maximum tool diameter expressed in millimetres. The field is not used in the
case of boring tools.
Max Length [mm]; maximum tool length expressed in millimetres. The field is not used in the case
of boring tools.
The data input in this field is used by the system to establish the safety position of the boring unit
or electrospindle.
In the software versions before version 2.2, the system in calculating the safety
position of the boring unit or electrospindle does not take account of the data shown
in the box Max Length [mm].
W.Dimen.; preset list of codes relating to the tool working dimensions. This data item is used
during the automatic housing of the tools in magazines defined as being “random” (refer to
paragraph on page 113). It indicates whether the dimensions of the tool are such that they prevent
other tools from being housed in tool holders adjacent to the one in which it is housed. The field is
not used in the case of boring tools.
94 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

0 = management disabled.
1 = small compact tool occupying the tool holder in which it is housed and without interfering
with the spaces of other tool holder positions.
2 = medium size tool occupying the tool holder position in which it is housed plus the following
tool holder position.
3 = medium size tool occupying the tool holder position in which it is housed plus the
preceding tool holder position.
4 = large tool occupying the tool holder position in which it is housed plus the preceding and
following tool holder positions.
Cutter Length [mm]; length of cutting edge (ref. C, figure 44). The field is not used in the case of
boring tools.
Max Vert step [mm]; depth that can be reached by the tool during vertical machining of the panel.
Enter a maximum value beyond which the tool cannot go.
Floating; indicates the presence of the copier. To use the tool with the copier, tick the box. The
field is not used in the case of boring tools.
Blower; indicates the presence of the blower. To use the tool with the electrospindle with blower,
tick the box. The field is not used in the case of boring tools.
Presser; indicates the presence of the presser. To use the tool with the electrospindle with
presser, tick the box. The field is not used in the case of boring tools.
Deflector; used to specify the identification code for the chip deflector to be associated with the
tool during the machining operation. When enabled for use during the machining operation, by
ticking the relative marker box, the aggregate will always be picked up before the tool.
Enable class management; marker boxes that can be used to delete the values in the box Speed
parameters which are displayed automatically after the tool diameter is entered. If you wish to set
the parameters relating to the speed at which the tool is to work yourself, disable the marker boxes
by clicking with the mouse. The values present in the box will depend on the data entered in the
Tool class parameters dialogue box (see paragraph 6.3).
Description of the parameters in the box:
Std WorkSpd; tool standard speed of advance.
Std RotSpd; tool standard rotation speed.
Std LowSpd; tool standard lowering speed.
Max WorkSpd; tool maximum speed of advance.
Max RotSpd; tool maximum rotation speed.
Max LowSpd; tool maximum lowering speed.
Min WorkSpd; tool minimum speed of advance.
Min RotSpd; tool minimum rotation speed.
Min LowSpd; tool minimum lowering speed.
Dec. Time; tool deceleration time. Enter the value required. The field is not used in the case of
boring tools.
Safety; safety distance that the tool must keep from the piece in order not to ruin it, used by the
system to establish the safety position, that is to say the positioning point of the boring unit or the
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

95
electrospindle above the piece before the machining operation begins. As for the tools in the
boring unit, seeing that it is possible to install tools of varying lengths on the vertical and/or
horizontal spindles, it is necessary to start from the longest tool when establishing the safety
distance of every single tool (see figure 45).
Example: suppose that the safety distance for the longest tool 1 (figure 45) is 10, in this case the
other tools will have the following safety distance:
tool 2 = (L1-L2) +10, that is 20;
tool 3 = (L1-L3) +10, that is 14,
tool 4 = (L1-L4) +10, that is 17.
Figure 45
Acc. Time; tool acceleration time. The field is not used in the case of boring tools.
Corner ang.; tool cutting edge angle when creating a sharp edge. The field is not used in the case
of boring tools.
Uniclamp saf. [mm]; safety position beyond which the tool must not go. This data item is utilised
by the system when the use of Uniclamps has been enabled in dialogue box Piece variables (field
Uniclamp).
Correction; for the description, consult the attached instructions for BiesseWorks use for the
Skipper.
The cutting tools

To record or modify cutting tools, define the following fields in dialogue box Tool parameters :
Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select C_Cutting. If you wish to add new
items to the list or view the data for a class, click on (see paragraph 6.3).
Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the blade.
If you wish to add new items to the list or view the data for a type, click on (see paragraph 6.4).
Code; field used for the blade name. Enter an alphanumeric code.
Coupling; preset list of existing couplings. Select the coupling you require.
96 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

BMP search button; button that associates an image in bitmap format with the blade created.
Displays the window using the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
in which the tool image files are stored. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the
relative square in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the tool
when tooling-up the machine using the MachineConfiguration.
DXF search button; button used to find the DXF extension file containing the blade section. After
entering the DXF file, click on Run 3D simulation of the tool and change the section into a 3D
drawing. When the drawing is saved it creates a file with the same name and extension bmp in the
folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp\ Custom. Click on the BMP search
button and select the drawing to enter it in the relative square in the dialogue box.
Dir. of rotation; window used for setting the direction of rotation of the blade (clockwise or
anticlockwise). Enable one of the two option buttons using the cursor.
Diameter [mm]; blade diameter expressed in millimetres.
Thickness; blade thickness expressed in millimetres.
Max Diameter [mm]; field not used.
Max Length [mm]; field not used.
W.Dimen.; field not used.
Cutter Length [mm]; length of the cutting edge.
Max Vert step [mm]; depth that can be reached by the blade during vertical machining of the
panel. Enter a maximum value beyond which the blade cannot go.
DeflectorThe deflection aggregate cannot be used when machining operations are being carried
out with the circular blade. Leave the field empty.
Floating; field not used.
Blower; indicates the presence of the blower. To use the tool with the electrospindle with blower,
tick the box.
Presser; indicates the presence of the presser. To use the tool with the electrospindle with
presser, tick the box.
Enable class management; marker boxes that can be used to delete the values in the box Speed
parameters which are displayed automatically after the blade diameter is entered. If you wish to
set the parameters relating to the speed at which the blade is to work yourself, disable the marker
boxes by clicking with the mouse. The values present in the box will depend on the data entered in
the Tool class parameters dialogue box (see paragraph 6.3).
Description of the parameters in the box:
Std WorkSpd; blade standard speed of advance.
Std RotSpd; blade standard rotation speed.
Std LowSpd; blade standard lowering speed.
Max WorkSpd; blade maximum speed of advance.
Max RotSpd; blade maximum rotation speed.
Max LowSpd; blade maximum lowering speed.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

97
Min WorkSpd; blade minimum speed of advance.

Min RotSpd; blade minimum rotation speed.
Min LowSpd; blade minimum lowering speed.
Dec. Time; blade deceleration time. Enter the value required.

Safety; safety distance that the blade must keep from the piece in order not to ruin it (example 10
mm) used by the system to establish the safety position, i.e. the safety position of the blade above
the piece before starting the machining operation.
Acc. Time; blade acceleration time.
Corner ang.; field not used.
Uniclamp saf. [mm]; safety position beyond which the blade must not go. These data are used by
the system when the (Uniclamp) clamps are used.
Correction; for the description, consult the appended instructions for BiesseWorks use for the
Skipper.
6.6 Recording thickness tracers

The following paragraph describes the phases involved in recording the thickness tracers.
Select the menu Tools and select the option New tool, or click on the tool bar.
98 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select the class C_Tracing. To add new
items to the list or consult the class data, click on (see paragraph 6.3).
Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the
thickness tracer. To add new items to the list or consult the data for a type, click on (see
paragraph 6.4).
Code; field reserved for the name of the thickness tracer.
BMP search button; button used to associate the thickness tracer with an image in bitmap format.
Displays a window with the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
used to record the image files. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the relative square
in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the thickness tracer
when tooling/up the machine using the MachineConfiguration.
Length; length expressed in millimetres.
Diameter [mm]; tool diameter expressed in millimetres.

Std WorkSpd; tool standard speed of advance.
Max WorkSpd; tool maximum speed of advance.
Min WorkSpd; tool minimum speed of advance.
6.7 Recording insertions

The following paragraph describes the phases involved in recording the materials to be used to
carry out insertion operations.
Select the menu Tools and select the option New tool, or click on the tool bar.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

99
Class; list of existing classes. Click with the mouse to select the class C_Inserting. To add new
items to the list or consult the class data, click on (see paragraph 6.3).
Type; list of existing types. Click with the mouse to select the type to be associated with the
insertion. To add new items to the list or consult the data for a type, click on (see paragraph
6.4).
Code; field reserved for the name of the insertion.
BMP search button; button used to associate the insertion with an image in bitmap format.
Displays a window with the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ Techdata\ Library\ Toolsbmp)
used to record the image files. Click on the file you require to enter the image in the relative square
in the Tool parameters dialogue box. The image can be used to recognise the insertion when
tooling/up the machine using the MachineConfiguration.
6.8 Group management

The groups are filters created to improve tool management operations.
Each tool can be associated with others in a group that represents it and distinguishes it, so as to
facilitate search operations within the database.
For example, in the case of a door machining operation that always uses the same tools, it is
possible to assign a number of tools to a single group named “DOOR”, so as to allow all the tools
that can be used to machine the doors to be found more quickly.
To display the group management window, select the menu Filters and the option Groups manager
or click on the tool bar.
Figure 48: dialogue box Group manager
; Renames the selected group.
; Deletes the selected group.
; Deletes the tools associated to the group.
100 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

; Confirms the settings and closes the window.
Renaming a group
To rename a group, select the group to rename in column Group manager and click button .
Enter the new name and confirm by pressing .
Deleting a group
To delete a group, select the line to delete from the table and click button . Confirm the setting
by pressing .
Deleting tools
To delete the tools associated with a group, without deleting the name of the group itself, select the
row containing the tools to be deleted and click on button . Confirm the setting by pressing
.
Creating groups using the quick menu

To associate a tool with a group to be created, select the tool required in the tree list or in the table,
then display the quick menu and select the item Add tool to a new group.
Rename the group created by selecting the box in the Group manager column (figure 48) and
clicking on button , enter the new name and confirm using the button.
To associate a tool with an existing group, select the tool required in the tree list or in the table,
then display the quick menu, select the item Add tool to an existing group and the group.
The tool will automatically be added to the list in the Group manager dialogue box. Confirm the
setting by pressing .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

101
6.9 Dialogue box Filters

The filters window is used to find only those tools with the qualities required, and to display them in
the table in ToolManager
application .
The search can be carried out on the basis of certain characteristics, for example:
tool length
tool descent speed
tool working speed
tool rotation speed
tool thickness
type of tool coupling
direction of rotation of the tool tools forming part of a particular group.
To display the filters window, select the menu Filters, scroll through the list with the cursor and
select the option Activate filters, or click on the tool bar.
Figure 49: dialogue box Filters
Follow the indications given below:

To display only tools with certain characteristics in the application table, click on the Select
filters card and select the parameters required, which will appear in the Activ. filters card.
Select button B for the chosen parameter, select the symbols = (equal to); > (more than); <
(less than) or >< (more than and less than), and enter the value to be looked for in field C.
If the search is also to be extended to the tool type, select button D, select the type required
from the list and tick marker box Type. Click on button A Run filter activation. The application
table will only show tools with the characteristics requested in the filters window.
To display only tools belonging to a certain group in the application table, click on the Groups
card, select the group, activate the marker box Show only tools belonging to the groups and
click on button A Run filter activation.
For example, to find all the tools with a maximum lowering speed higher than 4000 and lower than
5000, the following operations must be carried out:
1. click on the Select filters card and enable Max Lowering speed (this should only be done if this
parameter is not visible);
2. click on the enable filters card;

3. click on the button for parameter Max Lowering speed and select ><;
102 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

4. in the write-enabled field, type: 4000 - 5000 (meaning more than 4000 and less than 5000);
5. tick the marker box for the parameter Max Lowering speed;
6. Click on Run filter activation.
6.10 Aggregate management

To manage the aggregate catalogue, start the MachineConfiguration application, select menu
Database and select option Aggregates, or click on button .
Figure 50: dialogue box Aggregate manager
To memorise the new aggregate added to the aggregate list in the temporary RAM, save the
settings by clicking on button .
; Creates a new aggregate.
; Creates a new aggregate by copying the data from the selected aggregate.
; Displays the data window of the aggregate selected.
; Eliminates the aggregate selected.
; Displays a summary table of existing aggregates.
Delete
To delete an aggregate from the list, select it and click on button . Close the Aggregate
manager dialogue box and save the settings.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

103

To consult or modify the data of a particular aggregate, double click on a list item to select it;
alternatively, use button .
In the case of a modification, close the dialogue box Aggregate manager saving the settings .
For quicker consultation, display the Aggregate tooling dialogue box by clicking on the button
and operating directly, using the mouse, on the aggregate graph.
Figure 51: dialogue box Aggregate
Create
To create a new aggregate, click on button or, if starting with the data of an existing aggregate,
click on button .
Description of dialogue box Aggregate

X -; co-ordinate in a negative direction along the X axis for the left hand side of the aggregate, with
respect to the reference point (see figure 52). Field used to calculate the aggregate working
dimensions.
X +; co-ordinate in a positive direction along the X axis for the right hand side of the aggregate,
with respect to the reference point (see figure 52). Field used to calculate the aggregate working
dimensions.
Y-; co-ordinate in a negative direction along the Y axis for the left hand side of the aggregate, with
dimensions.
Y+; co-ordinate in a positive direction along the Y axis for the right hand side of the aggregate, with
dimensions.
104 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

Z -; co-ordinate in a negative direction along the Z axis of the aggregate, with respect to the
reference point (see figure 52). Field used to calculate the aggregate working dimensions.
Z +; co-ordinate in a positive direction along the Z axis of the aggregate, with respect to the
reference point (see figure 52). Field used to calculate the aggregate working dimensions.
Figure 52
a: electrospindle.
b: aggregate centre of rotation (reference point)
which usually coincides with the electrospindle
centre of rotation.
c: aggregate.
d: electrospindle axis or centre of rotation.
; used to calculate the working dimensions of the aggregate automatically according to the
position of the subspindles.
; used to redraw the working dimensions of the aggregate using the new data entered.
X offset; reference point co-ordinate along the X axis (figure 52). This co-ordinate should only be
entered if the aggregate centre of rotation is different from that of the electrospindle. If this is not
the case, leave the value set to 0.
Y offset; co-ordinate along the Y axis (see figure 52). This co-ordinate should only be entered if
the aggregate centre of rotation is different from that of the electrospindle. If this is not the case,
leave the value set to 0.
Z offset; co-ordinate along the Z axis (see figure 52). This co-ordinate should only be entered if
the aggregate centre of rotation is different from that of the electrospindle. If this is not the case,
leave the value set to 0.
Active X offset; co-ordinate along the X axis. A value other than zero indicates that the aggregate
contains free elements that are capable of modifying its position during machining operations.
Active Y offset; co-ordinate along the Y axis. A value other than zero indicates that the aggregate
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

105
Active Z offset; co-ordinate along the Z axis. A value other than zero indicates that the aggregate
Type; aggregate type:

• STANDARD; standard aggregate .
• BLOWER; blower aggregate (only on machines designed for edgebanding machining).
• SCRAPER; scraper aggregate (only on machines designed for edgebanding machining).
• EDGE TRIMMER; double edge trimming aggregate (only on machines designed for
edgebanding machining).
• DEFLECTOR; chip deflector.
CW; enables the direction of rotation of the aggregate. Check the box to indicate that the
aggregate rotates clockwise.
CCW; enables the direction of rotation of the aggregate. Check the box to indicate that the
aggregate rotates anticlockwise.
W.Dimen.; predefined list of numerical codes that define the working dimensions of the aggregate
in order to ensure that it does not collide with other tools present in the magazine. This data item is
used during automatic housing of aggregates in magazines defined as being “random”. It indicates
whether the dimensions of the tool are such that they prevent other tools from being housed in tool
holders adjacent to the one in which it is housed. Use the adjacent arrows to indicate the working
dimensions.
0 = management disabled.
1 = small compact tool occupying the tool holder in which it is housed and without interfering
with the spaces of other tool holder positions.
2 = medium size tool occupying the tool holder position in which it is housed plus the following
tool holder position.
3 = medium size tool occupying the tool holder position in which it is housed plus the
preceding tool holder position.
4 = large tool occupying the tool holder position in which it is housed plus the preceding and
following tool holder positions.
Coupling; type of aggregate coupling. Select the correct type of coupling from the predefined list.
Ing. Z; working dimensions in Z of the aggregate.
Max RSpd [rpm]; maximum aggregate rotation speed, expressed in rpm.
Min RSpd [rpm]; minimum aggregate rotation speed, expressed in rpm.
Max WSpd; maximum aggregate machining speed, expressed in rpm.
Multiplier; value indicating the transmission ratio between aggregate and subspindles.
DXF file; enables or disables the search button for files with DXF extension, with the graphics of
the aggregate displayed in the top window. Tick the box, click on the search button and select the
DXF files from the default path (....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\ techdata\ Library\ Figure). An empty field
indicates that the aggregate does not have an associated graphics file.
Bitmap; file with extension BMP containing the aggregate image. Click on the adjacent button to
associate the aggregate with a bitmap image to be displayed in the dialogue box Aggregate
manager . If the field is empty, the aggregate will be associated with the default image.
106 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

Active; enables the display of all existing subspindles in window Spindles.
Spindles; window containing a list of the aggregate subspindles.
Before closing the aggregate data window, confirm the settings by clicking on .
Aggregate subspindles
The aggregate subspindles are managed directly from inside the dialogue box Aggregate (figure
51) in window Spindles (figure 53).
Figure 53
; Creates a new subspindle.
; Deletes the selected subspindle.
; Creates a copy of the selected subspindle.
The red marker on the subspindle code indicates the presence of the subspindle in the aggregate.
To remove the subspindle from the aggregate, select it with a double click.
Consultation/modification
To consult or modify subspindle data, click the right mouse button on an item in the list Spindles.
Delete
To delete subspindles from the list, select those to be deleted and click button .
Create
To create aggregate subspindles, click button and fill in the following data fields:
X offset; value indicating the distance along the X axis between the subspindle centre of rotation
and the aggregate centre of rotation. A value other than zero indicates that the subspindle centre
of rotation is different from that of the aggregate (see figure 54).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

107
Y offset; value indicating the distance along the Y axis between the subspindle centre of rotation
Z offset; value indicating the distance along the Z axis between the subspindle centre of rotation
Figure 54
a: electrospindle.
b: electrospindle axis or centre of rotation.
c: aggregate centre of rotation, which usually
coincides with the electrospindle centre of
rotation.
d: subspindle centre of rotation.
Name; subspindle name consisting of the prefix plus index. Detail entered by system.
Prefix; code identifying the type of subspindle. Detail entered by system.
Index; number associated by the system to the code displayed in field Prefix in order to name the
spindle in field Name.
Distance; distance between the nose of the subspindle and its centre of rotation.
Show angle; preset field, cannot be modified.
AZ; subspindle angle of inclination with respect to the aggregate.
AR; subspindle angle of rotation with respect to the aggregate.
Absolute ID; subspindle numerical code. This order number is univocal for all the existing
subspindles.
Relative ID; subspindle numerical code. This order number is univocal for all the subspindles on
the specific aggregate selected.
W.Dim.; field not used.
108 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

Coupling; preset list of subspindle coupling types.
Change rotation; used to change rotation of the subspindle. Check the box to indicate that when
the subspindle is in use, the aggregate must rotate in the opposite direction to the one specified in
the subspindle itself.
CW; enables the direction of rotation of the subspindle. Check the box to indicate that the
subspindle rotates clockwise.
CCW; enables the direction of rotation of the subspindle. Check the box to indicate that the
subspindle rotates anticlockwise.
TChng Type; field not used.
Repeats; used to create a series of subspindles adjacent to that already active along the X axis or
Y axis. Click on button X or button Y and fill in the following fields:
Step; distance between adjacent subspindles.
Repeats; number of subspindles in a row.
Max tool diameter; maximum tool diameter supported by the subspindle. Enter the correct
diameter.
Min tool diameter; minimum tool diameter that can be inserted in the subspindle. Enter the
correct diameter.
Max RSpd [rpm]; subspindle maximum rotation speed in rpm.
Min RSpd [rpm]; subspindle minimum rotation speed in rpm.
Max tool length; maximum tool length that can be inserted in the subspindle.
Type; type of aggregate with which the spindle is associated. Detail entered by system.
Tool classes; list of classes that can be associated with the spindle. Double-click on an item with
the left mouse button to enable or disable the class.
Before closing the subspindles window, confirm the settings by clicking on .
6.11 Notes regarding the creation of aggregate 21

When creating aggregate 21, it should be remembered that the name of the aggregate indicated in
field Code must be AH21 or A21 and that the value -90 must be entered in field AZ.
Figure 55: aggregate 21
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

109
6.12 Notes regarding the creation of a chip deflector

The deflector is treated and managed in the same was as an aggregate. To insert it in the
aggregate database, display the appropriate dialogue box (see paragraph 6.10, page 103) and
click on button .
Select the option DEFLECTOR in field Type.
Create the subspindle which, in the case of the deflector, is the curtain guard A (figure 56).
Figure 56
Define the following data items:
Enter the radius of the deflector in field Distance.

Enter the value 0 in field AZ.
Enter the angle of rotation of the curtain guard in field AR. For example, if the angle of rotation
of the curtain guard is 18.3, then in the case of the right deflector (ref. right, figure 57) the
calculation should be 90+18.3=108.3, while for the left deflector (ref. left, figure 57) the
calculation should be 270-18.3=251.3.
Figure 57
270 270
Y Y
α
left
180 0 180 0
X X
right
90 90
Select the direction of rotation : CW for the right deflector; CCW for the left deflector.
Since the deflector is managed as if it were an aggregate, before it can be used, the curtain guard
A (figure 56) must be tooled with any of the tools and then inserted in the magazine.
110 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0002.fm140605

7 Operating section and magazine

management
This chapter provides all the information necessary for configuring the machine and for tooling the
operating section and the tool magazine.
7.1 Consulting the machine data

Machine configuration and modification of machine data can only be carried out by Biesse
technicians, the user is only allowed to consult the machine data.
Before proceeding with tooling-up, check the configuration of the spindles, aggregates and
magazine tool holders, to see the characteristics and qualities necessary for tools that are to be
fitted on the machine. To do this, start the MachineConfiguration application by clicking button .
Figure 58: MachineConfiguration
The tools stored in the application softwares used for tooling must correspond to the ones
physically present on the machine.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

111
The T, TH and TP spindles

Use one of the following methods to consult the technical data of the boring unit spindles (T and
TH) and the electrospindle (TP):
Position the cursor on the graphic element in which the spindle to be viewed is located, and
double-click on the spindle required to display the relative information window.
Display the lit of all the spindles present in the database by clicking on button . Double
click on the spindle to be viewed to select it.
This consultation can be conducted directly from the dialogue box Machine tooling during
the tooling procedure, using the mouse.
Description of fields in the operating section spindles window (T, TH and TP)
X offset; distance along the X axis between the spindle centre of rotation and the origin of the unit
with which it is associated.
Y offset; distance along the Y axis between the spindle centre of rotation and the origin of the unit
Z offset; distance along the Z axis between the spindle centre of rotation and the origin of the unit
Active X offset, Active Y offset, Active Z offset; distance in X, in Y and in Z of the spindle
position with respect to the centre of rotation of the unit with which it is associated.
Distance; distance between the nose of the spindle and its centre of rotation.
AZ; spindle angle of inclination.

AR; spindle angle of rotation.
Show angle; preset field, cannot be modified.
Absolute ID; univocal number of spindle from among all those present in the machine.
Relative ID; univocal index of spindle in the specific unit to which it belongs.
W.Dim.; numerical code defining the working dimensions of the tool. Enter a value between 0 and
4 (0 = field disabled; 4 = maximum working dimensions). This code is linked to that set in the field
of the same name in the tool data and aggregate data.
Coupling; type of spindle coupling.

Change rotation; change of the spindle direction of rotation.
CW; clockwise rotation of the spindle.
CCW; anticlockwise rotation of the spindle.
TChng Type; indicates whether the spindle can carry out automatic tool change. This field is
updated by the system: 0 = the spindle is not able to carry out automatic tool changes; 1 = the
spindle can carry out automatic tool changes; 2 = a tool has been manually fitted on the machine
and must be removed manually.
Max tool diameter; maximum diameter allowed for the tool to be fitted on this spindle.
112 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Min tool diameter; minimum diameter allowed for the tool to be fitted on this spindle.
Max RSpd [rpm]; maximum spindle rotation speed in rpm.

Min RSpd [rpm]; minimum spindle rotation speed in rpm.
Max tool length; maximum tool length that can be inserted in the spindle.
Type; spindle type.

Tool classes; list of classes that can be associated with the spindle.
The tool magazines

The magazines will not hold all the existing tools. In fact, particularly large aggregates must be
fitted in the electrospindle manually, as the magazines are not always equipped to take these
types of tools. For this reason it is advisable to consult the technical data for the magazine, in order
to avoid committing any errors.
In order to consult the technical data of the magazines or tool holders, use one of the following
methods:
Position the cursor on the graphic element to be viewed (tool holder or magazine), and
double-click with the left mouse button to display the relative information window.
Display the list of magazines present in the database by clicking on button . Double click
on the magazine to be viewed to select it and, to display the technical data window of the tool
holders, right click with the mouse on each item of list Tool holders (figure 59).
This consultation can be conducted directly from the dialogue box Magazine tooling during
the tooling procedure, using the mouse.
Description of fields in the Tool magazine - dialogue box

X-, Y-, Z-; co-ordinates for the top left hand vertex of the magazine with respect to its reference
point.
X+, Y+, Z+; co-ordinates for the bottom right hand vertex of the magazine with respect to its
reference point.
Enable; the marked box indicates that the magazine has been enabled.
Absolute ID; magazine numerical code.
Type; magazine type.

Positioning; magazine position.
DXF Files; DXF extension file with a drawing of the magazine.
X offset, Y offset, Z offset; co-ordinates for the magazine reference point with respect to the
machine origin.
Z for tool change; Z position for tool change, if tool change has not been enabled during the
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

113
Tool change time; average time taken for tool change (by simulator).
Release speed; indicates tool removal time from tool holder during tool change.
Balluff Management; the checked box indicates that the magazine is equipped with the “Balluf”
optical device for reading the chips present on the tools or in the aggregates.
Random; the checked box indicates that the magazine is the “random” type, i.e. at least one tool
holder present is managed as “random”.
Change while working; the checked box indicates that the machine is enabled to carry out a tool
change on one electrospindle while the other is working. When this function is activated, the CAM
attempts to mask the tool change operations on the enabled magazines, anticipating as much as
possible the machining operations (there is no machining sharing criteria provided for).
Booking; the checked box indicates that tool reservation management is enabled. This data item
allows the tool change operations to be speeded up, in that each time a tool is changed, the CAM
reserves the tool for the next change. In order to be reserved, tools must have the same working
dimensions as the tool unloaded from the magazine.
Simult. change; the checked box indicates that the simultaneous tool change management has
been enabled, in other words the magazine can insert two tools in two electrospindles at the same
time.
X pick-up, Y pick-up, Z pick-up; define the loading position for revolver type tool magazines.
Radius; radius of tool magazine, for the revolver type magazine. Radius of the circular segment of
the chain, for the chain type magazine.
Chain distance; length of the straight segment of the chain, for the chain type magazine.
Aggregates; list of the aggregates that the magazine can contain.
Electrospindles; list of electrospindles that the magazine can serve, considering all positions.
Axes; list of axes.
Tool holders; list of magazine tool holders (see paragraph “Description of dialogue box Tool
holder -” page 115).
114 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Figure 59
Description of dialogue box Tool holder -

Absolute ID; univocal number of tool holder from among all those present in the machine.
Relative ID; univocal index of tool holder in the selected magazine.
W.Dim.; number code defining the capacity of the tool holder. This value, which ranges from 1 to 4,
is linked to that defined in the tools/aggregates and allows the automatic tool change to be
managed correctly. This data item cannot be modified.
Coupling; type of coupling required for tools to be inserted in the tool holder.
Z offset; co-ordinate for the tool holder position with respect to the machine origin.
Enabled; the marked box indicates that the tool holder has been enabled.
Random tool; the marked box indicates that the tool holder can hold all types of tool present in the
magazine.
Electrospindles; list of all the electrospindles that the tool holder can serve.
C; position to be reached by the C axis in order to load the tool into the magazine.
CR; rotation value required by the magazine in order to load the tool.
CRT; magazine rotation value necessary so that the tool positions itself under the detection
sensor.
Direction of release; operating section direction of movement when extracting the tool from the
tool holder.
Release position; indicates how far the operating section has to move to free the tool.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

115
Z release position; indicates how far the operating section has to move along the Z axis to free
the deposit the tool in the tool holder.
Aggregates; series of aggregates that the tool holder can contain.
Consult the software limits

The software limits are limit points on the working field beyond which the operating section cannot
go. They do not relate to the mechanical limit switches present on the machine, but are simply
limits set in the software.
To consult the minimum and maximum positions for the operating section stroke, run the
MachineConfiguration application software and click on .
Figure 60: dialogue box SOFTWARE LIMITS
The positions shown in the X, Y and Z field columns vary according to the origin selected and
according to the element in the operating section selected in the application software graphic area
(single spindle, whole unit, etc.).
For example, if a spindle is selected in the graphic area and the machine origin in the window
SOFTWARE LIMITS, the positive X stroke of the spindle must not exceed a minimum position of
31 millimetres and a maximum position of 4014 millimetres (see figure61).
116 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Figure 61
To consult the spindle limits taking into account the length of the tool fitted, enable the With tool
marker box.
Figure 62
Display the existing machine axes

To view the window containing a list of the existing machine axes, run the MachineConfiguration
application software and click on . Select the axis you wish to consult to view the window
containing technical data for that axis.
Display the distances between spindles

To view the window containing the values for distances between spindles on the operating section,
run the MachineConfiguration application software and click on .
To check the distances between spindles, select the first reference spindle in the graphic area,
press CTRL and select the second spindle.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

117
7.2 Basic tooling concepts

The tooling of the operating section, aggregates and tool magazine is managed by the
MachineConfiguration application through the appropriate tooling environments (tooling windows).
Structure of tooling windows

The tooling windows are divided into five areas:
Left-hand area with tree list; this displays in the window with the aggregate tooling and
magazines the tree with the list of the elements to be tooled. Click on an item in the list to
highlight the image connected with it in the graphics area.
Right hand tree list area; displays the tree with the list of the tools, divided into classes. This
area interacts with the image in the graphics area.
Graphics area; displays the graphic image of the element to be tooled-up. When clicking on an
element of the image, the item corresponding to the selected image is shown in the tree of the
right-hand area and left-hand area.
Tool data area; displays the graphic representation, the name, the diameter and the type of the
tool selected in the tree of the right-hand area.
Selected element data area; area in which the data relating to the element selected in the
graphics area appears.
Tooling window buttons

The following is a list and description of tooling window buttons.
Button Description
Used to save the tooling operation so that it will be displayed the next time
the tooling window is opened.
Used to exit the tooling window without saving the data settings.
Used to display the list of spindles, showing the symmetrical spindle for each
one.
Used to tool-up the spindle.
Used to tool-down the spindle.
Used to display the summary window with the list of tooled spindles.
Used to find and open the tooling configuration files: files with extension
MTM for machine tooling, with extension MTC for tool magazine tooling and
with extension MTA for aggregate tooling.
118 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Button Description
Used to safe the tooling data and create files with extension MTM for
machine tooling, with extension MTC for tool magazine tooling and with
extension MTA for aggregate tooling.
Used to compare two tooling configuration files and view the differences
found between them.
Used to display the Filters dialogue box; see paragraph 6.9 page 102 on how
to use the filters.
Tooling window quick menus

In the graphics area of each tooling environment it is possible to view a quick menu. The number
of options in each quick menu will vary according to the environment to which it belongs.
Description of the menu options:
Show all; used to display the whole of the selected image.
Show item in foreground; used to enlarge the image selected with the cursor.
Show previous; used to display the element preceding the one just displayed.
Show parent; used to display the element immediately above the one displayed in the hierarchy.
Add the tool .... to the selected spindles; used to tool-up the spindle selected in the graphics
area with the tool selected in the tree list.
Untool the selected spindle; used to remove the tool from the selected spindle.
Delete symmetry; used to remove the symmetrical setting from the selected spindle.
Information on the item; allows the technical characteristics of the selected element to be
displayed (spindle, group, magazine, etc.).
Information on the tool fitted in the selected spindle; used to display the dialogue box with
technical characteristics for the tool fitted in the spindle.
Information on rejected tools; used to display the dialogue box with a list of all the tools that
cannot be fitted on the selected spindle.
Delete all selections; used to delete the selections made.

Enable disable presence; only enabled when the software is connected to the machine. Allows
the magazine tool holder to be marked with an “X”. An “X” on the tool holder indicates that the tool
has been picked up and is momentarily housed elsewhere, for example on the electrospindle. The
tool has been stated as being in the tool holder but it is not there.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

119
7.3 Operating section tooling

In order to tool the operating section, select menu Tooling and select option Maching tooling, or
click on button .
Figure 63:Machine tooling
For the operating section tooling procedures, use one of the following methods:
Select the spindle from the graphics area and the tool to be fitted from the tree list; press the
right mouse button or click on .

Select the tool required from the tree list and install it on the spindle using the Drag and drop
method.
Select the spindle from the graphics area and the tool from the tree list; display the quick menu
and select the option Add the tool ........... to the selected spindles.
Select the spindle/s from the graphics area and the tool to be fitted from the tree list; press the
INS key on the PC keyboard.
To untool the operating section, use one of the following methods:
Select one or more spindles from the graphics area and click on . To untool the whole
operating section, create a selection area around the spindles and click on .
Select the spindle/s from the graphics area, display the quick menu and select the option
Untool the selected spindle.
Select the spindle/s from the graphics area and press the CANC key on the PC keyboard. To
untool the whole operating section, create a selection area around the spindles and press
CANC.
120 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Display the technical characteristics of the groups and/or spindles of the

operating section
In order to display the technical data windows of the spindles, electrospindle and/or boring unit,
work directly in the graphics area, double click on the required object or use the appropriate option
in the quick menu.
Save operating section tooling

After tooling the operating section, to create the file with extension MTM in which to save the
configuration data, click on . The file will be saved in the default folder ....Biesse\ BiesseWorks\
Techdata\ Machtype\BIESSEMACHINE\machine name. Before closing the tooling window, click
on if you wish the configuration created to be displayed when it is next opened.
When the button is used, the configuration is saved to disk and opened again when the
machine tooling is next opened.
After saving the tooling, any changes in the data present in the tool database or machine
data following a data import or modification may mean that this data is no longer consistent
with the tooling set-up. If this is the case, the Bad tooling ! information box will be displayed
(see 7.6 “Inconsistency between the tooling saved and the machine/tool data” on page 128).
Compare two machine tooling configurations

To compare two different machine tooling configurations, open the first tooling file by pressing ,
click on and double-click on the second file required to open it. The Summary dialogue box is
displayed (ref. A figure 64) with a list of the spindles that are fitted with different tools in the two
configurations. To display the names of the two tools fitted in the same spindle (ref. B figure 64),
double-click on the item required.
Figure 64
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

121
Description of the procedures used to establish symmetry between

spindles
To modify the symmetry between the spindles of the boring unit, enlarge the image of the group
and click on the button .
Figure 65:Machine tooling
The software only allows machining operations with symmetrical spindles to be carried out along
the X axis, so that the spindles to be symmetrically connected to each other must only be the ones
that carry out boring operations along the X axis.
Attributing symmetry to spindles means that each spindle is bound to another one which has the
same type of tool, so that the control, when optimising machining operations, can use the
symmetrical spindles to machine two or more pieces loaded on the symmetrical or specular
origins. In order to be symmetrical, two spindles must always be fitted with the same type of tool, in
that they carry out the same machining operations on a number of pieces, starting both from the
straight and from the symmetrical origin (for further information on symmetrical origins, refer to the
instructions on using the machine).
122 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Figure 66: example of a machining operation containing the instructions for machining a bore at 100 in X and
at 70 in Y, applicable to 4 pieces positioned on the straight origin (1 and 3) and on the symmetrical origin (2
and 4).
To establish symmetry, work directly in the graphics area of the window (figure 65) or on the list on
the right hand side.
If you wish to work in the graphics area, select a spindle, press the CTRL key on the keyboard and
click on the spindle to be made symmetrical; the name of the associated symmetrical spindle will
appear in the list on the right hand side, in the SYMMETRICAL column, in correspondence with
the name of the selected spindle.
Figure 67
If you wish to work directly on the right hand list, select the code for the spindle required and press
the right mouse button; select the code for the spindle to be associated from the list, and click on
option button .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

123
Figure 68
7.4 Tool magazine tooling

In order to tool the tool magazine, select menu Tooling and select option Magazine tooling, or click
on button .
124 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Figure 69:Magazine tooling
For the magazine tooling procedures, use one of the following methods:
Select the tool holder from the graphics area and the tool to be installed from the tree list;
press the right mouse button or click on .

Select the tool required from the tree list and install it in the tool holder using the Drag and
drop method.
Select the tool holder from the graphics area and the tool from the tree list; display the quick
menu and select the option Add the tool ........... to the selected spindles.
Select the tool holder/s from the graphic area and the tool to be fitted from the tree list; press
INS on the PC keyboard.
To untool the tool magazine, use one of the following methods:
Select one or more tool holders from the graphics area and click on . To untool the whole
magazine, create a selection area around the tool holders and click on .
Select the tool holder/s from the graphics ares, display the quick menu and select the option
Select the tool holder/s from the graphics area and press the CANC key on the PC keyboard.
To untool the whole magazine, create a selection area around the tool holders and press
CANC.
Display the technical characteristics of the magazines and tool holders

In order to display the technical data windows of the magazines and/or tool holders, work directly
in the graphics area, double click on the required object or use the appropriate option in the quick
menu.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

125
Save magazine tooling

After tooling the operating section, to create the file with extension MTC in which to save the
Techdata\ Machtype\BIESSEMACHINE\machine name. Before closing the magazine tooling
window, click on if you wish the configuration created to be displayed when it is next opened.
magazine tooling is next opened.
Compare two magazine configurations

To compare two tool magazine configurations, open the first tooling file using button , click on
and double-click on the second file required to open it. The Summary dialogue box (ref. A
figure 70) will be displayed, containing a list of the tool holders that are fitted with different tools in
the two configurations. To display the names of the two tools present in the same tool holder,
double-click on the item required (ref. B figure 70).
Figure 70
7.5 Aggregate tooling

In order to tool the aggregates, select menu Tooling and select option Aggregate tooling, or click
on button .
126 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

Figure 71:Aggregate tooling
For the aggregate tooling procedures, use one of the following methods:
Select the subspindle from the graphics area and the tool to be installed from the tree list;
press the right mouse button or click on .

Select the tool required from the tree list and install it in the subspindle using the Drag and
drop method.
Select the subspindle from the graphics area and the tool from the tree list; display the quick
menu and select the option Add the tool ........... to the selected spindles.
Select the subspindle/s from the graphics area and the tool to be installed from the tree list;
press the INS key on the PC keyboard.
To untool the aggregates, use one of the following methods:
Select one or more subspindle from the graphics area and click on . To untool the whole of
the operating section, create a selection around the aggregate subspindles and click on .
Select the subspindle/s from the graphics area, display the quick menu and select the option
Select the subspindle/s from the graphics area and press CANC on the PC keyboard. To
untool a number of aggregates simultaneously, create a selection around the subspindles and
press CANC.
Display the technical characteristics of the aggregates and/or spindles

In order to display the technical data windows of the aggregates and/or aggregate spindles,
working directly in the graphics area, double click on the required object or use the appropriate
option in the quick menu.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

127
Save aggregate tooling

After tooling the operating section, to create the file with extension MTA in which to save the
Techdata\ Machtype\BIESSEMACHINE\machine name. Before closing the aggregate tooling
window, click on if you wish the configuration created to be displayed when it is next opened.
aggregate tooling is next opened.
7.6 Inconsistency between the tooling saved and the

machine/tool data
When the tooling of the operating section, tool magazine or aggregates are saved by pressing the
button , the settings imposed are stored to disk to reappear the next time the tooling window is
opened. After this operations, if any modifications are made to the tool database or to the machine
data, the information window Bad tooling ! (figure 72) will be displayed the next time the tooling
window is opened, listing the errors caused by inconsistency between the tooling stored and the
data actually present on the machine.
Figure 72: dialogue box Bad tooling !
Click on A to confirm the tooling, or on C to untool all the spindles whose tools are not stored in the
database. Button B can be used to display a window containing information on why the tool cannot
be installed on the machine.
128 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0048.fm140605

This chapter shows all the information necessary to tool up the work table.
For a general description of the WorkTableTooling application software, see paragraph 2.4,
page 50.
Tooling of the work table is used to establish the optimum position of the objects it comprises, to
ensure that they will not be damaged during machining of the piece. To carry out the tooling, open
the required machining program from the Editor application (BPP document) and start the
WorkTableTooling application by clicking on button .
Before moving on to the tooling method, the system automatically optimises the program and
starts the WorkTableTooling application only if there are no errors in the program. If there are, the
window Optimiser results is displayed (for the description, consult the paragraph 12.15 on page
188).
On the start-up of the application software the work table configuration document is displayed, with
the work table default configuration; the configuration document creation and modification
operations are reported in paragraph 8.1 on page 129.
When opening a machining program that already includes the tooling, if the tooling has
been carried out on a different configuration to that proposed at the start-up of the
WorkTableTooling application, the system displays a message informing of the change and
provides the option to replace the configuration with that already stored by the program.
Inside the application it is possible to position the work table objects in two ways:
No parametric positioning (see paragraph 8.5, page 144).
Parametric positioning (see paragraph 8.4, page 138).
8.1 The work table configuration document

The work table configuration document, which is an integral part of the WorkTableTooling
application software, allows the machine work table to be reproduced on the video in order to load
the panel on the mobile supports and to tool the objects making up the table, and can be
customised according to the needs of the client.
When the application is launched, the display shows the default document setup by the Biesse
technicians in field Default configuration in card Work tables of the Setup when configuring the
machine.
The following paragraphs report the main steps to follow in order to produce, modify and save the
configuration document.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

129
Personalise the work table configuration document

To personalise the configuration document, launch the WorkTableTooling application
independently from the Editor application using the Start menu of the Windows applications bar.
Either modify the document displayed when the application is launched or click on button to
create a new document.
Figure 73: Windows START menu
Insert objects
In order to insert new components in the document, select the necessary table objects from the
tree list and transfer them to the graphics area using the Drag and drop technique. The objects
must be inserted in hierarchical order, that is to say, each object can only be inserted onto the one
immediately above it in the hierarchy. For example, until the mobile panel supports (ref. A) have
been installed it will not be possible to install the carriages (ref. B) or the shapeable suction cups
(ref. C).
Insertion of the shapeable suction cups does not require the presence of carriages (ref. B), as
these are fitted automatically on the mobile panel supports (ref. A) each time a shapeable suction
cup is inserted.
Figure 74
130 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

Description of the objects on the tree list

The first column shows the list of objects to use for configuring the work table. The second column
indicates the elements in which the objects are installed, while the third column shows the
elements that each object can contain.
Work table objects Objects on which they are Objects they can contain
installed
Panel supports (ref. A, figure Working area Stops

74) Bars
Panel supports
Stops (ref. D, figure 74) Panel supports Spokeshaves
Bars (ref. F, figure 74) Panel supports ---------------
Carriages (ref. B, figure 74) Panel supports Jigs
Jigs (ref. C, figure 74) Carriages ---------------
Spokeshaves (ref. E, figure Stops ---------------

74)
Eliminate objects
In order to eliminate objects from the table, select the object to eliminate, display the quick menu
and select option Eliminate.
Save the work table configuration document

To save the work table configuration document and give it a new name, select menu File and
option Save as... By default, the file with its PCF extension is saved in the default directory
...BiesseWorks\WTTooling\Dati\Configurazioni. Enter the name of the file in the appropriate field of
the window displayed by the system and save.
Save the configuration document as default

To save the active work table configuration document as the default document that can be
displayed when the WorkTableTooling application software is launched, select menu File and
option Set as default.
Importing TLS or WRB files

To import the work table configuration with the extension TLS or WRB, click on .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

131
Replace the work table configuration document

In order to tool a machining program using a personalised configuration different from the default
one proposed at application start-up, select menu File and option Change table configuration.
Select the required file from the system window. Tool the work table (see paragraph 8.5 “Non-
parametric type positioning”) and save.
8.2 Description of the quick menu options

The menu options that are enabled will depend on the point in which the cursor is positioned when
the menu itself is displayed.
Shapeable suction cup and uniclamps

When the menu is displayed over a shapeable suction cup or a uniclamp the following options will
be enabled:
Show; it shows the object (suction cup or clamp) selected.
Copy; it copies the object (suction cup or clamp) selected.
Paste; inserts the previously copied object (suction cup or clamp) on the selected carriage.
Eliminate; deletes the suction cup from the work table.
Select; used to select all the shapeable suction cups simultaneously; select the option Jigs and
one of the following items: In this panel support, to select all the shapeable suction cups on the
support; By row, to select all the shapeable suction cups positioned horizontally.
Rotation; used to rotate the shapeable suction cups. The option Continue is used to carry out
manual rotation. The option Discrete is used to carry out assisted rotation, entering the data
required.
Check positions; used to check whether or not the work table objects have been positioned
correctly.
Positions; used to display the dialogue box in which the shapeable suction cup position values
are defined (for a description of the dialogue box, see 8.3 “Description of the position input
window” on page 137).
132 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

Properties; used to display the dialogue box Object properties for the shapeable suction cups:
Cards Description of fields
General card Shapeable suction cup positioning values and general

information.
Settings card Mobile; disables or enables the movement of the suction

cup. Deactivating the checkbox locks the suction cup at its
current position.
Restrict position to origin Y axis only.; associates the

suction cup to a specific origin defined in field Associated
origin. This data item is normally used to associate
uniclamps to an origin in order to create a reference, in
other words, to use the clamp rod as a stop.
Associated origin; number of the origin to which the

uniclamp is associated. This field is associated to field
Restrict position to origin Y axis only..
Height; it makes it possible to define the maximum

thickness of the clamps or the suction cups. Maximum
thickness is taken to mean the thickness of the clamp/
suction cup added to the thickness of the carriage.
Enable rotation; used to enter the shapeable suction cup

rotation data, i.e. it is used to define which option appears in
the quick menu Rotation.
Discrete; used to define the angle of rotation in “discrete”

mode. When enabled it can be used to display, in item
Rotation of the quick menu, the option Discrete. Enter the
shapeable suction cup rotation pitch value.
Continue; used to define the angle of rotation in

“continuous” mode. When enabled it can be used to display,
in item Rotation of the quick menu, the option Continue.
Enter the value required in the field Absolute angle of
rotation.
Stops
When the menu is displayed over a stop the following options will be enabled:
Show; it shows the selected stop in the foreground.

Select; to select all the stops simultaneously; select the option Stops and one of the following
items: In this panel support, to select all the stops on the support; By row, to select all the stops
positioned horizontally; By origin to select all the stops that form part of the same origin.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

133
correctly.
Properties; used to display the dialogue box Object properties for the stops:
General card stop positioning values and general information.
Settings card Mobile; enables movement of the stop. Deactivating the

checkbox locks the stop at its current position.
Associated origin; list of origins to be associated with the

stop.
Panel support side; fields used to define the side of the stop
(ref. A) against which the piece is to rest.
Top side B; bottom side C; left hand side D; right hand side
E.
B
A
D E
Enable plate; used to enable insertion of a plate on the stop.
134 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

Mobile piece supports and side stops supports

The options listed below are activated when the menu above a mobile piece support (ref. A, figure
75) or above a side stops support (ref. B, figure 75) is displayed.
Figure 75: A = mobile piece supports; B = side stops support.

A
Show; shows the mobile support selected, in the foreground.
Select; used to select all the mobile panel supports simultaneously using the option Panel
supports.
Tool symmetrical panel support; used to tool-up two symmetrical supports in the same way.
Restrict the panel support to the origin; used to restrict the selected panel support to its origin,
only if the support has been entered as mobile.
correctly.
Positions; used to display the dialogue box in which the mobile panel support position values are
defined (for a description of the dialogue box, see 8.3 “Description of the position input window” on
page 137).
Properties; used to display the dialogue box Object properties for the mobile panel support:
General card mobile panel support positioning values and general

information.
Settings card Mobile; enables movement of the support. Deactivating the

checkbox locks the support at its current position.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

135
Removable; enables the removal of the support, i.e. it

permits the declaration that the specific support can be
removed from the work table.
Piece
When the menu is displayed over the panel the following options will be enabled:
Show; shows the selected piece in the foreground.

Move the piece to origin...; used to translate the panel to another origin.
Duplicate the piece to origin...; used to create a copy of the piece by loading it on another origin.
Move the piece and tool it to origin...; used to translate the piece to another origin while copying
the tooling.
Duplicate the piece and tool it to origin...; used to create a copy of the piece and tooling by
loading the piece on another origin.
Set as active piece; used to make the selected piece active, and therefore allow it to be modified,
if a number of pieces have been loaded onto the work table.
Show machining operations; used to display the machining operation.
correctly.
Properties; used to display the dialogue box containing the panel properties and to check the
values for positioning of the panel on the work table.
136 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

8.3 Description of the position input window

The position input window shows the position of the object on the work table selected and allows
the object to be moved by inputting the desired values into the appropriate fields (algebraic
expressions, conditional instructions, etc.).
To display the position input window, select the object to be made parametric and choose the
Positions option of the quick menu or of the menu Modify.
Description of the window's fields

Box Position type
Not parametric; indicates the non-parametric type of positioning.
Parametric; indicates the parametric type of positioning.
Reference side; used to set the reference side from which to start when calculating movement
of the object.
Box X and box Y; boxes for inputting the positions of the mobile piece supports (X), the shapeable
suction cups, the clamps or the carriages (Y).
Expression; for a description, please see paragraph “Using field Expression”.
Condition; for a description, please see paragraph “Using field Condition”.
; Confirms the settings and closes the window.
; closes the window without confirming the settings made.
; through this the settings made can be made active, without closing the widow.
; it shows in the field Expression the positioning of the object on the selected table (see
paragraph “Using field Expression”) and is activated only in case of parametric positioning. You
are advised to pay attention since the pressure of the button converts any algebraic expression in
the field Expression into a pure number (see the glossary).
; with this the NOTUSED variable (see paragraph “Using field Expression”) can be put in the
field Expression and it is only activated if the positioning is parametric.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

137
Using field Expression

This field shows the positioning point of the object selected or the NOTUSED variable (see
paragraph “The NOTUSED variable”, page 140). The type of position indicated in the field varies
on the basis of the type of positioning:
1. If the positioning is of the non parametric type, the position shown is an absolute value,
calculated starting from the origin of the work table (see paragraph 8.5, page 144).
2. In the case of parametric type positioning, the position shown is a relative value calculated
from the edge of the piece positioned on the origin selected. By default this position is
represented by a pure number but it can be modified by inputting an algebraic expression (e.g.
LPX - LPY/4). Click on the button to display the pure number.
Using field Condition

Through this field the positioning point of the selected object can be shown by means of a
VBScript conditional instruction (e.g. “If…Then…Else”). The conditional instruction cannot
represent an absolute value but a relative value calculated starting from the edge of the piece
positioned on the selected origin. The field is only activated when positioning is of the parametric
type.
Example of a condition:
if (LPX > 500) then
result = LPX+100-LPZ
else
result = LPX/2
end if
The word result represents the destination value for the position.
8.4 Parametric type positioning

Parameter setting of the work table objects linked to the X dimensions of the piece itself and is only
applicable in the case where the dimensions of the piece defined in the machining program need
to be reduced.
For example, to produce a program in which to set the parameters to machine 6 pieces of different
dimensions (2000 mm, 1500 mm, 800 mm, 700 mm, 400 mm and 300 mm), first create the
machining program with length X of the piece set at the maximum, i.e. 2000, then subsequently
reduce the dimensions of the piece.
To set the parameters of objects on the work table, follow the rule below:
• if the dimension in X of the piece is such as to enable the piece to occupy two working areas
(ref. A, figure 76), it is necessary to make all the mobile supports parametric;
• if the dimension in X of the piece occupies one part or an entire working area (ref. B, figure
76), it is necessary to make all the supports of just the area involved parametric.
This rule is also valid for shapeable suction cups, i.e. the parameters of all the suction cups
forming part of the working area involved in the tooling must be set.
138 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

The work table objects not involved in tooling the piece but that belong to the working area or
areas on which the piece has been deposited (e.g. ref. C, figure 76), must be excluded from the
parametric positioning (see point 3, next paragraph).
Figure 76
A B
C C
Procedure for setting parameters for the work table objects

1. Launch the WorkTableTooling application software by clicking on the button on the Editor
tool bar. Before entering the work table tooling environment, make sure that the active
machining operation dialogue box Piece variables field Origins list indicates the origin to
position the point on and that the marker box has been enabled Sole origin. If not the system
displays an error message where it is necessary to carry out the abovementioned operations.
2. Select the menu Modify and enable the option Parameter tooling (relative values) with the click
of a mouse. The positioning points of each work table object involved in the parametric
positioning are converted from absolute to relative (see field Expression on page 137). To
check and/or modify these values, check the paragraph “Modifying the relative position” on
page 140.
3. Exclude the mobile support, the shapeable suction cups and/or clamps not involved in the
piece tooling from the parametric positioning by using the NOTUSED variable (see paragraph
“The NOTUSED variable” on page 140).
4. Launch the preview to see the result of the parametric positioning by clicking on the button
. Through the preview a new document can be generated in which it is possible to indicate
the dimensions of the piece and the reference origin. The document does not allow any type
of operation or saving, it only shows the result of the tooling and the correct position of the
work table objects declared to be NOTUSED.
5. Process the machining program and display the simulator by clicking on .
6. Process the machining program by clicking on . A file with the extension ISO will be
created in the directory indicated in the Setup dialogue box Input Output card, and this file can
be run on the machine. To ensure that the ISO file also contains the tooling information, enable
the marker box Export the work table tooling set-up in the dialogue box Piece variables (see
“Creating the document” on page 165).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

139
7. Click on button to store the tooling in the machining program and return to the Editor
application. To store piece tooling in the file with extension BPP, save the file before you close
it.
To leave the WorkTableTooling application without saving the tooling created and return to the
Editor application, click on .
The NOTUSED variable

The NOTUSED variable indicates the work table object is excluded from the parametric
positioning. All the objects to be excluded from the tooling must therefore show this variable in the
data field Expression of the position input dialogue box.
To input it select one of the work table objects, display the quick menu, choose option Positions
and click on the button .
The objects excluded must be positioned at a distance of around 300 mm in X and 100 mm in Y
with respect to the piece loaded on the work table.To modify these two values it is necessary to
create the following variables of the type Environmental:
• TOOLMARGIN X; the value indicated in this variable is used by the NOTUSED variable for
the positioning of the objects in X.
• TOOLMARGINY; the value indicated in this variable is used by the NOTUSED variable for
the positioning of the objects in Y.
Modifying the relative position

When the parametric positioning of work table objects is carried out, the system, on the basis of
the data inserted by the installer in the PCFT table, automatically converts all the positioning points
of the work table objects involved in tooling the piece, from absolute to relative. The absolute
position means the position of the object calculated from the origin of the work table, relative
position means the position of the object starting from the edge of the piece loaded on the origin
selected.
To modify these values follow the following instructions:
To move the objects manually, press the SHIFT button and drag the object to the position
required using the mouse cursor. This type of operation is only possible if the position of the
selected object inserted in the field Expression is represented by a pure number.
To define a specific positioning point by inserting, for example, an algebraic expression or a

conditional instruction, select the object to be moved, display the position input window, define
140 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

the reference side in the field Reference side and complete field Expression or field Condition
(see paragraph 8.3 “Description of the position input window”, page 137). Confirming the
settings without closing the window, by clicking on .
Example of parameter setting by using an algebraic expression

1. Select the first support starting from the right and define the following fields:
Reference side=Right
Condition =
if (LPX<1000) then
result = LPX+200
else
result = LPX-20
end if
Confirm the setting by clicking on .
2. Select the second support and set the following fields:

Reference side=Centre
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

141
Expression = 2/3*LPX
3. Select the third support and set the following fields:

Reference side=Centre
Expression = 1/3*LPX
4. Select the fourth support and set the following fields:

Reference side=Left
142 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

Expression = 20
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

143
8.5 Non-parametric type positioning

Non-parametric positioning of the work table objects can be performed manually with the aid of the
mouse cursor, or by inputting the right position in the position input window (see paragraph 8.3,
page 137).
To perform this type of positioning, do the following:
1. Select the menu Modify and enable the option Non-parameter tooling (absolute values) with
the click of a mouse.
2. Manually move the objects with button , or select the object to move, display the position
input window (see paragraph 8.3, page 137) and input the position in the fieldExpression.
3. Input the data required, rotate the objects, control the positions etc., using the quick menu (see
paragraph 8.2, page 132);
Every time a shapeable suction cup is under a through machining operation it turns red to
show that there is an alarm situation; be careful to check that it is always green.
For quick display of the properties window with the position of the object on the table, double
click on the object to select it.
4. Process the machining program and display the simulator by clicking on .
5. Process the machining program by clicking on . A file with the extension ISO will be
created in the directory indicated in the Setup dialogue box Input Output card, and this file can
be run on the machine. To ensure that the ISO file also contains the tooling information, enable
the marker box Export the work table tooling set-up in the dialogue box Piece variables (see
paragraph12.9 on page 165).
6. Click on button to store the tooling in the machining program and return to the Editor
application. To store piece tooling in the file with extension BPP, save the file before you close
it.
To leave the WorkTableTooling application without saving the tooling created and return to the
Editor application, click on .
144 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

8.6 Deletion of the tooling from the machining

operation program
To perform a new tooling, by deleting the data regarding the tooling performed previously from the
machining operation program, open the required machining operation program from the Editor
application, select the menu Tools and the option Delete table tooling. Launch the application
software by clicking on the button and carry out the new tooling.
8.7 Remove the work table supports

To be able to remove the mobile piece supports and/or side stops supports from the work table
(see figure 75) do the following:
1. Select the support to be removed, display the quick menu and choose the option Properties.
Check the Removable field has been activated, if it has not click on the adjacent marker box.
2. Select menu Modify and click on option Removable tables....
3. From the Removable tables window, disable the required support by removing the marker
from the box next to the name of the support, using the mouse. Every support is distinguished
by a numeric index that can be controlled inside the Properties window in the Name field.
8.8 Display of the properties table

To display the table containing the selected object properties in the lower part of the application,
click on .
8.9 Consultation of the positioning points

To consult all the positioning points of the various work table objects, click on the button .
8.10 Display of the shaped piece

To display the shape of the piece produced through the creation of non-standard sides, on the
work table, select the menu Display and click on option Display shaped piece (the adjacent
marker indicates that the display has been enabled).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

145
8.11 Simultaneous tooling of a number of pieces on

the same origin
To open a number of machining programs (bpp files) and load the pieces onto the same work table
origin so as to carry out simultaneous tooling, proceed as follows:
1. run the WorkTableTooling application using the Start menu on the Windows applications bar;
2. click on to enable tooling mode;
3. click on ; the window used to search for machining program files with the extension bpp
will be displayed. Select the file required and select the origin on which to deposit the piece;
4. carry out the operations described in point 3 above to open other files and deposit other
pieces on the table. Select the same origin as previously defined;
5. move the table elements to carry out tooling;
6. click on button to associate the table tooling with the active program.
146 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a706k0090.fm140605

9 Management of the tools with the

balluff device
This chapter provides information on the cataloguing and tooling of tools equipped with the “balluf”
device.
Tools or aggregates equipped with the “Balluff” device, i.e. an optical reading chip on which the
technical data of the tool is stored, can be managed using BiesseWorks by means of a data
transmission system from the chips to the NC and vice versa.
This option is only enabled on the software connected to the NC and then only in the case where
the “balluf” device has been enabled.
To enable the management of tools equipped with the “balluff” device using BiesseWorks,
close the MACHINE DATA application of the NC.
9.1 Management of tools/aggregates

When enabling the use of the “balluf” device, the tool/aggregate management interface of the
software connected to the machine changes its appearance slightly. The lines of the table in the
ToolManager application (figure 77) and the field (figure 78) with the name of the tools/aggregates
in the dialogue boxes change colour in order to distinguish the tools/aggregates with chips from
those without.
Figure 77
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0003.fm140605

147
The colours displayed are:

Magenta; states that the tool is equipped with a chip but it is not present in the tool magazine;
the transmission of data from and to the chip is not possible.
Blue; states that the tool is equipped with a chip and is present in the tool magazine;
transmission of data from and to the chip is possible. This colour replaces magenta only after
the created tool/aggregate has been tooled.
Pink; states that the tool is equipped with a chip but the chip is currently not operational.
Green; identifies a standard tool, i.e. without chip.
Create tools/aggregates
The name of the tools/aggregates equipped with chips is indicated by the character @ followed by
a number. The management of the tools/aggregates is identical to that of the tools/aggregates
without chips (see chapter 6, page 85), the only difference being in the name and in the option to
select in field Chip.
To create tools/aggregates equipped with chips, enter the name of the tool in the appropriate field
of either the tool or aggregate dialogue box, ref. A, or enter the name of the aggregate, ref. B,
which must have a maximum of 6 characters, and a numerical extension (from 0 to 9) in the @
adjacent field, ref. C (figure 78).
In the Chip field, select one of the following options:

NO_CHIP; standard tool or aggregate without chip;
CHIP; tool or aggregate with chip;
CHIP_AGGR; tool to be used only on an aggregate with chip.

CHIP_ERROR; tool or aggregate with non-operational chip.
Figure 78
A C
B C
148 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0003.fm140605

To save the newly created tools in the NC, click on button on the tool bar of the application in
use.
Modification of data in the database and transmitting data to the chips

Modification of data appertaining to created tools/aggregates with chips is only allowed if the tools/
aggregates with chips have been tooled in the magazine tooling environment.
The blue colour present in the tool table and in aggregate field Name indicates that the tool/
aggregate in question can be modified as it is present in the magazine.
Display the window with the technical data of the tool/aggregate to modify and save. Saving the
modifications using button automatically updates the individual chips present on the tools/
aggregates housed in the machine magazine.
Check that the tools/aggregates equipped with chips physically housed in the magazine
correspond to those tooled in the tooling window.
9.2 Tooling
To carry out the tooling, click on button or on button , according to whether accessing the
aggregate tooling environment or the magazine tooling environment.
When tooling tools/aggregates with chips, the following rules must be observed:
Each single tool/aggregate equipped with a chip can only be housed in one tool holder.
Each tool defined as a tool for an aggregate equipped with a chip can only belong to one
aggregate with a chip.
For the tooling procedures, refer to chapter 7 on page 111.
Transmission of data from the chips to the tooling environment

To update the tools/aggregates database and the magazine tooling by transferring the data stored
in the chips present on each single tool housed in the magazine, display window Magazine tooling
and click button .
This operation allows the tooling data stored in the NC to be aligned with that on the machine. If
the data transferred from the chip does not correspond with that of the NC, the updating is carried
out by overwriting the data on the NC. If the tool/aggregate is not present in the NC, it is
automatically given a name using the character “@” and a number to distinguish it from those
without chips saved in the database and inserted in the magazine tool holder.
For example
If the name of the tool stored in the chip of the tool housed in tool holder 4 is FORA@1, while the
name of the tool inserted in tool holder 4 of the NC tooling environment is FORAT@2, when button
is clicked, the system automatically updates the NC: tool FORA@1 is created in the database
and inserted in tool holder 4 of the tooling window in place of FORAT@2.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0003.fm140605

149
Transmission of data from the tooling environment to the chips

Data can be transmitted from the tooling environment to the chips in a number of ways:
Selecting the individual tool holder in the graphics area to update the individual chip of the
selected tool holder.
Selecting the name of the magazine from the tree list to update all the chips in the specified
magazine.
Selecting the name of the machine from the tree list to update all the chips in all the
magazines.
Press button to start the data transmission to the chips; a message is displayed confirming the
writing of the data by pressing the TEST button on the PLC keyboard.
During the data transmission from the NC to the chips, the system reads the data stored in
the chips to check that the transmitted data is correct.
For example, if the name of the tool stored in the chip of the tool physically housed in tool
holder 4 does not correspond to the name of the tool inserted in tool holder 4 of the
magazine tooling window, the system recognises the difference and asks for confirmation
or otherwise to save the data.
Failure of data transmission to the chip

In the case where the transmission of data from the NC to the chips fails, a message is displayed
with a number of options:
Retry the data transmission and writing.
Indicate the tool as a tool equipped with chip that is not operational and save the modifications
made; in this case the tool/aggregate in the database will turn pink (see paragraph 9.3
“Managing a malfunctioning chip”).
Annul the data transmission.
9.3 Managing a malfunctioning chip

In the case where the data transmission fails due to a broken or malfunctioning chip, modify the
tool/aggregate concerned by inserting in the Chip field of the appropriate tool/aggregate data
dialogue box, the option CHIP_ERROR. In this way, the tool remains inserted in the database and
is marked in pink. Check the chips and repeat the data transmission. To return the chip to an
operational status, i.e colour blue, display the magazine tooling window, tool it and click on button
or button .
150 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a707k0003.fm140605

10.1 Import machine data and tool database

The import procedure allows machine/tool data stored in the relevant directory of the NC or on
floppy disk to be imported and saved in the appropriate BiesseWorks directories.
The import of data from the NC to BiesseWorks on the software connected to the machine is
initially carried out by the installation technician (NC directories: ...\home\d_xnc per XNC/CNI ;
...\home per WRT/CNI). It can only be carried out at a later date in exceptional cases, for example
if the hard disk breaks, requiring the machine data to be installed again; this operation must only
be carried out on software that is not connected to the machine.
On the office software, the import of data is only carried out to effect a general update of the
system data, aligning it with that on the NC, thus ensuring that the created programs function in
the correct manner. It is advisable, therefore, to save this data on a floppy disk as follows:
For NC1000 (XNC/CNI) controls, copy directory "conf" and directory "data" from the NC.
For XP600 (WRT/CNI) controls, create two directories on the disk : “d_xnc” and “xnc”. Put
“confdata” and “data” in the “d_xnc” folder, the folder copied from the NC's directory
wnc\home\d_xnc. Put “confdata” in the “xnc” folder, copied from the NC's directory
wnc\home\xnc.
To import this data in the office software, refer to the procedure on page 152.
No partial import of machine data or tools database in the relative folder of the NC is
permitted.
Import procedure
To import data, run the ToolManager application software or the MachineConfiguration application
software and click on . The button is only enabled if a high level password has been entered
(see paragraph 4.3 on page 74).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0057.fm140605

151
Figure 79: dialogue box Import data
1. Select the type of numerical control from where to import the data by clicking on option button
XNC - CNI or on option button NCxxx - HSD.
2. Use button to search for the drive on which the data to import in the software has been
stored.
To import the office software using the data saved on the floppy disk or in a PC drive, select
the following directories:
• for the XNC/CNI import, select the directory in which the “conf” and “data” folders are found;
• for the WRT/CNI import, select the directory in which the “d_xnc” and “xnc” folders are
found;
3. Click on .
4. Select the import filters, that is to say define the values of the data to be imported:
• Tools; tick the marker box to import the tool database;
• Machine; tick the marker box to import the machine data;
• Tooling; tick the marker box to import the machine and tool magazine tooling configuration;
• The remaining data fields must not be modified.
152 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0057.fm140605

5. Click on .
6. Select the name to be given to the folder in which the data is to be saved:
• Sector; select the type of machine.
• Machine; select the name of the machine to overwrite the data for an existing machine. To
save the data with a different name click on A and insert the name of the machine.
7. Click on .
8. Tick the marker box Biesse.
9. Select the code that corresponds to the name of the machine from the list provided.
10. Click on Go forward.
11. Tick the marker box Set as active machine, if you wish this data to replace the data present in
MachineConfiguration (machine configuration) and the data present in ToolManager (tool
database).
12. Click on to start the import procedure.
13. Save and exit the window.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0057.fm140605

153
10.2 Backup/restore machine data and tool database

The backup operation stores the machine data, the work table data and the tool database data in a
file with a zip extension, while the restore operation overwrites this same data in the respective
software directories by extracting it from the previously saved zip file.
This operation is designed to:

store the machine/tooling data and tool database data in a drive, a floppy disk for example, in
order to have it available at any time if the original data becomes corrupt. It is advisable,
therefore, to periodically carry out a backup procedure.
update the data in the office software by replacing it with that taken from the software
connected to the machine.
Data backup procedure

To carry out the backup, run the BackupManager utility (see page 60) and proceed as follows:
1. Select the option button Copy.

2. Activate check box Data to copy data and check box Tool bitmap to copy images, BMP
formats and tools.
3. Click on the Setup button to set a high password level, only if the copy is to be saved and
protected by inserting a password.
Saving the backup file with a password means that it is protected from possible tampering.
Restore of this file will only be carried out if the preset password is entered.
4. Click on search button . A system window is displayed from where it is possible to select
the path on which to save the zip file containing the copy of the data. Enter the name of the file
in the appropriate field; the zip extension is inserted automatically when the system window is
closed.
6. In the square Select data mark the boxes required, to select the data you wish to save.
8. Click on to start the backup procedure.
154 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0057.fm140605

Data restore procedure
Before restoring saved data close all BiesseWorks applications. At the end of the
operation reboot the applications.
To restore the backed up data, run the BackupManager utility (see page 60) and proceed as
follows:
1. Select the option button Restore.
2. Click on the search button to find the zip file containing the copy of data to be restored.
4. In the square Select the items to be restored mark the boxes required, to select the data you
wish to restore.
6. Click on to start the restore procedure.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0057.fm140605

155
156 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0057.fm140605

11 Management of the machine axes

and the working units
The part relating to resetting of the machine axes, movement of the axes and the procedures to be
used to move the operation section units in order to tool up the machine is entirely managed by the
CNI application softwares, and is described in chapter 21 on page 337.
11.1 Resetting the machine axes

For a detailed description of how to reset the axes, see paragraph 21.2 on page 345.
11.2 Moving the machine axes

For a detailed description of how to move the axes, see paragraph 21.3 on page 346.
11.3 Forced movement of the working units

A description of the procedures used to carry out forced movement of the machine working units is
given in paragraph 21.4 on page 348
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a709k0002.fm140605

157
158 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a709k0002.fm140605

Use/Programming
The machining program, or Editor application document, is a file containing all the information
necessary for carrying out a machining operation and is displayed in the body of the Editor
application (see paragraph “Structure of the body of the application”, page 26).
Figure 80: example of a new document to be filled in.
The following chapter contains the basic instructions to be followed to create, optimise, simulate,
process and save a machining program.
When carrying out programming operations it is possible to use inches or millimetres as the
unit of measurement. For example, if “millimetres” has been defined as the unit of
measurement in the Setup, enter the value in the various fields followed by an asterisk plus
the unit (E.g. 500*inc.) to use “inches” as the unit of measurement. If “inches” has been
defined as the unit of measurement in the Setup, enter the value in the various fields
followed by an asterisk plus the unit (E.g. 500*mm.) to use “millimetres” as the unit of
measurement.
To use inches as the unit of measurement, without considering the value in the Setup, open
dialogue box Piece variables and tick marker box Measure in inches.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

161
12.1 Use of the commands area

When a machining operation program is created with the use of the appropriate machining
operation dialogue box, the programming rows (commands and parameters) are displayed in the
commands area.
To create a program using the commands area itself without going through the dialogue box, use
the commands and parameters shown in the appendix B “List of programming commands”.
Display of hidden parameters

To demonstrate the hidden parameters in the required programming row, place the text cursor at
the end of the row, press the CTRL key and the SPACE BAR. To visualise the other parameters in
succession, use the SPACE BAR while keeping the CTRL key pressed down.
Display of the parameter list

To show the list of parameters belonging to the required programming row, place the text cursor at
the end of the row, press the CTRL key followed by the SHIFT key and the SPACE BAR key. Press
the ESC key to close the list.
Inserting indents
To insert an indent in a programming row, display the tool bar by clicking on the menu Display, on
the option ToolBar and on the option Edit; position the cursor on a text row and click on the button
. To remove the indent, click on .
Inserting comments
To enter a comment between program rows, display the tool bar by clicking on the menu Display,
on option ToolBar and on option Edit; position the cursor on a text row and click on . If you wish
to change a machining operation into a comment text, select the operation and press the same
button; to restore the machining operation click on . This operation can also be carried out by
entering an apostrophe (‘) at the beginning of the row that is to become a comment.
Using the command Implode

In order to incorporate all the programming rows appertaining to the same geometry or same
machining operation in a single line, use option Implode in the quick menu or menu Edit.
Using the command Explode

To hide the programming row in which the text cursor is positioned and display all the elements
making it up one after the other, use option Explode in the quick menu or menu Edit.
162 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

12.2 Using the Normal cursor tool

When using zoom tools, to restore the cursor to normal pointer functions, so as to select the
elements in the graphics area, click on or press the right mouse button.
Click on to restore the cursor to normal pointer functions and to select the elements in the
graphics area.
To select an element in the drawing, use the cursor and wait until the element changes colour,
press the left mouse button to activate it and then wait until it changes colour again.
If you wish to select a number of separate elements in the drawing, after activating the first
element press the CTRL key on the keyboard, position the cursor on the second element and
press the left mouse button.
Figure 81: how to select a drawing element
12.3 Using the Graphic output tools

The Graphic output tools are used to change the drawing display in the graphics area of the Editor
application. To display these tools, select menu Display, option ToolBar > Graphic output (for a
description of the buttons, refer to paragraph “Graphic output bar” on page 39).
These tools can be enabled simultaneously; for example, if you wish to view the correction and the
machining thickness only, click on and on and disable the other buttons.
12.4 Updating the graphics area

To update the drawing using the modifications made to the text in the commands area, press .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

163
12.5 Deleting parts of the document

To delete the drawing from the graphics area, select it, display the quick menu and select
option Cut or click on button .

To delete a program row or an item from the tree list, select it, press the CANC key on the
keyboard or option Cut of the quick menu or button .
12.6 Copying parts of the document

To copy a drawing, select it, display the quick menu and select the option Copy; to paste it to
another document select the option Paste. The same procedure is followed for programming rows
or for items in the tree list.
Alternatively, select the part to copy, click on button and on button .
12.7 Consulting the set data

After having created the geometries or machining operations, to consult the dialogue boxes with
the data fields, carry out one of the following operations:
Position the cursor on the program row, display the quick menu and select the option
Properties....
Position the cursor on the machining operation item in the tree list, and double-click the left
mouse button.
Position the cursor on the program row and press SHIFT and F2.
12.8 Program creation phases

The following is the procedure to be followed when creating a new machining program.
1. Create a new document (see paragraph 12.9, page 165).
2. Design the machining operation program using the tools necessary for modifying the
characteristics of the program: rotate the shapes, create new sides etc. (see paragraph, 12.14
page 171). The machining operations can be designed in the following ways:
• by importing drawings created using normal CAD, described in chapter 18, to which the
machining operations can be associated.
• Using the drawing tools of the Editor application described in chapter 13, or the
SmartSketch CAD described in chapter 14 to create geometries to which the machining
operations can be associated (see chapter 15).
• Using the appropriate commands to program the cutting, boring machining operations etc.
directly, as described in chapter 15.
164 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

3. Tool the work table using the WorkTableTooling application (see chapter 8).
4. Start optimisation to check that the machining operations created are correct by optimising
them (see paragraph 12.15, page 188).
5. Simulate machining of the piece (see paragraph 12.16, page 188)
6. Save the document (see paragraph 12.11, page 188).
7. Start processing of the program for automatic creation of the ISO file to be run on the machine
(see paragraph 12.17, page 195).
12.9 Creating the document

To create a new document in the Editor application, select the menu File and the option New, or
click the button provided on the tool bar (see “Description of buttons”, page 37).
The dialogue box Piece variables is displayed.
Figure 82
The window is only displayed if the Show piece data on opening marker box has been ticked
in the Setup Editor Environment card.
LPX ; size of piece along the X axis.
LPY; size of piece along the Y axis.
LPZ ; thickness of piece.
Origins list; working area reference origin up to which the piece is to be pushed. To display the
window containing the list of origins, click on the adjacent button. To enable simultaneous
machining of two pieces, enter the correct pair of origins in this field (see paragraph “Enable the
two-piece simultaneous machining mode”, page 364).
Sole origin; enables use of a single origin in the working area. With this field enabled, the program
is not considered symmetrical, even with field Symmetry enabled. For more detailed information
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

165
on the effects produced by the field, refer to paragraph 15.6 “Notes on boring program symmetry”,
page 269.
User data; the dialogue box Customised panel parameters is displayed. The check boxes of the
markers are used to enable a few functions which are useful for creating the ISO file.
• Suction cups and clamps; button activates the automatic piece locking using shapeable
suction cups; button activates the automatic piece using uniclamps; button
indicates that the piece locking is manual and must be activated using the appropriate key
present on the machine control panel.
• Bars or Idle wheels or Air table; enables or disables the automatic use of the bar
supports, ball supports or electric fan to facilitate the positioning of the piece on the table.
Button indicates that the enabling of the above is manual, in other words by means of
the appropriate key on the machine control panel.
• Supports up at end of locking; it makes it possible to disable the release of the bar supports
at the end of the piece loading on the work table (field enabled). At the end of blocking the
piece, the bar supports remain in the load position without descending; this type of function
could be useful during locking with the clamps.
• Pushers; enables or disables the automatic use of the pushers. Button indicates that
the enabling of the above is manual, in other words by means of the appropriate key on the
machine control panel.
• Export the tool list; allows export of the data relating to tools present in the database. In this
case, the processed ISO file also contains the section with the list of tools used.
• Export the work table tooling set-up; allows export of the data relating to the position of
suction cups and mobile supports. In this case, the processed ISO file contains the section
with the positions of all the work table elements.
• Export the symmetrical section; used to export the data for machining at mirror origin. In this
case, the ISO file generated contains the section for managing the specular origins, called
“SECTION FOR SYMMETRIC ORIGIN”. This allows the machining to be created by
inverting the direction of the profile path (figure 83) to allow the tool to maintain the correct
forward direction (see paragraph 15.15 “Notes for milling operations on the mirror origin”,
page 277).
Figure 83: A=straight origin; B=specular origin.

X+
A B
Y+
Symmetry; enables/disables program symmetry . Allows symmetrical spindles to be used when

the piece is machined on the mirror origin. For more detailed information on the effects produced
by the field, refer to paragraph 15.6 “Notes on boring program symmetry”, page 269.
Measure in inches; enables measurements in inches.
166 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

X cut. position; (figure 84) position in X (ref. A) beyond which the system interrupts the
machining, automatically inserting a suspension with translation in X to allow the piece to be
translated on the specular origin. The machining operations that precede this position (ref. c, d)
and the machining operations running beyond it (ref. b) are executed taking the set origin as the
reference, while machining operations after this position (ref. e) are carried out after translation of
the piece taking the specular origin as the reference. This data item may be useful for machining
pieces larger than the working field.
Figure 84
A A
D E
Jig thickness; jig thickness spacer when used.
Keyboard offset; enables use of the keyboard on the machine in order to move the origin, if
necessary.
Movement in X; enables movement of the origin along the X axis, if there are physical reasons on
the machine that require this movement. Used when the stops for pieces with protruding coating
(also known as two movement stops) are fitted.
Movement in Y; enables movement of the origin along the Y axis, if there are physical reasons on
the machine that require this movement. Used when the stops for pieces with protruding coating
(also known as two movement stops) are fitted.
Uniclamp; enables the use of the Uniclamps. To use the shapeable suction cups, disable the
check box.
Collision control; activates the positioning control of the moving parts of the work table
(shapeable suction cups and mobile supports) in order to prevent interference with the objects on
the work table or the tools. For example, in the case where through machining has been
programmed, the system checks whether the positioning of the suction cups under the piece is
such that if the tool overruns the piece they could be damaged. This type of control is not active
when using aggregate 21 or the chip deflector. When disabling the box, this type of check is not
done.
Locking Area; this allows the type of independent locking zone configuration to be chosen.
Material; list of piece images. Select an image to identify the piece during simulation of the
machining operation and tooling of the work table with the WorkTableTooling application.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

167
Modifying piece dimensions

To modify the dimensions of the piece in the active document, click on button (for a description
of the window, refer to “Creating the document” on page 165).
Modifying the dimensions of the piece using the command area

To modify the dimensions of the reference piece without using the relevant fields in dialogue box
Piece variables, type the parameters of the piece (LPX, LPY or LPZ) directly in the command area
followed by a value or expression and by the UpdatePanel function (see figure 85).
It is advisable to insert the UpdatePanel at program start function between the programming rows,
in that this function has been created to calculated the dimensions of the piece using expressions,
instructions or macros that make use of external variables. Inserting this function between the
programming rows after a machining operation could create problems in the execution of the
program.
Figure 85
If A=300 Then
LPX=A
End If
If B=100 Then
LPY=B
End If
If C=10 Then
LPZ=C
End If
UpdatePanel
12.10 Opening the document

To open a BPP formal file in the Editor application, select the menu File and the option Open, or
click the button provided on the tool bar (see “Description of buttons”, page 37). Find the file
required in the Open dialogue box; double-click on the file to open it.
168 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

12.11 Saving the document

To save a document that has never been previously saved, select menu File, option Save or
Save as, or click on button .

Select the BPP extension (ref. A figure 86), specify the name of the file in field B and save by
clicking on button C. The file is saved in the default directory ...\Editor\Programs; if you wish to
save the file in another directory, use field D to find it.
Figure 86
B C
A
To save an active document, creating a copy of it with a different name, select menu File and
option Save as. In field B enter the new name (figure 86).
To overwrite the active document, click on button .
12.12 Saving the document in different formats

BiesseWorks can save (export) documents in different file formats in order to be able to use them
in other applications.
To save the documents in WMF format (vectorial graphic file) that can be read by applications
such as Illustrator or FreeHand, select menu Export and option To WMF file.
To save documents in CID format (technologic and graphic files), select menu Export and
option To CID file.
To save documents in DXF format (technologic and graphic files), select menu Export and
option To DXF file.
When exporting files in DXF format, the system automatically creates the layers associated to the
geometries and machining operations, the keys of which cannot be modified in that they are
embedded in the system.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

169
List of keys created by the system while saving documents in DXF format
Keys Description
PANEL LPX and LPY dimensions of the piece.
FACE1 Face 1 of the piece.
FACE%ld Non-standard faces (%ld = progressive identification number of the non-standard
faces). The bores on the non-standard faces are represented by a circle and are
given the same name as the face on which they have been created.
VERTICA Vertical bore
SIDEA Horizontal bore on face 1 of the piece.
SIDEB Horizontal bore on face 2 of the piece.
SIDEC Horizontal bore on face 3 of the piece.
SIDED Horizontal bore on face 4 of the piece.
SIDEE Horizontal bore on face 5 of the piece.
BLADE Blade cuts.
ROUTER Milling operation
12.13 Printing the document

Printing a document in the Editor application will only involve the text that is present in the
commands area. It is not possible to obtain a print-out on paper of the geometry in the graphics
area.
To print the document, select the menu File and the option Print, or click the button provided on the
tool bar (see “Description of buttons”, page 37).
170 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

12.14 Program functions

The program functions are special instructions that, when inserted between programming rows,
allow certain characteristics of the program itself to be modified. To display the Functions tool bar,
click on .
The functions can be recalled through the relevant options under the Insert item in the quick
menu or menu bar as well.
Figure 87: tool bar Functions
A B C D E F G H I J K
A ISO code; inserts the instruction “ISO” between the programming rows, to enter customised
ISO instructions.
B Move piece; inserts the instruction “OFFSET” between the programming rows, to transfer the
origin. For the detailed description, see page 172.
C Rotate geometry; input the instruction “ROTATE” among the programming rows for the rotation
of the geometry. For the detailed description, see page. 172.
DC Geometry scale; inserts the instruction “SCALE” between the programming rows, to change
the size of the geometry. For the detailed description, see page 173.
EA Move geometry; inserts the instruction “SHIFT” between the programming rows, to move the
geometry. For the detailed description, see page 174.
F Wait for piece positioning; inserts the instruction “WAIT” between the programming rows, to
suspend the machining operation. For the detailed description, see page 174.
GI Sides from geometry; inserts the instruction “WFG” between the programming rows, to change
the elements in the drawing into side of the piece. For the detailed description, see page 176.
H Side from geometry on side faces; inserts among the programming rows the instruction
“WFGL” to obtain a new side from a segment generated on one of the four standard side
faces. For the detailed description, see page 178.
I Side from geometry using section plan; inserts the instruction “WFGPS” between the
programming rows, to obtain a new side from a segment generated on the zero face and one
of the four standard side faces. For the detailed description, see page 180.
J Circular side; inserts the instruction “'WFC” between the programming rows, to create a side
with a curved surface. For the detailed description, see page 182.
KG Straight side; inserts the instruction “WFL” between the programming rows, to create a side
with a flat surface. For the detailed description, see page 185.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

171
Translation of the origin

The instruction “OFFSET” is used for temporary translation of the program origin, moving the piece
so as to define a new offset. This instruction does not cause any visible results in the software
interface, in that it creates a piece offset with the consequent offset of the associated machining
operations. Click on button Move piece (ref. B, figure 87) to input this instruction.
Set the following data fields:

X; X axis co-ordinate (see figure below);
Y; Y axis co-ordinate (see figure below);
Z; Z axis co-ordinate (see figure below).
Figure 88
Rotating the geometry

The “ROTATE” instruction allows the drawings present in the graphics area to be rotated. To input
it, position the text cursor on the row that goes before the geometry or the machining operation
control and click on button Rotate geometry (ref. C, figure 87).

X; X axis co-ordinate of the centre of rotation;
Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the centre of rotation;
Angle;geometry angle of rotation.

All the geometries after the “ROTATE” instruction are rotated. To annul this operation, re-insert the
“ROTATE” instruction between the programming rows and set all the data fields at zero (see figure
below).
172 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Figure 89
ROTATE X=0 Y=0 A=10

GEO ID="P1002" SIDE=0 CRN="1" DP=10 ER=NO
ROTATE X=0 Y=0
CUT_X ID="P1003" SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=0 Y=500 Z=0 DP=0 L=800
Reduction/increase of the geometry dimensions

The “SCALE” instruction uses a scaling factor to reduce or increase the size of the geometries
present in the graphics area. To input it, position the text cursor on the row that goes before the
geometry or the machining operation control and click on button Geometry scale (ref. D, figure 87).
Enter the value required in the Scale factor data field.
The scale factor only acts on the X axis and on the Y axis, and not on the Z axis.
All the geometries after the “SCALE” instruction are modified. To annul this operation, re-insert the
“SCALE” instruction between the programming rows and set field at zero Scale factor (see figure
below).
Figure 90
SCALE FCT=70
SCALE FCT=0
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

173
Translation of the geometry

The “SHIFT” instruction allows the drawings present in the graphics area to be moved. To insert it,
position the text cursor on the row that goes before the geometry or the machining operation
control and click button Move geometry (ref. E, figure 87).

X; X axis co-ordinate;
Y; Y axis co-ordinate.
All the geometries after the “SHIFT” instruction are moved. Each instruction inserted between
programming rows annuls the previous one, in other words, the value used by the system for the
movement is that of the last instruction issued. To annul this operation, insert the instruction and
set field X and field Y at zero (see figure below).
Figure 91
SHIFT DX=-30 DY=-50

SHIFT DX=0 DY=0
Suspension of the machining operation for the positioning of the piece

Suspensions are instructions that allow the programmed machining operation to be suspended
temporarily to allow the piece to be moved or turned on the work table. It is possible to enter an
unlimited number of instructions between the program rows. Click on button Wait for piece
positioning (ref. F, figure 87) to input them.
; Suspends the machining operation to move the piece to another working area (translate
piece). This command enables automatic unlocking of the piece from the work table.
Define the following data fields:
Origin Identif.; number of the origin to which the piece is to be moved. If the set origin is the
same as that defined in the machining program, the system only generates one suspension
without translation.
Tilting; type of overturning.
X; to overturn the piece by turning it around the X axis (ref. A , figure 92).
174 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Y; to overturn the piece by turning it around the Y axis (ref. B , figure 92).
XY; to overturn the piece by turning it around both the X and the Y axis (ref. C , figure 92).
Figure 92
A B C
Y Y
Rotation; rotation of the piece.
Figure 93
+X
90° 270°
+Y 0° 180°
; Suspends the machining operation momentarily. If the piece is to be unlocked from the work
table to turn it, click on the marker box Unlock.
Tilting; type of overturning.
X; to overturn the piece by turning it around the X axis (ref. A , figure 92).
Y; to overturn the piece by turning it around the Y axis (ref. B , figure 92).
XY; to overturn the piece by turning it around both the X and the Y axis (ref. C , figure 92).
Rotation; rotation of the piece. Select the type of rotation required.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

175
Recommendations for use

When using the suspension with piece rotation, if dimension X is such that after having completed
the rotation, the dimension is increased (figure 94), it could happen that when the piece is rotated
and positioned on the work table, the locking devices do not function as they should due to the
missing mobile supports.To prevent this from happening, it is always advisable to program the
machining operation starting with a dimension X of the piece larger than dimension Y.
Figure 94: A = piece before rotating; B = piece after rotating.
+X
X = 500
+Y
X = 1000
Y=1000
A
Y=500
Sides obtained from a geometrical profile

The “WFG” instruction might be associated with a geometric profile created on face zero of the
piece, in this case it generates, non standard sides on the basis of the type of profile (see the
example on page 177), or it might be associated with a single geometry for the purpose of
generating a single non-standard side.
To input this instruction, position the cursor after the command “ROUT” or “GEO” and click on
button Sides from geometry (ref. G, figure 87).
Description of data fields

Side Identif.; numbered code to give to the first non-standard face generated by a shape or to the
individual side generated by a segment. Enter a number greater than five.Leaving the default
settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.
Geom. identif.; this makes it possible to choose the identification code of the geometry (drawing
ID) made on face zero of the piece.
Reverse; box used to enable reversing of the sides created. This command is connected to the
direction of the drawing. If the drawing has an anticlockwise direction, ticking this box indicates
that the elements in the drawing are internal sides of the piece (ref. B , figure 97). If the drawing
has a clockwise direction, ticking this box indicates that the elements in the drawing are sides of
the piece, and therefore external (ref. A , figure 97).
Panel Def.;box used to enable two different types of machined piece visualisation in the simulator.
When it is ticked, the drawing created is displayed as a profile of the piece (ref. A figure 95). When
it is not ticked, both the drawing created and the piece to be machined are displayed (ref. B , figure
95).
176 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Figure 95
Virtual Face; makes it possible to indicate that the side generated is virtual, that it is to say, not
displayed in the simulator.
Vertical; declares that the side is perpendicular to the X,Y plane. To give an inclination to the side
created, disable the marker box and set the field Inclination.
Inclination; inclination of the created side (see figure 96). This is enabled by disabling the field
Vertical.
Figure 96
Notes on use
The “WFG” instruction associated with the milling of a geometrical profile makes it possible to
create new faces that can be machined.
From the geometry reported in figure 98 a type A or type B (see figure 97) machining operation
can be obtained from the reference piece.
Figure 97
A B
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

177
To carry out the type A machining and generate the machinable faces C, the geometry must be
created assigning the anticlockwise direction to the first segment (see figure 97); in the case where
the created drawing has a clockwise direction, marker check box Reverse must be enabled.
To carry out the type B machining and generate the machinable faces D, the geometry must be
created assigning the anticlockwise direction to the first segment (see figure 97); in the case where
the created drawing has an anticlockwise direction, marker check box Reverse must be enabled.
Figure 98: For example: milling a geometric profile designed to start from a start point P in an anticlockwise
direction.
6
7
13 12 8
14 11 9
10
P 10
11
6 9 12
7 8 13
14

ROUTG GID="P1000" Z=0 DP=10 OPT=NO DIA=10 RV=YES
WFG SIDE=6 GID="P1000" PDF=YES RV=YES
Sides obtained from drawings on side faces

The “WFGL” instruction associated with a drawing created on one of the four standard side faces,
makes it possible to generate on the basis of the angle of the designated segment, one non-
standard vertical side (ref. A, figure 99) or inclined (ref. B, figure 99).
To input this instruction, position the cursor aft the command “ROUT” or “GEO” and click on button
Side from geometry on side faces (ref. H, figure 87).
178 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Notes to identify the machinable part of the side generated

By default, the machinable part of the side obtained from a geometrical segment realised on the
side face is linked to the direction of the geometry, direction indicated by the arrow and it is always
on its left (ref. left, figure 99); to invert it, use the field Reverse.
Figure 99: A = non standard sides perpendicular to plane X, Y. B = not standard sides inclined on plane X, Y.

Side Identif.; numbered code to be attributed to the non standard side created. Enter a number
greater than five. Leaving the default settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.
Z geometry; allows the selection of the geometry's identification code (drawing ID) created on one
of the four side faces (1, 2, 3, 4).
Reverse; makes it possible to indicate that the part of the side on which to apply the machining
operation is opposite to the default side (see paragraph “Notes to identify the machinable part of
the side generated”).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

179
Notes on use
Generate the geometry on the required side, for example on side 1, and call it up using the field Z
geometry. The face created is developed perpendicularly at the side on which the segment has
been drawn.
Sides obtained from drawings on face zero and on the side faces
The “WFGPS” instructions associated with two geometries drawn one on face zero and the other
on one of the four standard side faces (1, 2, 3, 4) can be used to generate a non standard
trapezoidal side (figure 101) or a vertical/inclined side (figure 102), on the basis of the angle of the
segment created on the side face.
To input this instruction, position the cursor aft the command “ROUT” or “GEO” and click on button
Side from geometry using section plan (ref. I, figure 87).

By default, the machinable part of the generated side is linked to the direction of the geometry
made on face zero of the piece, direction indicated by the arrow, and it is always on its right (ref.
right, figure 100); to invert it, use the field Reverse.
Figure 100
right

Geom. identif.; this makes it possible to choose the identification code of the geometry (drawing
ID) drawn on face zero.
Z geometry; allows the selection of the geometry's identification code (drawing ID ) created on
one of the four side faces (1, 2, 3, 4).
180 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Reverse; makes it possible to indicate that the part of the side on which to apply the machining
operation is opposite to the default side (see paragraph “Notes to identify the machinable part of
the side generated”).
Section plan; is used to indicate that the generated side is at right angles to plane X/Y. In this
case it is necessary to check that the two segments generated have at least one end point in
common (e.g. the initial point).
Example of trapezoidal faces

Create two geometries, one on face zero and the other on one of the four side faces.
• Use the geometry created on the lateral face to establish the angle of the trapezium.
• The two geometries must have one point in common (initial or final).
• The geometry made on the zero side must consist of a single segment.
Recall the geometry drawn on face zero, in the data field Geom. identif. .
Recall the geometry drawn on the lateral face, in the data field Z geometry .
Tick the marker box Section plan.
Figure 101
GEO ID="lato0" SIDE=0 CRN="1" DP= 0

START_POINT X=350 Y=500 Z= 0
LINE_ANXE A=-40 XE= 500
ENDPATH
GEO ID="lato2" SIDE=2 CRN="1" DP=0
START_POINT X=350 Y=0 Z=0
LINE_ANYE A=30 YE=60
ENDPATH
WFGPS ID=6 GID="lato0" GIZ="lato2" PS=YES
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

181
Example of inclined or vertical faces

Create two geometries, one on face zero and the other on one of the four side faces. Both
geometries must consist of a single segment. The segment created on the side face makes it
possible to establish the inclination of the generated side.
Recall the geometry drawn on face zero, in the data field Geom. identif. .
Recall the geometry drawn on the lateral face, in the data field Z geometry .
Figure 102
GEO ID="fac0" SIDE=0 CRN="1" DP=0 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO
LINE_EP XE=LPX YE=400
ENDPATH
GEO ID="lato1" SIDE=1 CRN="1" DP=0 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO
LINE_LNAN L=50 A=35
ENDPATH
WFGPS ID=6 GID="fac0" GIZ="lato1"
Curved surface sides

The “WFC” instruction makes it possible to generate a non-standard side with a curved surface by
making an arc on side 0 of the piece.
Click on button Circular side (ref. J, figure 87) to input this instruction.

By default, the machinable part of the generated side is linked to the direction of the geometry of
the piece, direction indicated by the arrow and it is always on its right (ref. right, figure 103); to
invert it, use the field Reverse.
182 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Figure 103
right right
right right

Reverse; makes it possible to indicate that the part of the side to apply the machining operation to
is not the default side, i.e. the one linked to the direction of the generated segment but the opposite
one (see paragraph “Notes to identify the machinable part of the side generated”).
created, disable the marker box and set the fieldInclination (figure 107).
Aut.Height; this makes it possible to automatically calculate the height of the side on the basis of
the thickness of the piece.Tick the box to make this operation active and disable the field Height.
Height; height or thickness of the side.
Ang. size; (figure 104) size of circular side. Enter the angle value a to get the final P2 of the curve
of circle B.
Figure 104: P = centre of circle taken from coordinates X/Y; P1 = starting arch point; P2 = point at front of
curve; a = angle.
B
X P2
Y A
P1
P
X; (figure 105) X axis co-ordinate for the centre P of the circle curve.
Y; (figure 105) X axis co-ordinate for the centre P of the circle curve.
Z; Z axis co-ordinate of the centre of the circle curve. Define where the start point is with respect to
the Z axis. The Z value must always be negative.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

183
Inclination; inclination of the side created. This is enabled by disabling the field Vertical. The value
to be inserted in this field is linked to the activation/deactivation of the marker box System:
• Box enabled; indicates that the starting value to obtain the orthoganal side to the X, Y plane
is 0° (drawing B, figure 107).
• Box disabled; indicates that the value from which to leave to obtain the orthoganal side to
the X, Y plane is 270° (drawing A, figure 107).
Starting angle; (figure 105) value of angle to get starting point P1 of the circle curve. To move the
starting point P1, enter a negative value a- o positive a+.
Radius; (figure 105) radius r of the circle curve.
Figure 105: Circle curve with starting angle at zero degrees. P = centre of circle; r = radius of circle; P1 =
starting point of circle curve.
X
r a-
Y
P1
P a+
Virtual Face; this makes it possible to indicate that the side generated is virtual, i.e. it is not
System; this makes it possible to modify the system with which to calculate the circular faces. The
enabled box indicates that the reference edge to make the face is edge 1; the disabled box
indicates that the reference edge to make the face is edge 2. This field is linked to the setting
made in the field Inclination.
; Direction of rotation of the curve. Click on the button to set clockwise rotation of the curve.
Enable if you wish to create a curved side located on the inside of the piece.
; Direction of rotation of the curve. Click on the button to set anticlockwise rotation of the curve.
Enable if you wish to create a curved side located on the outside of the piece.
The start point for the curved side is very important in defining the direction to be followed
during the machining phase. If the curved side is to be an external side, to be machined
from the outside, (ref. A, figure 109), set the X and Y co-ordinates in such a way that the arc
goes in an anticlockwise direction and click on . If the curved side is to be an internal
side of the piece. (ref. B 109), to be machined from the inside, (ref. B figure , set the X and
Y co-ordinates in such a way that the arc goes in a clockwise direction and click on .
184 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Notes on use
This instruction must be associated with a milling operation. The example given in figure 106
shows how to carry out curved milling on the corners of the piece, defining the cut parts external
sides of the piece.
Figure 106: example of how to cut the corners of the piece, defining the cut parts as circular sides.
6
6 9 7
8
9
7 8
ROUT SIDE=0 CRN="1" Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10

WFC ID=6 X=200 Y=200 Zdisabled AZ=270 H=LPZ A=-90 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW
WFC ID=7 X=200 Y=LPY-200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 H=LPZ A=180 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW
WFC ID=8 X=LPX-200 Y=LPY-200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 H=LPZ A=90 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW
WFC ID=9 X=LPX-200 Y=200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 H=LPZ A=0 DA=90 R=200 DIR=dirCCW
Flat surface sides

The “WFL” instruction makes it possible to generate a non standard side with a flat surface by
making a linear segment on side 0 of the piece.
Click on button Straight side (ref. K, figure 87) to input this instruction.

Side Identif.; numbered code to be attributed to the non-standard side created. numbered code to
be attributed to the non-standard side created. Enter a number greater than five. Leaving the
default settings, the number is automatically provided by the system.
Reverse; makes it possible to indicate that the part of the side to apply the machining operation to
is not the one linked to the direction of the generated segment, i.e. the one obtained on the basis
of the rule indicated in fieldDirection but the opposite one.
For example: a segment that has a direction leftwards, by default, the part that can be machined is
the one to its right; when this field is enabled the part that can be machined is the one on its left.
created, disable the marker box and set the field Inclination (figure 107).
Aut.Height; this makes it possible to automatically calculate the height of the side on the basis of
the thickness of the piece. Tick the box to make this operation active and disable the field Height.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

185
Height; height or thickness of the side.
Aut.Length; this automatically calculates the length of the side created on the basis of co-
ordinates X,Y of the initial point and the AR angle. Tick the box to make this operation active and
disable the field Length.
Length; length of the side.
X; X axis co-ordinate for the start point p (figure 108) of the angled straight line (figure 108).
Y; Y axis co-ordinate for the start point p (figure 108) of the angled straight line (figure 108).
Z; Z axis co-ordinate for the start point. Define where the start point is with respect to the Z axis. If
the box has not been marked System the value of Z must always be negative.
Inclination; inclination of the side created. This is enabled by disabling the field Vertical. The value
to be inserted in this field is linked to the activation/deactivation of the marker box System:
• Box enabled; indicates that the value from which to leave to obtain the orthoganal side to
the X, Y, plane is 0° (drawing B, figure 107).
• Box disabled; indicates that the value from which to leave to obtain the orthoganal side to
the X, Y, plane is 270° (drawing A, figure 107).
Figure 107
Direction; angle of rotation ar (figure 108) of the straight line r (figure 108). The angle must be
calculated from zero degrees (0°) that is always found on the right of the initial point p of the
segment (figure 108). To rotate the segment anti-clockwise use a negative value (from 0 to -360),
to rotate the segment clockwise use a positive value (from 0 to +360). The part of the face that can
be machined follows the direction of the segment and is always on its right (ref. right figure 108).
186 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Figure 108
System; this makes it possible to modify the system with which to calculate the linear faces. The
enabled box indicates that the reference edge to make the face is edge 1; the disabled box
indicates that the reference edge to make the face is edge 2. This field is linked to the setting
made in the field Inclination.
Notes on use
This instruction must be associated with a cutting or a milling operation. The start point for the
straight side is very important in defining the direction to be followed during the machining phase.
If the straight side is to be an external side (ref. A figure below), to be machined from the outside,
set the X and Y co-ordinates in such a way that the angled straight line goes in an anticlockwise
direction. If the straight side is to be an internal side of the piece. (ref. B figure below), to be
machined from the inside, set the X and Y co-ordinates in such a way that the angled straight line
goes in a clockwise direction.
Figure 109
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

187
Example of a non standard face by setting the automatic calculation of the length and height:
WFL ID=6 X=200 Y= 0 Z=-LPZ AR=-270 H=LPZ AFL= YES AFH= YES VRT= YES VF= NO
Example of how to cut the edges of the piece by defining the cut parts as external sides:
6
6 7
9
8
9
7 8
CUT_G SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=LPX-400 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 TYP=cutYA L=0 ANG=-45 XE=0 YE=200
WFL ID=7 X=LPX-400 Y=0 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=135 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ
WFL ID=8 X=0 Y=400 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=45 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ
WFL ID=9 X=400 Y=600 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=-45 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ
WFL ID=10 X=600 Y=200 Z=-LPZ AZ=270 AR=-135 L=Sqr(200*200+200*200) H=LPZ
12.15 Program optimisation

Optimisation of the program is carried out to check that machining operations are correct and to
ensure optimum running of the program, that is to say by putting the machine in a condition to
perform in the best possible way, carrying out all machining operations in the shortest possible
time.
To start the optimiser, select . The window containing the results of optimisation will only be
displayed if errors are found in the program being processed.
After starting the optimisation, to consult the window with the optimiser results , position the cursor
on a programming row, display the quick menu and select the option Diagnostics... or Diagnostics
for this line....
188 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

To highlight the programming rows that the optimiser has not been able to optimise, position the
cursor in the command area, display the quick menu and check item Highlight non-optimised lines;
the lines will turn red.
Optimiser structure
The window containing optimiser error data is divided into three sections.
Figure 110: dialogue box Optimiser results
descriptive section (ref. A figure 110); this shows a description of the line selected in the
column in section C (figure 110).
section with a list of machining operations (ref. B , figure 110); the column Machining
operations List (ID) displays the names of the machining operations preceded by a symbol
(see paragraph “Symbols used in the table”) indicating operation possible or bad operation.
To view bad operations only, click on the option button Errors only; to consult all the machining
operations, click on the option button All.
The machining operations present in the Machining operations List (ID) column interact with
section C (figure 110), that is to say, when a machining operation is selected the names of the
sub-operations will automatically be displayed in section C with a list of all the spindles or tool
holders.
section with a list of spindles/tool holders (ref. C figure 110); the first column displays the
names of the sub-operations that make up the machining operation selected in column
Machining operations List (ID) of section B (figure 110). To consult the list of spindles, click on
the Spindles option button, whereas to consult the list of tool holders in the magazine, click on
the Tool holders option button.
When a row in the table corresponding to a spindle (or tool holder) is selected, a table appears
in section B indicating the tool name and giving a description of errors.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

189
Symbols used in the table

The following are the meanings of the faces and symbols present in the table.
Faces shown in the column Sub-machining operations List (ID):
Red face; the sub-operation is not feasible;
Green face; the sub-operation can be carried out.

Symbols shown in the column There is no valid tool position.:
(-); the spindle is not used in any machining operation;

(!); there is a machining operation that can use the spindle;
(number); indicates the number of errors present in the row.
Faces shown in the column There is no valid tool position.:
Red face; the spindle cannot be used to carry out the machining operation;
Green face; the spindle can be used to carry out the machining operation;
Yellow face; the spindle has been selected by the optimiser to carry out the machining
operation.
List of spindles/tool holders

The table present in section C (figure 110) with the list of sub-operations and spindles or tool
holders is made up of a series of rows divided into a number of columns. The data in this table
must be read horizontally starting from the first spindle or tool holder in the column There is no
valid tool position..
The first column (ref. B figure 111) contains a list of all the spindles or tool holders, the second
column (ref. C figure 111) contains a list of the tools fitted in the spindles or in the tool holders,
whereas the remaining columns contain the indication KO or OK.
Figure 111 shows an example of how this data should be interpreted.

Example: the sub-operation A (milling) cannot be carried out (red face) because the electrospindle
TP1 is not fitted with any tool (ref. C), in fact, column D contains the indication KO showing that the
tool is missing. Furthermore, the tool PUNTA8 (ref. C) fitted on spindle TH1 cannot be used
because it is of a different class (ref. E), a different type (ref. F) and a different diameter (ref. G)
from the one set in the milling operation; it is in fact a boring tool and not a milling tool.
190 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Figure 111
The meaning of each column is always connected to the sub-operation selected in the column
Sub-machining operations List (ID) (ref. A). The headings of the columns have to be interpreted as
if they were questions, that is to say: “is the tool missing?”; “is the tool class different?”; “is the tool
type different?” , etc.; whereas OK and KO have to be read as a NO or a YES. The expression OK
means NO, whereas the expression KO means YES.
Description of the column headings

There is no valid tool position.; contains a list of all the spindles in the operating section or all the
tool holders in the magazine.
Tool Name; contains a list of all the tools fitted in the specific spindle or tool holder. If the field is
empty this means that the tool is not fitted in the spindle or tool holder.
Tool Missing; indicates whether or not the tool is present on the spindle or tool holder. OK indicates
that the tool is present in the spindle or tool holder. KO represents an error, indicating that the tool
is missing.
Different tool class; tool class. OK indicates that the tool class is correct. KO indicates that the tool
class is not compatible with the machining operation (for example a milling operation cannot use a
tool of class C-Drilling, i.e. a boring tool).
Different tool type; tool type. OK indicates that the tool type is correct. KO indicates that the tool
type is not compatible with the machining operation.
Different Thickness; blade thickness. OK indicates that the blade thickness is compatible with the
optimised machining operation. KO indicates that the blade thickness is different, i.e. it is not
compatible with the machining operation.
Different Diameter; tool diameter. OK indicates that the tool diameter is compatible with the
optimised machining operation. KO indicates that the tool diameter is different, i.e. it is not
compatible with the machining operation.
Bad Spindle Direction; spindle direction. OK indicates that the working direction of the spindle on
which the tool is fitted, or the working direction of the tool in the selected tool holder, is compatible
with the lead-in or working direction of the machining operation. KO indicates that it is not
compatible.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

191
12.16 Program simulation

The simulator makes it possible to check all the planned piece machining phases on screen. When
it is run from the WorkTableTooling application it also allows the work table to be displayed.
To display the Simulator window, click on .
Figure 112
Tool Class; displays the tool class.
Tool Type; displays the tool type ID.
Tool Code; displays the tool name.

Diameter ; displays the tool diameter.
Rotation speed [rpm]; displays the tool rotation speed.
Desc.speed [mm/min]; displays the tool lowering speed.

Speed [mm/min]; displays the speed at which the tool machines the piece.
View control; allows the view to be selected according to the side of the piece. Click on the side
required.
Axis control; allows the reference axes to be moved from one corner to another. The fields
indicated in the box Tool position will change value according to the position of the axes.
Time[sec]; this indicates the approximate duration of the machining operation.
Speed Ratio; simulation speed value, deriving from the use of button I and button J (figure 113).
X (mm); value for the tool X position according to the reference axes.
Y (mm); value for the tool Y position according to the reference axes.
192 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Z (mm); value for the tool Z position according to the reference axes.
Layer; name of the section of the route travelled by the tool.
Figure 113
A Start simulation.
B Temporary suspension of simulation.
C Terminate simulation.
D Return to the previous working cycle.
E Go to next working cycle.
F Return to previous element.
G Go to next element.
H Repeat simulation from start.
I Carry out rapid simulation.
J Carry out slow simulation.
Figure 114
A B C D E
A Carry out simulation in steps, to check tool movements in detail.

B Show or hide the tool during simulation.
C Display simulation graphics.
D This displays the three-dimensional image of the piece of wood with the machining operation.
E This shows the graphic of the reference piece while hiding the non-standard sides.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

193
Using decorations
By activating the quick menu in the graphics are of the simulator it is possible to develop the
decorations bar by selecting the item Decorations.
Figure 115
To move the image forward or back, use the mouse on the side wheels or move the cursor
while pressing CTRL, SHIFT and the left mouse button.
To turn the image around its vertical axis, use the mouse on the bottom wheel.
To turn the image around its centre point, click the left mouse button to select button B
indicated in figure 116. Position the cursor on the image, click the left mouse button and turn
the figure.
To move the image, press CTRL and the left mouse button.
Decorations buttons
Figure 116
A enables the cursor to select elements in the drawing.

B enables the cursor to move the drawing manually.
C displays the last view of the drawing saved previously using button D.
D saves the current view of the drawing.
E shows the whole drawing.
F allows an object to be selected and brought closer.
G allows perspective or isometric view to be set.
194 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

12.17 Processing the program and creating the ISO file

To process the machining program and generate the ISO file for running on the machine, click
button in the tool bar of the Editor application or on option Create NC Code of menu Tools.
The ISO extension file is created in the directory defined in the Input Output card in the Setup
dialogue box.
To save the ISO file with a different name and in a different directory, select option Create NC
Code on file... of menu Tools.
12.18 Backup/restore machining programs and macros

It is recommended that you save the programs created and the macros periodically to one of the
drives, for example onto a floppy-disk, to store the data and make it available in the event of
damage to the originals.
Data backup procedure

To carry out the backup, run the BackupManager utility and proceed as follows:
1. Select the option button Copy.
2. Tick the marker Programs to copy all the programs created;
3. Tick the marker Macros to copy all the macros created.
4. Click on search button . A system window is displayed from where it is possible to select
the path on which to save the zip file containing the copy of the data. Enter the name of the file
in the appropriate field; the zip extension is inserted automatically when the system window is
closed.
5. Click on the Setup button to set a high password level, only if the copy is to be protected from
possible tampering.
Restore of this file will only be carried out if the preset password is entered.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

195
7. To execute programs backup, click on button ; the system's window opens so you can
search the machining operation files.
To copy files in sub folders within a folder, search the main folder using the data field A and
enter in data field B the text: *.*; remembering to tick the box Include subfolders (see 8). To
copy all files in a folder, search the folder using the data field C and enter in the data field D
the text: *.bpp.
8. To copy the files inside a sub folder, click the box Include subfolders.
10. To make a backup of the macros, move the macros to be copied into the list on the right.
To move a single macro, select it and press .
To move all the macros, click on .
196 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

Data restore procedure
Before restoring saved data, close all the BiesseWorks applications. At the end of the
operation reboot the applications.
To restore the copied data, proceed as described below:
1. Select the option button Restore.
2. Click on the search button to find the zip file containing the copy of data to be restored.
4. To reset the machining programs, proceed as follows:

Move the machining programs to the list at the bottom, using the buttons A.
Search for the folder in which to save the file using the search button B.
5. Tick the box Use paths saved in archive to generate, inside the directory specified in field B,
the original folders/subfolders stored in ZIP backup files. The directory stored in the ZIP file
can be recreated partially or wholly:
• The option button Compose the relative path makes it possible to recreate the folders in
which the files resided at the moment of backup, starting from the mother folder (see
point7).
• The option button
Maintain the complete path makes it possible to recreate the folders/subfolders that the files
resided in at the time of back up, starting from the root
(C:\programmi\lavori\fresature\rettangolo.bmp).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

197
The disabled box makes it possible to restore BPPs directly inside the directory by specifying
in field B, without recreating the original folders/subfolders stored during backup.
7. To carry out a restore of the macros, move the macros to be copied into the right hand list.
198 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a717k0004.fm140605

13 Creation of profiles with the EGA

instruments
The following chapter shows the procedures for creating drawings through the use of EGA tools,
that is to say through the use of arcs and lines that assembled in tracts generates a geometrical
profile with which to associate technological data.
13.1 Drawing procedures

1. Click on , to display the tool bar for the carrying out of milling operations and geometries
and to develop the tool bar for creation of profiles..
2. Click on , to insert the command GEO in the program row with the basic start geometry
data, or click on to insert the command ROUT in the program row with the start geometry
data and the technological data
To draw a text to be associated with technological data, click on button (see page 217).
Button is used to define a “generic” geometric profile to be associated with a number of

machining operations, i.e. to be called up from within the command ROUTG (for a description
of the command ROUTG, see paragraph 15.1 “Milling programming” on page 229).
Button is used to define a genuine machining operation, with all the technological data
that it requires, including the “integrated” geometric profile, which cannot be used in other
machining operations (for a description of the ROUT command, see paragraph 15.1 “Milling
programming” on page 229).
3. Position the cursor in the commands area on the ENDPATH string indicating the end of the
machining operation. This string appears automatically each time tools are used to create the
geometry (GEO, ROUT, ROUTG) and it is used to determine the end of the drawing. To insert
additional end of machining operation strings, click on .
4. Select the button to define the start co-ordinates of the drawing. Proceed to create the
drawing by assembling lines and arcs (see page 204). To create elements with a closed
profile, click on the button for the relative figures.
The strings relating to geometries must always be positioned between the GEO, or ROUT,
string and the ENDPATH string indicating end of the machining operation/geometry.
5. Save the document created (see paragraph 12.11 “Saving the document” on page 169).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

199
How to insert the start point

To insert the start point of the drawing, position the text cursor on the program row ENDPATH and
click on .
Description of fields:
Start X; X axis co-ordinate of the start point of the drawing.
Start Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the start point of the drawing.
13.2 Definition of parameters used to draw with EGA

tools
The button displays the dialogue box Define geometry used to set the basic parameters of the
geometric profile. This button allows the GEO command including the drawing created with the aid
of the EGA buttons to be input among the programming rows (consult “Tools used to create the
drawing” on page 204).
Figure 117: dialogue box Define geometry
Fields list and description

CRN; used to set the piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.
SIDE; used to select the side of the piece on which to carry out the geometry. Select the side
required from the figure above, or type the side number in the field.
Geom. identif.; used to enter a code (name) to identify the geometry within the programming
rows. The ID is used to call up the geometry to be machined in the special pocketing and milling
windows.
Depth; used to define the distance DP between the top side of the piece (ref. A) and the top side
of the island (ref. B), if the geometry is used as an island
200 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

Figure 118
Reverse; reverses the direction of the programmed geometrical profile; the initial point of the
geometry thus becomes the final point.
Used to select repeat operations along the X axis; set the following fields:
X step; value of the distance between centres along the X axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements (ref. DX figure 119).
No.Repeats; number of repeats required.
Used to select repeat operations along the Y axis; set the following fields:
Y step; value of the distance between centres along the Y axis that defines the distance
between the geometric elements (ref. DY figure 119).
; used to select repeats along the step X-Y. set the following fields:
between the geometric elements.
; used to select repeats along the angled straight line. set the following fields:
Angle; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are carried out (ref. ARP figure 119).
L. step; distance between the geometric elements (ref. LAP figure 119).
Figure 119
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

201
; used to select repeats on the circumference. set the following fields:
Starting angle; value of the angle A from which to start when carrying out the repeats (see
examples shown in figure 122 and in figure 123). This is activated by removing the marker
from the data field First Item.
Angular step; value of the angular step (DA) that must be left between one repeat and the
next one.
Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see examples
shown in figure 122 and in figure 123). This is activated by removing the marker from the data
field First Item.
ARC; X position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.
YRC; Y position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.
Radial; enables radial repeats (see examples shown in figure 121 and in figure 123).
First Item; enables the first element ER as the initial element in the repeat (focal repeats)
eliminating the field Starting angle and the field Radius (see examples illustrated in figure 120
and in figure 121). It is recommended that this field be enabled at all times.
Figure 120: example of a NON RADIAL repeat setting the basic geometry as the first element in the repeat
(ER), the centre of the circumference value X-Y and the angular step DA.
In this case the start point B of the geometry GEO is

considered to be the first element (command ER) from
which to start when carrying out the repeat. According to
the data defined, the geometries will all rotate around the
circumference in the same direction, starting from the first
one.
GEO ID="2222" CRN="1" DP=10 RTY=racier ARC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 NRP=8 DA=45 ER=YES RDL=NO
START_POINT X=LPX/4 Y=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2-50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4+150 YE=LPY/2
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2+50
LINE_EP XE=LPX/4 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH
202 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

Figure 121: example of a RADIAL repeat setting the basic geometry as the first element in the repeat (ER),
the centre of the circumference value X-Y and the angular step DA.
In this case the start point B of the geometry GEO is

considered to be the first element (command ER) from
which to start when carrying out the repeat. According to
the data defined, the geometries will all rotate around the
radii of the circumference, starting from the first one
GEO ID="2222" CRN="1" RTY=racier ARC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 NRP=8 DA=45 ER=YES RDL=YES
ENDPATH
Figure 122: example of a NON RADIAL repeat setting the centre of the circumference value X-Y, the angular
step DA, the angle A and the radius R.
In this case the start point of the geometry GEO coincides

with the values ARC and YRC of the centre of the
circumference. According to the data defined, the
geometries will all rotate around the circumference in the
same direction.
GEO ID="2222" CRN="1" RTY=racier ARC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 NRP=8 R=210 A=25 DA=45 RDL=NO
ENDPATH
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

203
Figure 123: example of a RADIAL repeat setting the centre of the circumference value X-Y, the angular step
DA, the angle A and the radius R.
In this case the start point of the geometry GEO coincides

with the values XRC and YRC of the centre of the
circumference. According to the data defined, the
geometries will all rotate around the radii of the
circumference.
GEO ID="2222"CRN="1" RTY=rpCIR XRC=LPX/2 YRC=LPY/2 R=130 A=30 DA=45 ER=NO RDL=YES NRP=8
ENDPATH
13.3 Tools used to create the drawing

The tool bars used for the creation of drawings can be activated both through menu Insert and
option Millings that through the relevant EGA buttons.
To create the drawing there are three types of EGA tool:

“line” type tools (see page 204).
“arc" type tools (see page 208).
“figure” tools (see page 210).
“Line” type tools

The following are the commands available to create a “line” type geometric element.
Activation of these tools depends on their compatibility with the previous operation.
To display the line creation tool bar, click on .
204 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

Figure 124
A Starting point; inserts the start point of the drawing.

B Line given end point; creates a line using the co-ordinates of a known end point as reference
value.
C Line given length and angle; creates a line using a length and the angle with respect to the
positive direction of the X axis as reference values.
D Line given angle and final X; creates a line using the X co-ordinate of the end point and the
angle with respect to the positive direction of the X axis as reference values.
E Line given angle and final Y; creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of the end point and the
angle with respect to the positive direction of the X axis as reference values.
F Chamfer; creates a chamfer. Activated when the cursor is positioned on the line before the
angle to be chamfered.
G Line given length and final X; creates a line using the X co-ordinate of the known end point
and a length as reference values.
H Line given length and final Y; creates a line using the Y co-ordinate of the known end point and
a length as reference values.
I Line given length and tangency to previous item; creates a line using the length and the
tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
J Line given end point angle and tangency to previous item; creates a line using the end point
co-ordinates, the angle of the line with respect to the positive direction of the X axis, and the
tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
K Line given end point and tangency to previous item; creates a line using the end point co-
ordinates and the tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
L Incremental line given end point; creates a line, defining the end point co-ordinates as
increases to the end point co-ordinates of the preceding element.
The following is a list of the data fields that appear in the dialogue boxes during use of the “line”
type tools.
Alpha; inclination of the line.
Distance; length of the chamfer.
Increase in X; length along the X axis of the segment to be drawn (ref. B figure 125). The value
set in this field must be added to the value of the X co-ordinate of the end point for the preceding
element (ref. A figure 125). The result of this sum corresponds to the co-ordinate X of the final
point of the segment B to be drawn.
Increase in Y; length along the Y axis of the segment to be drawn (ref. B figure 125). The value
set in this field must be added to the value of the Y co-ordinate of the end point for the preceding
element (ref. A figure 125). The result of this sum corresponds to the co-ordinate Y of the final
point of the segment B to be drawn.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

205
Figure 125
GEO ID="P1001" SIDE=0 CRN="1" DP=10

START_POINT X=0 Y=100
LINE_EP X=100 Y=100 (ref. A)
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=100 (ref. B)
ENDPATH
Length; length of the geometric element.
Repositioning; used to indicate whether the segment of the profile generated must be considered
as a tool positioning trajectory. If this is set at NO, the segment is considered as being part of the
machining; if it is set at YES, the segment is considered as the positioning trajectory.
Solution; solutions that can be applied to the line, on the basis of the data set previously. Select
one of the available options.
Sharp corner; set sharp corner. Used to define that the point of intersection between the line and
the next element must be machined leaving a sharp corner. To enable this function, select item
sc1; to disable it select item scOFF.
Work. Speed; tool speed of advance.
Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed.

Start X; X axis co-ordinate of the start point of the element.
End X; X axis co-ordinate of the end point of the element.
Start Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the start point of the element.

End Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the end point of the element.
Start Z; co-ordinate in the direction of axis Z to establish the depth of the initial point of the profile
element.
The figure 126 demonstrates the result obtained by setting the initial depth data in segment B of
the profile: the tool descends to the depth (DP=10) set in the milling, follows the linear trajectory in
X equal to the length defined in the segment A, descends another 15 mm (ZS=15) and follows the
linear trajectory in X equal to the length defined in segment B.
206 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

Figure 126
ROUT ID="P1002" SIDE=0 CRN="1" Z=0 DP=10 DIA=10

LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0 ZS=15 ZE=0
End Z; co-ordinated in the direction of axis Z to establish the depth of the final point of the profile
element. The value indicated in this field is distributed gradually over the whole length of the profile
element.
The figure 127 demonstrates the result obtained by setting the final depth data in the profile
segment B: the tool descends to the depth (DP=5) set in the milling, follows a linear trajectory in X
equal to the length defined in the segment A, and performs a gradual decent Z (ZE=10) equal to
the length defined in segment B.
Figure 127
ROUT ID="P1002" SIDE=0 CRN="1" Z=0 DP=5 DIA=10

LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0
LINC_EP XI=100 YI=0 ZS=0 ZE=10
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

207
“Curve” type tools

The following are the commands available to create a “curve” type geometric element.
Activation of these tools depends on their compatibility with the previous operation.
To display the curve creation tool bar, click on .
Figure 128
A Curve given end point and centre; creates a curve using the co-ordinates of the centre of the
curve and the co-ordinates of a known end point as reference values.
B Curve given end point and tangency to previous item; creates a curve using the co-ordinates
of the end point of the curve and the tangency to the preceding element as reference values.
C Connector A; creates a connection radius between the selected element and the preceding
one (of type A).
D Connector B; creates a connection radius that can be used to machine door and window
frames (of type B).
E Curve given end point and radius; creates a curvve using the radius of the curve and the co-
ordinates of the end point of the curve as reference values.
F Curve given angle and centre; creates a curve using the co-ordinates of the centre of the
curve and the angle of the curve with respect to the positive direction of the X axis as
reference values.
G Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point determined); creates a
curve with a known start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve and the
tangency to the following element as reference values.
H Curve given centre and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined);
creates a curve with an unknown start point, using the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve
and the tangency of the curve to the following element as reference values.
I Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point determined); creates a
curve with a known start point, using the radius of the curve and the tangency of the curve to
the following element as reference values.
J Curve given radius and tangency to next element (with previous point not determined); creates
a curve with an unknown start point, using the radius of the curve and the tangency of the
curve to the following element as reference values.
K Curve given end point radius and tangency to previous item; creates a curve using the end
point of the curve, the radius of the curve and the tangency of the curve to the preceding
element as reference values.
L Curve given angle centre radius and tangency to previous item; creates a curve using the
radius and the co-ordinates of the centre of the curve, the tangency of the curve to the
preceding element, and the angle of the curve with respect to the positive direction of the X
axis as reference values.
208 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

M Curve using three points; creates a curve passing through three points.
N Incremental curve given angle and centre point; creates a curve using the centre of the curve,
which is obtained by incrementing the co-ordinates of the end point of the preceding element,
and the angle of the curve with respect to the positive direction of the X axis as reference
values.
O Incremental curve given radius and end point; creates a curve using the radius of the curve
and the end point, which is obtained by incrementing the co-ordinates of the end point for the
preceding element, as reference values.
The following is a list of the data fields that appear in the dialogue boxes during use of the “curve”
type instruments.
Alpha; angular length of the curve.
Direction; direction of the geometry; set dirCCW to indicate an anticlockwise direction, or set
dirCW to indicate a clockwise direction.
Centre X incr.; X axis value of the centre of the curve to be added to the X co-ordinate for the end
point of the preceding element.
End X incr.; X axis value of the end point of the curve to be added to the X co-ordinate for the end
Centre Y incr.; Y axis value of the centre of the curve to be added to the Y co-ordinate for the end
End Y incr.; Y axis value of the end point of the curve to be added to the Y co-ordinate for the end
Radius; curve radius value.
Solution; solutions that can be applied to the curve, on the basis of the data set previously.
Sharp corner; set sharp corner. Select one of the possible options to indicate that the point of
intersection between the curve and the next element must be machined leaving a sharp corner.
Work. Speed; tool speed of advance value.
Rot. Speed; tool rotation speed value.
X2; X axis co-ordinate of the second point in the curve.
Centre X; X axis co-ordinate of the centre of the curve.

End X; X axis co-ordinate of the end point of the curve.
Y2; Y axis co-ordinate of the second point in the curve.
Centre Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the centre of the curve.

End Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the end point of the curve.
Start Z; value of the increase in machining depth in the initial part of the element.
End Z; value of the increase in machining depth in the final part of the element.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

209
“Figure” type tools

Each button in the “figure” type geometric elements has a specific use.
To display the figure creation tool bar, click on .
Figure 129
A Ellipse; creates an ellipse.

B Oval; creates an oval.
C Circle given centre and radius; creates a circle using the centre and the radius as reference
values.
D Circle given three points; creates a circle passing through three points.
E Rectangle; creates a rectangle with or without chamfers/radiusing.
F Polygon; creates a polygon with or without chamfers/radiusing.
G Star; creates a star-shaped drawing with or without chamfers/radiusing.
Description of fields in the Ellipse dialogue box:

Centre X; X axis co-ordinate of the centre of the ellipse.
Centre Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the centre of the ellipse.
Axis 1; value for the larger semiaxis (ref. A1) of the ellipse.
X
A1
Y
Axis 2; value for the elipse's smaller semiaxis (ref. A2).

X
A2
Y
210 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

Alpha; value for the angle of rotation of the ellipse (ref. A) with respect to the centre of the ellipse
itself.
X
Y
A
Start alpha; value for the ellipse start angle, if an elliptical curve is to be created. For example, by
setting a value of 180 in this field and a value of 0 in the next one you will obtain the semi-curve
shown in the figure below.
X
End alpha; value for the ellipse end angle, if an elliptical curve is to be created. For example, by
setting a value of 180 in this field and a value of 0 in the previous one you will obtain the semi-
curve shown in the figure below.
X
Use; definition of the way in which the geometry is broken up into segments to allow proper
machining.
No. Items used; type of geometry segmentation. When this is set to ON, type the number of lines
or curves for segmentation of the geometry into the No. Items field. When it is set to OFF, type the
maximum length of the lines or the curves into the No. Items field.
No. Items; see previous field.
Description of fields in the Oval dialogue box:

X1; X axis co-ordinate for the centre of the large circle in the oval (see figure 130).
Y1; Y axis co-ordinate for the centre of the large circle in the oval (see figure 130).
Radius 1; radius of the large circle in the oval (see figure 130).
X2; X axis co-ordinate for the centre of the small circle in the oval (see figure 130).
Y2; Y axis co-ordinate for the centre of the small circle in the oval (see figure 130).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

211
Radius 2; radius of the small circle in the oval (see figure 130).
Start alpha; angle of the oval.

Conn. radius; radius of the two curves that unite the two circles in the oval (see figure 130).
Figure 130
X
X1, Y1
R1
X2, Y2
LRK
R2
Description of fields in the Circle given centre and radius dialogue box:
Centre X; X axis co-ordinate for the centre of the circle.
Centre Y; Y axis co-ordinate for the centre of the circle.
Radius; circle radius value.

Start alpha; angle of the circle start point.
Description of fields in the Circle given three points dialogue box:

X1; X axis co-ordinate for the first point in the circle (see figure 131).
Y1; Y axis co-ordinate for the first point in the circle (see figure 131).
X2; X axis co-ordinate for the second point in the circle (see figure 131).
Y2; Y axis co-ordinate for the second point in the circle (see figure 131).
212 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

X3; X axis co-ordinate for the third point in the circle (see figure 131).
Y3; Y axis co-ordinate for the third point in the circle (see figure 131).
Figure 131
X X1, Y1
Y
X3, Y3 X2, Y2
Start alpha; angle of the circle start point.

Description of fields in the Rectangle dialogue box:

Use; reference point to determine the co-ordinates of the start point of the rectangle. Select
whether the system should consider the corner of the rectangle as the reference point, option
Corner, or the centre of the rectangle, option Centre.
Corner; reference corner used in the calculation of the co-ordinates of the start point of the
rectangle. Must only be used in the case where option Corner has been defined in field Use.
Centre X; X axis co-ordinate for the centre of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case
where option Centre has been defined in field Use.
Centre Y; Y axis co-ordinate for the centre of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case
where option Centre has been defined in field Use.
Corner X; co-ordinate along the X-axis of the corner of the rectangle defined in field Corner used
for obtaining the start point of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case where option
Corner has been defined in field Use.
Corner Y; co-ordinate along the X-axis of the corner of the rectangle defined in field Corner used
for obtaining the start point of the rectangle. This field is displayed only in the case where option
Corner has been defined in field Use.
Length; dimensions of the rectangle along the X axis.

Height; dimensions of the rectangle along the Y axis.
Chamfer type; options for chamfering the angles of the rectangle. Select one of the following
options:
None; to carry out no chamfering.
Straight; to carry out straight chamfering.
Round; to carry out rounded chamfering.
Chamfer dist.; chamfer dimensions.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

213
Starting side; side of the rectangle from which to start when carrying out the machining operation
(see figure 132).
Figure 132
1
4 2
Starting dist.; value for the start point of the side of the rectangle set above from which to start the
machining operation. If the centre of the side is to be selected, type the word HALF.
Alpha; angle of rotation of the rectangle (ref. A figure 133) with respect to the centre of the
rectangle itself.
Figure 133
Sharp corner; set sharp corner for the rectangle. Select one of the possible options to indicate
that the rectangle must be machined leaving sharp corners.
Description of fields in the Polygon dialogue box:

Centre X; X axis co-ordinate for the centre of the polygon.
Centre Y; Y axis co-ordinate for the centre of the polygon.
Radius; value of the radius of the imaginary circle within which the polygon is formed.
No. sides; number of sides in the polygon.

Chamfer type; options for chamfering the angles of the polygon. Select one of the following
options:
Chamfer dist.; chamfer dimensions.
Starting side; side of the polygon from which to start when carrying out the machining operation.
214 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

Starting dist.; value for the start point of the side of the polygon set above from which to start the
Alpha; angle of rotation of the rectangle (ref. A figure 133) with respect to the centre of the
rectangle itself.
Sharp corner; set sharp corner for the polygon. Select one of the possible options to indicate that
the polygon must be machined leaving sharp corners.
Description of fields in the Star dialogue box:

Centre X; X axis co-ordinate for the centre of the star.
Centre Y; Y axis co-ordinate for the centre of the star.

Ext. radius; radius of the circle outside the star (ref. A figure 134).
Int. radius; radius of the circle inside the start (ref. B figure 134).
Figure 134
Y
A
B
No. points; number of points in the star.
Chamfer type; options for chamfering the angles of the star. Select one of the following options:
Chamfer dist.; length of the chamfer.
Starting side; side of the star from which to start when carrying out the machining operation.
Starting dist.; value for the start point of the side of the star set above from which to start the
Alpha; angle of rotation of the star (ref. A figure 135) with respect to the centre of the star itself.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

215
Figure 135

Sharp corner; set sharp corner for the star. Select one of the possible options to indicate that the
star must be machined leaving sharp corners.
Example
Figure 136: example of how to create a drawing using the Lines and Curves commands and taking corner “1”
of the piece as a reference point (ref. 1).
START_POINT X=120 Y=264.2061763 (ref. A)

LINE_EP XE=120 YE=410.208482 (ref. B)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=410.208482 (ref. C)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=360.208482 (ref. D)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=336.9771299 XC=607.9429514 YC=360.208482 DIR=dirCW (ref. E)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=191.4352226 XC=584 YC=264.2061763 DIR=dirCCW (ref. F)
ARC_EPCE XE=584 YE=168.2038705 XC=607.9429514 YC=168.2038705 DIR=dirCW (ref. G)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=118.2038705 (ref. H)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=118.2038705 (ref. I)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=264.2061763 (ref. J)
ENDPATH
216 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

13.4 Creating a text

With BiesseWorks it is possible to create a text shaped profile (see chapter 15) to which to
associate the milling operation.
To display the special dialogue box in which to define the text parameters, click on and then
on .
Figure 137: dialogue box Text
Fields list and description

SIDE; used to select the side of the piece where the text is to be etched.Select the side required
from the figure above, or type the side number in the field.
Geom. identif.; used to enter a code (name) to identify the geometry within the programming
rows. The ID is used to call up the geometry to be machined into the special milling windows.
Font name; used to select the type of character required. You are advised to use only the “True
Type” font.
Height; used to define the height of the word.
Extension; used to define the extension of the word in length.
Bold; used to set bold characters, to make the word more evident.
Italics; used to change the word to italics.
Underlined; used to underline the word.
Barred; used to mark the word with a bar.

Text; used to insert the text to be displayed in the Editor application software graphics area.
Position; used to indicate the position of the text applied to the circle if the option Text on circle in
field Geometry has been chosen.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

217
0 = the text is created using the external profile of the circle.

1 = the text is created using the internal profile of the circle.
X; used to insert the X axis co-ordinate of the start point of the word.
Y; used to insert the Y axis co-ordinate of the start point of the word
Accuracy; used to define the character precision index.
Angle; used to define the angle of rotation of the text on plane X, Y.

Direction; used to define the direction of the word based on the start point.
Alignment; used to define the alignment of the word, based on the start point.
Radius; used to define the radius of the circle, only to be used if option Text on circle has been
selected in field Geometry.
Geometry; used to define the type of path to be followed by the text; i.e. a straight path or a
circular path.
Text on line; distributes the text in a straight line.
Text on circle; distributes the text in a circle.
Used to select repeat operations along the X axis; set the following fields:
between the geometric elements (ref. DX figure 119).
Used to select repeat operations along the Y axis; set the following fields:
between the geometric elements (ref. DY figure 119).
; used to select repeats along the step X-Y. set the following fields:
; used to select repeats along the angled straight line. set the following fields:
Angle; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are carried out (ref. ARP figure 119).
L. step; distance between the geometric elements (ref. LRP figure 119).
; used to select repeats on the circumference. set the following fields:
Starting angle; value of the angle A from which to start when carrying out the repeats (see
examples shown in figure 122 and in figure 123). This is activated by removing the marker
from the data field First Item.
218 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

next one.
Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see examples
shown in figure 122 and in figure 123). This is activated by removing the marker from the data
field First Item.
XRC; X position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.
YRC; Y position of the centre of rotation for the circumference around which the repeat is
carried out.
Radial; enables radial repeats (see examples shown in figure 121 and in figure 123).
eliminating the field Starting angle and the field Radius (see examples illustrated in figure 120
and in figure 121). It is recommended that this field be enabled at all times.
13.5 Breaking up a GEO/ROUT

The command Divide machining operation in the quick menu is used to separate the profiles
included within a single geometry, GEO or ROUT, creating a GEO or a ROUT for each one of
them.
The drawing shown in figure 138 illustrates two geometries included in the GEO "P1009"
(example 1). In this case it is possible to carry out a break-up of the GEO itself, which is
automatically divided into two: GEO “P1037” for profile A and GEO "P1038" for profile B (example
2).
Figure 138
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

219
Example 1: profiles illustrated in figure 138, included in the GEO "P1009".
START_POINT X=275.261954 Y=251.0540422

LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=90.1433395
ARC_EPCE XE=216.3439676 YE=72.2897433 XC=270.3291371 YC=0.2786228 DIR=dirCCW
ARC_EPCE XE=125.7202393 YE=69.9980421 XC=169.4203013 YC=134.8814852 DIR=dirCW
LINE_EP XE=67.8693544 YE=411.0540422
LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=251.0540422
LINE_EP XE=700 YE=500
ENDPATH
Example 2: profiles illustrated in figure 138, divided into two GEO: “P1037”; “P1038”
START_POINT X=275.261954 Y=251.0540422

LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=90.1433395
LINE_EP XE=67.8693544 YE=411.0540422
LINE_EP XE=275.261954 YE=251.0540422
ENDPATH

ENDPATH
To break up the geometry, select the program row or item in the tree list area, display the quick
menu, select the option Operations. > Divide machining operation.
220 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

Figure 139
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

221
222 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0002.fm140605

14 Creation of the profiles with

SmartSketch
The integrated CAD SmartSketch can be used to create two-dimensional geometric profiles,
interacting directly with the Editor application.
If you wish to use the SmartSketch software as graphic interface, excluding the Editor graphics
area, display the Setup window and click on the Editor Environment card. Enable the option button
2D CAD . In this case the CAD will be launched automatically together with the BiesseWorks
Editor application.
If you wish to use both the SmartSketch software and the Editor graphics area as graphic
interface, display the Setup window and click on the Editor Environment card. Enable the option
button CAM . In this case the CAD must be launched using the button.
14.1 Creating drawings

Please consult the manual supplied with the CAD SmartSketch on how to create drawings.
14.2 Menu CAM

Paste; inserts the drawing identified as a machining operation, cut or copied as above, in the CAD
and the Editor application.
Eliminate starting point; eliminates the start point from the drawing.
Set starting point; affixes the point at which to start the machining operation on the drawing
created using the CAD.
Find path; looks for the path to which the drawing element selected is connected.
Check closed path; used to check whether the geometry selected is a closed or open geometry.
Cam Options... the dialogue box Cam Options... is displayed.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0003.fm140605

223
14.3 Tool bars

When the CAD SmartSketch is used, two tool bars are displayed, allowing interaction with the
Editor application.
Technology bar
Button Description
Transforms the drawing created using the CAD into a boring operation.
Transforms the drawing created using the CAD into a cutting operation.
Transforms the drawing created using the CAD into a milling operation.
Transforms the drawing created using CAD into an insertion operation, for
example a machining operation to fix the hinge mounting plates, hinges, etc.
Transforms the drawing created using the CAD into a geometry.
Transforms the drawing created using the CAD into a side of the piece with a
flat surface.
Transforms the drawing created using the CAD into a side of the piece with a
curved surface.
Defines an element created using the CAD as a side of the piece.
Updates the drawing according to the new settings.
Saves the modifications made to the drawing.
Cancels the modifications made to the drawing.
CAM bar
Button Description
Affixes the point at which to start the machining operation on the drawing
created using the CAD.
Finds the path to which the drawing element selected is connected.
224 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0003.fm140605

14.4 Using the quick menu

After creating the drawing and attributing it with a special machining operation or function with the
relevant BiesseWorks tools (Bar Technology), it is possible to make modifications through the use
of a special quick menu that makes interaction with the SmartSketch CAD and Editor application
software possible.
To display it, select the drawing and press the right-hand mouse key.
Figure 140
Cut machining operation; deletes the drawing created and identified as a machining operation
from the CAD and the Editor application.
Copy machining operation; copies the drawing selected and identified as a machining operation to
the CAD and the Editor application.
Paste machining operation; inserts the drawing identified as a machining operation, cut or copied
as above, in the CAD and the Editor application.
Properties; displays the dialogue box with the properties of the selected drawing. For example, if
the drawing has been identified as a geometric element, the Define geometry window will be
displayed.
Modify geometry; modifies the drawing created. If the modified drawing is to be updated in the
Editor application graphics area, click on .
Eliminate machining operation; deletes the drawing created and identified as a machining
operation from the CAD and the Editor application.
Remove technology; eliminates the drawing created and identified as a machining operation from
the Editor application , leaving it in the CAD as a geometric figure only.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0003.fm140605

225
14.5 Procedure allowing the CAD to interact with the

Editor application
After creating the drawing using the CAD, before transporting it to the Editor application, proceed
as follows:
1. select a segment of the drawing and click on to define the point at which the tool has to
start machining of the profile. Define:
the direction of the point (ref. A);
the point from which it must start: from the centre of the segment, from P1 or from P2 (ref. B).
If P1 or P2 is enabled, set the distance from these points in field C.
Click on OK to confirm.
2. highlight the drawing by creating a selection area, or using .
3. group together the drawing using the CAD command provided.
4. associate the technology with the drawing using the buttons described in paragraph 14.3.
14.6 Using the bar Technology

The Technology tool bar is used to create an interaction between the two applications, transporting
the drawings created to the Editor application. It is used to give a specific definition to the
geometric figure drawn, indicating that it is a geometry, a boring operation, a milling operation, a
flat surface, a curved surface or a piece.
How to create a boring operation

To create a boring operation, create circles with the CAD, select them and click on . Define the
data required within the dialogue box provided (for a description please consult paragraph 15.2,
page 250).
How to create a cutting operation

To create a circular blade cutting operation, create the drawings using the CAD and perform the
settings described in paragraph 14.5. Select the grouped drawing and click on . Define the
data required within the dialogue box provided (for a description please consult paragraph 15.3,
page 257).
226 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0003.fm140605

How to create a milling operation

To create a milling operation, create the drawing using the CAD and carry out the settings
described in paragraph 14.5. Select the grouped drawing and click on . Define the data
required within the dialogue box provided (for a description please consult paragraph 15.8, page
271).
How to create an insertion

To create an insertion operation, create the drawing using the CAD and enter the settings
described in paragraph 14.5. Select the grouped drawing and click on . Define the data
required in the dialogue box provided (for a description please consult chapter15).
How to create a geometric figure

To create a geometric figure without any information on the machining data, create the drawing
using the CAD and carry out the procedures described in paragraph 14.5. Select the grouped
drawing and click on . Define the data required within the dialogue box provided.
Geom. identif.; used to enter a code (name) identifying the geometry within the programming
rows.
Depth; used to define the distance DP between the top side of the piece (ref. A, figure 141) and
the top side of the island (ref. B, figure 141), if the geometry is used as an island).
Figure 141
How to create a flat surface

To create a side of the piece with a flat surface, draw a line using the CAD, select it and click on
.
How to create a curved surface

To create a side of the piece with a curved surface, draw a curved segment using the CAD, select
it and click on .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0003.fm140605

227
How to create the piece dimensions

To create a piece to be transported to the Editor application, draw segments using the CAD, select
one segment at a time and click on . Select one of the following three available dimensions:
LPX, LPY, LPZ.
228 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0003.fm140605

15 Programming machining
operations
The data provided in the following chapter are expressed in millimetres. If the unit of
measurement is set to inches in the Setup, the data in BiesseWorks applications will be
expressed in inches.
15.1 Milling programming

The following paragraph describes the procedures for programming milling operations through the
use of geometric elements.
Milling of a geometric profile can be programmed using the following commands:

“ROUT” command; this makes it possible to carry out a milling operation with an “integrated”
geometric profile.The term “integrated” geometric profile means a profile created using the
command ROUT, and therefore connected to the machining operation, which includes
geometric and technological data. See paragraph “Milling with “integrated” geometric profile
(ROUT)”, page 229.
“ROUTG” command; used to carry out the milling of a geometry, calling up a "general"
geometric profile created using the command GEO to which the technological data is
associated (see page 231), or to engrave a text in the piece, calling up the text created using
the command GEOTEXT (see page 249).
“POCK” command; used to carry out pocketing (see page 245).
Milling with “integrated” geometric profile (ROUT)

To program a milling operation using an “integrated” geometric profile, click on , position the
cursor inside the commands area in an empty row and click on .
The tool bar is activated to create a profile in the EGA way and the dialogue box is displayed.
Milling. The string “ROUT” appears in the command area.
For a description of the fields in the window, see paragraph “List and description of the fields
present in the milling windows” on page 232.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

229
Figure 142: dialogue box Milling
Example: milling with an “integrated” geometric profile

Figure 143: example of how to create a milling operation taking corner 1 of face zero of the piece as reference
point (ref. 1).
ROUT SIDE=0 CRN="1" Z=0 DP=10 DIA=18 ER=NO

LINE_EP XE=120 YE=410.208482 (ref. B)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=410.208482 (ref. C)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=360.208482 (ref. D)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=336.9771299 XC=607.9429514 YC=360.208482 DIR=dirCW (ref.
E)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=118.2038705 (ref. H)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=118.2038705 (ref. I)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=264.2061763 (ref. J)
ENDPATH
230 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Milling with “generic” geometric profile (ROUTG)

To program a milling operation calling up a “generic” geometric profile, click on , position the
cursor inside the commands area in an empty row and click on . Displays the dialogue box
Milling from geometry to define the parameters relating to the machining of the profile created
using the command GEO. The string “ROUTG” appears in the command area.
Figure 144: dialogue box Milling from geometry
The fields in the window are the same as those described in paragraph “List and description of the
fields present in the milling windows” on page 232, with the exception of data field Geom. identif.
which represents the identification code of the drawing to which the machining is to be associated.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

231
Example: milling with a "general” geometric profile

Figure 145: example of how to create a “generic” milling operation taking corner 1 of face zero of the piece as
reference point (ref. 1).

LINE_EP XE=120 YE=410.208482 (ref. B)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=410.208482 (ref. C)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=360.208482 (ref. D)
ARC_EPCE XE=602.1490579 YE=336.9771299 XC=607.9429514 YC=360.208482 DIR=dirCW (ref.
E)
LINE_EP XE=584 YE=118.2038705 (ref. H)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=118.2038705 (ref. I)
LINE_EP XE=120 YE=264.2061763 (ref. J)
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID="P1000" Z=0 DP=10 DIA=18
List and description of the fields present in the milling windows
Seeing that the appearance of some data fields in the first card of the milling windows can
be customised by the customer (see the Editor windows card of the Setup), the list shown
below has been ordered in line with default settings.
CRN; piece reference corner. Select the corner required on the figure above.
SIDE; side of the piece. Write the side number in the data field, or select it on the figure above.
Geom. identif.; identification code of the milling or the drawing to be called up. In the dialogue box
Milling it permits an alphanumeric code to be inserted between the two superscripts or a parameter
for naming the machining operation; in the case in which it is omitted, the system will insert one
automatically.
In the dialogue box Milling from geometry, this allows an ID of the geometry to be called, i.e. the
identification code of the drawing created with the GEO command with which the machining
operation is to be associated, to be chosen.
Description; description of the type of machining for each individual milling operation. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the milling icon.
Diameter; diameter of the mill carrying out the milling operation. To enter the diameter value, lock
the adjacent padlock by clicking on the marker box.
232 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Depth; depth of the machining operation or of the perforation offset for through machining
operations. If a through machining operation is to be made, click on the adjacent marker box.
The default value for the through milling operation must be set in the Piercing Z field in the Setup
Machining operations card.
Tool Type; predefined list of the types of mill present in the database. Select an item from the list,
if a value has been entered in the field Diameter. The CAM will find a tool with the diameter
indicated from among all those of the type selected.
Tool Code; predefined list of the mills present in the database. Only make a direct selection of the
tool with which to carry out the machining operation if no value has been entered in the Diameter
field.
Reverse; compels the tool to reverse its direction of advance. When milling the blade does not
begin at the profile start point, but at the end point.
Correction; position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory. Select one of the following
items:
• Centre Corr., positions the tool axis at the centre of the trajectory (ref. A figure 146);
• Right Corr., positions the tool axis to the right of the trajectory (ref. B figure 146) or positions
the trajectory to the right of the tool (ref. C figure 146); this type of correction must be set on
the Setup Machining operations card;
• Left Corr., positions the tool axis to the left of the trajectory (ref. C figure 146) or positions
the trajectory to the left of the tool (ref. B figure 146); this type of correction must be set on
the Setup Machining operations card.
Figure 146
Length [mm|%]; portion of the entire profile that is to be worked starting from an initial point of the
geometry. The unit or measurement applied to the value inserted in this field must be defined in
the Length as % field.
Length as %; this makes it possible to define whether the value indicated in field Length [mm|%]
is a value in millimetres/inches or whether it is a percentage. YES = the value is a percentage; NO
= the value is in mm/inches.
Lead-in Type ->; movement carried out by the tool in order to enter the piece to machine (see
paragraph 15.14 “Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out data items”, page 276). Select
the type of lead-in required.
None; the tool descends perpendicularly and reaches the machining operation start point
directly (ref. A, figure 147).
3D profile; the tool descends travelling along an inclined line and enters the piece directly
reaching the machining operation start point (ref. B, figure 147). The use of this type of
entrance is only allowed with closed profiles.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

233
Figure 147
A B
3DLineCurve; the tool descends travelling along an inclined line and enters the piece reaching
the machining operation start point (ref. C, figure 148) performing a short arc along which it
corrects its position.
Tg LineCurve; the tool descends travelling along a line perpendicular to the face and enters
the piece reaching the machining start point directly (ref. D, figure 148) forming a line and a
tangential arc along which it corrects its position.
Figure 148
C D
Corrected 3DLine; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it carries
out the correction, it descends and moves along an inclined line and enters the piece directly
reaching the machining operation start point (ref. A, figure 149).
Corrected Line; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it carries out
the correction, it descends and moves along a line perpendicular to the plane and enters the
piece directly reaching the machining operation start point (ref. B, figure 149).
Figure 149
A B
Line; the tool descends travelling along a line perpendicular to the face and enters the piece
directly reaching the machining start point (ref. C, figure 150) performing a short linear course
234 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

along which it corrects its position. When the marker box Correction in air is enabled, the tool
corrects its position before descending, thereby generating a short linear course parallel to the
face (ref. D, figure 150).
Helix; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it carries out the
correction, it descends and moves along a spiral course and enters the piece directly reaching
the machining operation start point (ref. E, figure 150).
Figure 150
C D E
Corrected 3DCurve; the tool generates a line in the air parallel to the face along which it
carries out the correction, it descends and moves along an arc shaped course and enters the
piece directly reaching the machining operation start point (ref. A, figure 151).
Curve; the tool descends travelling along a line perpendicular to the face and enters the piece
directly reaching the machining start point (ref. B, figure 151) performing a short arc shaped
course along which it corrects its position. When the marker box is enabled Correction in air,
the tool corrects its position before descending, thereby generating a short linear course
parallel to the face (ref. C, figure 151).
Figure 151
A B C
Lead-in Angle; lead-in angle of the tool (see paragraph 15.14 “Notes on the use of the tool lead-in
and lead-out data items”, page 276). The type of angle to be entered will vary according to the type
of lead-in selected (figure 152).
Figure 152: lead-in angle (ang) for the Line type of lead-in (ref. A) and for the Curve type of lead-in (ref. B).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

235
For lead-in Corrected 3DLine, the angle between the line at an oblique angle to the work table and
the work table itself must be taken into consideration.
For lead-in Corrected 3DCurve, the angle of aperture of the curve on the three-dimensional plane
must be taken into consideration.
For lead-in 3DLineCurve, the angle of aperture of the arc must be taken into consideration.
For lead-in Helix, the angular width of the helix must be taken into consideration.
Correction in air; see lead-in type Line or type Curve.

Offset; distance in millimeters from the lead-in point of the machining operation to move the tool
sideways in such a way that it makes a slightly inclined descent. This information can only be
used with lead-ins of the Corrected 3DLine type or the Corrected 3DCurve type.
Insert tabbing; this makes it possible to generate a linear translation of the tool inside the lead-in
trajectory of the tool into the piece, in order to create a short step, that can be calculated on the
depth A of the programmed machining operation (figure 153). This information can only be used
with lead-ins of the Corrected 3DLine type or the Corrected 3DCurve. type.
• Tabbing length; linear length C (figure 153) of the segment for translating the tool.
• Tabbing position; position B (mm) to establish the initial translation point that can be
calculated by starting from the Z co-ordinate of the initial point of the milling P (figure 153).
Figure 153: A = depth of the machining operation; B = lead-in tabbing position; C = linear length of the
translation; D = linear length of the translation; E = lead-out tabbing position; P = initial milling point; P1 = final
milling point.
Lead-out Type ->; movement carried out by the tool in order to exit the machined piece (see
paragraph 15.14 “Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out data items”, page 276). Choose
the type of lead-out required.
None; the tool leaves the piece directly at the end of machining point rising perpendicularly to
the face (ref. A, figure 154).
3D profile; the tool leaves the piece directly at the end of machining point and rises following
an inclined line (ref. B, figure 154). The use of this type of lead-out is only permitted on closed
profiles.
236 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Figure 154
A B
3DLineCurve; the tool leaves forming a short arc-like course along which it corrects its position
and rises following an inclined line (ref. C, figure 155).
Tg LineCurve; the tool leaves the piece forming a line and a tangential arc along which it
corrects its position, and rises travelling along a line perpendicular to the face (ref. D, figure
155).
Figure 155
C C
Corrected 3DLine; the tool leaves the piece in an inclined rise and follows a line parallel to the
face, along which it corrects its position (ref. A, figure 156).
Corrected Line; the tool leaves the piece in a rise perpendicular to the face and follows a line
parallel to the face, along which it corrects its position (ref. B, figure 156).
Figure 156
A B
Line; the tool leaves the piece along a short linear course along which it corrects its position
and a rise perpendicular to the face (ref. A, figure 157). When the marker box Correction in air
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

237
is enabled, the tool corrects its position at the end of the re-rise, generating that is a short
linear course parallel to the face.
Helix; the tool leaves the piece along a spiral course (ref. D, figure 157) and a line parallel to
the face.
Figure 157
C D
Corrected 3DCurve; the tool leaves the piece in an arc-like rise and follows a line parallel to
the face, along which it corrects its position (ref. A, figure 158).
Curve; the tool leaves the piece along a short arc-like course along which it corrects its
position and a rise perpendicular to the face (ref. B, figure 158). When the marker
boxCorrection in air is enabled, the tool corrects its position at the end of the re-rise,
generating a short linear course parallel to the face.
Figure 158
A B
Lead-out Angle; lead-out angle of the tool from the piece. The type of angle to be entered varies
according to the type of lead-out selected.
Correction in air; see lead-in type Line or type Curve.
Offset; distance in millimeters from the lead-out point of the machining operation to move the tool
sideways in such a way that it makes a slightly inclined rise. This information can only be used with
lead-ins of the Corrected 3DLine type or the Corrected 3DCurve. type.
Insert tabbing; this makes it possible to generate a linear translation of the tool inside the lead-out
trajectory of the tool from the piece, in order to create a short step, that can be calculated on the
depth A of the programmed machining operation (figure 153). This information can only be used
with lead-outs of the Corrected 3DLine type or the Corrected 3DCurve. type.
• Tabbing length; linear length D (figure 153) of the segment for translating the tool.
• Tabbing position; position E (mm) to establish the initial translation point that can be
calculated by starting from the Z co-ordinate of the final point of the milling P1 (figure 153).
238 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Ini. Extens. mm; transfer of the machining operation point of origin forwards or back along the
same trajectory.
Decel. Dist. mm; distance between the tool slowdown point and the point at which the geometry
ends. Slowdown takes place both when the tool approaches the end of the geometry, and when it
moves away from that point. If the value entered in this field is less than the value entered in field
Min dec. length of the Setup, the system will use the data item entered in the Setup field.
Fin. Extens. mm; distance between the lead-in and lead-out points of the tool from the piece, to
lengthen machine operation time.
Percent Radius; percentage value to modify the lead-in and lead-out radius.
Groove; translation position of the plane to be worked compared with the main plane of the piece
(figure 159).
When the adjacent TOS box is marked, during the calculation to establish the safety position, the
value set in field Z is ignored, i.e., it is created starting from the surface of the piece.When the box
is left disabled, the position defined in field Z is considered as a starting point to position the tool at
the safety position.
For example (figure 159), if in field Safety of the tool used, the value 10 mm has been set (Tool
parameters dialogue box ), considering the position Z of 5 mm, by enabling field TOS (ref. B, figure
159), the tool is positioned 10 mm from the surface of the piece, leaving field TOS (ref. A, figure
159) disabled, the tool is positioned 10 mm from position Z, i.e. 5 mm from the surface of the
piece.
Figure 159
Rot.Speed [rpm]; tool rotation speed. When the field is left empty, the system uses the speed
defined in the field Std RotSpd in dialogue box Tool parameters of the tool used for the machining
operation.
LowerSpeed [mm/min]; speed with which the tool moves from the surface of the piece to the
position where the machining operation begins D (figure 160). When the field is left empty, the
system uses the speed defined in the field Std LowSpd in dialogue boxTool parameters of the tool
used for the machining.
A/Ex Speed [mm/min]; speed used by the tool to move from the safety position A and move into
contact with the surface of the piece B, or to leave from the piece at the end of the programmed
machining operation and return to the safety position C (figure 160). This data is also used in the
stretches for the positioning of the tool. When the field is left empty, the system uses the speed
defined in the parameters of the tool used for the machining: field Std LowSpd in dialogue box Tool
parameters..
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

239
Figure 160
A C
B D
Work.Speed [mm/min]; milling tool speed of advance. The value to define for this field is linked to
the activation, or otherwise, of field Enable percentage speed in card Milling data of Setup (see
chapter 4, page 69). When the field is left empty, the system uses the speed defined in the
parameters of the tool used for the machining: field Std WorkSpd in dialogue box Tool parameters.
(AZ); tool angle of inclination; that is to say the angle of inclination of the spindle axis of rotation
with respect to the plane X, Y (see figure 161).
Figure 161
To tilt the tool it is possible to select one of two options:

(AZ) -incr: the angle is calculated taking the axes X/Y of the side required, for example side 1,
as reference axes.
(AZ) -abs : the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as reference axes (see
figure 162).
Figure 162: A = (AZ) -incr; B = (AZ) -abs .
240 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

(AR); tool angle of rotation; that is to say the angle of rotation of the spindle axis on plane X, Y (see
figure 163).
Figure 163
To rotate the tool it is possible to select one of two options:

(AR) -incr: the angle is calculated taking the axes X/Y of the side required, for example side 1,
as reference axes.
(AR) -abs : the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as reference axes (see
figure 164).
Figure 164: A = (AR) -incr; B = (AR) -abs .
ISO instruction; ISO instruction. Data field used to enter an ISO instruction.
OPT; milling optimisation. Mark the box to enable optimisation of the machining operation. If the
box is not marked the milling program row will be carried out in the order set down in the Editor
application software commands area. If the box is enabled the optimiser carries out a process
modifying the performance sequence in the milling programming row.
Starting Z; depth reached by the tool at the initial machining operation point. The value
indicated in this field is added to that indicated in the field Depth.
Figure 165
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

241
End Z; depth reached by the tool at the final machining operation point. The value indicated in
this field is added to that indicated in the field Depth.
Figure 166
Vertical runs; number of passages that influence the depth of the programmed machining
operation (ref. A, figure 167). For example, if the number 2 is entered, the machining is split into 2
parts until the depth indicated in field Depth has been reached (see paragraph 15.12, page 274).
Final run; depth that the tool must reach during the last pass in the case of more than one pass
(ref. B, figure 167).
For example, if the total depth of the machining is 30mm, by inserting the value 10mm in this field
and in the Vertical runs field value 2, the tool divides the machining into two parts:
- it descends into the piece and reaches a depth of 20mm (figure 167);
- it descends as far as 20mm and removes another 10mm (figure 167).
Figure 167: A = programmed depth; B = depth of last pass; 1 = first pass; 2 = second pass.
A 20
1 30
2
B 10
Horizontal runs; number of passes (ref. A, figure 168) to be performed horizontally or vertically on
the surface of the programmed face (see paragraph15.12, page 274).
Horizontal step; step between passes indicated in the data field Horizontal runs, that is to say the
distance between one pass and the next (ref. C, figure 168), starting from the programmed
geometry's position (ref. A, figure 168).
Figure 168: A = programmed geometry; B = number of vertical passes on face 0; C = distance between one
pass and the next.
Enable finishing; enables you to choose (YES option) whether to generate the finishing
242 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Finishing step; depth of the finishing operation if this type of machining operation has been
enabled (Enable finishing field).
Two-direction; authorises the tool to work in alternate directions when carrying out successive
runs. The tool changes direction each time it carries out a new run. Enable the function by clicking
on the box (see paragraph 15.12, page 274).
Repeats along the X axis; set the following fields:
between the profiles (ref. DX, figure 169).
Repeats along the Y axis. set the following fields:
between the profiles (ref. DY, figure 169).
Repeats along the step X-Y; set the following fields:
between the profiles.
between the profiles.
Repeats along the angled straight line; set the following fields:
Angle; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are to be carried out (ref. ARP, figure
169).
L. step; distance between the profiles (ref. LRP, figure 169).
Figure 169
Repeats along the circumference; set the following fields:
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

243
Starting angle; value of the angle A from which to start to carry out the repeats (see chapter
13, figure 122 and figure 123). This is activated by removing the marker from the data field
First Item.
next one.
Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see chapter 13,
figure 122 and figure 123). This is activated by removing the marker from the data field First
Item.
XRC; X position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
YRC; Y position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
Radial; enables radial repeats (see chapter 13, figure 121 and figure 123).
eliminating the field Starting angle and the field Radius (see chapter 13, figure 120 and figure
121). It is recommended that this field be enabled at all times.
Spindle; this is used to indicate the electrospindle with which to carry out the machining operation.
This field can be useful when you need to carry out a machining operation with an aggregate/tool
that is only supported by a specific electrospindle. You should check that the electrospindle
chosen is present on the machine or that it is compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is
housed in, of it is not the optimisation will not be successful. The empty data field authorises the
CAM to choose the electrospindle.
Over-material; value for the amount of excess material to be left during machining of the profile.
The value indicated in this field is linked to the type of correction (Correction field):
With left or right correction, when a negative value is set the tool removes more material and
when a positive value is set the tool will remove less material.
With a central correction, when a negative value is set the machining operation is moved
sideways to the right of the programmed trajectory and when a positive value is set the
machining is moved to the left of the programmed trajectory.
Enable TCP; enables the C axis to carry out interpolated milling operations with the tool at right
angles to the profile to be machined.
Sharp corners; enables sharp corners. When activated it can be used to make all the sharp
corners defined in the geometries during the machining operation.
Floating; enables or disables the device used to compensate the downward pressure of the
electrospindle to make its movement more fluid, so as to be able to use the copier or other similar
devices. If you wish to define this datum as the active default form, enable the relevant box in the
Setup Milling data card.
Blower; enables or disables the use of the blower.
Presser; enables or disables the use of the presser.
Hood position; hood position during machining operation. This data can only be utilised on
machines with the special device for correcting the hood position. Enter a value from 1 to 6. The
value 0 enables automatic positioning of the hoods, which is managed according to the machining
data set.
244 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

If the value entered is not compatible with the settings defined in the machining operation, the
hoods will in any case be positioned at a limit height automatically worked out on the basis of the
defined data.
Swing; enables the oscillation of the tool during the machining; it can be used to machine certain
types of materials, laminates for example (this data item disables the use of G47 and G46 on the
machine). The activation of this function is linked to the setting in field Start Z and in field End Z of
the geometry windows (see paragraph 13.3, page 204).
Corner speed; speed at which the sharp corner must be executed. When the field is left empty,
the system uses the speed defined in the Std WorkSpd field in the dialogue box Tool parameters
of the milling tool used for the machining operation.
Aggr21 angle; enables the use of aggregate 21 and allows the direction angle for the lean-in of
the aggregate under the piece to be entered. This field is only displayed if the use of aggregate 21
is provided for (see paragraph 15.10, page 273).
Card Advanced technological data page description

This card only appears if the field Chip deflector on the Setup card Milling data has been enabled.
For a description, please see paragraph 15.7 on page 269.
To save the settings and close the machining window, click on button . To close the windows
without saving, click on .
Geometric profile pocketing

The term pocketing refers to internal machining of the geometric profile, that is to say the removal
of a certain amount of material inside or outside the profile so as to create a hole or indentation.
Figure 170
To carry out a pocketing operation, create a geometric profile. Pocketing must only be carried out
on geometric profiles created or imported as “generic” geometric profiles (GEO) and not as
“integrated” geometric profiles that include technological data (ROUT); for further clarification on
how to create geometric profiles, consult the paragraph “Drawing procedures”, page 199 or the
paragraph “Creating drawings”, page 223.
After having created the drawing, to carry out a pocketing operation, position the text cursor on the
row beneath the drawing to be pocketed, and click on the command .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

245
To carry out the pocketing operation the string containing the command POCK must always be
positioned under the geometries to be pocketed, see example provided in figure .
Because the appearance of some data fields in the first card of the dialogue box can be
customised by the customer (see card Editor windows in the Setup), the list below is
ordered in accordance with the default settings.
Figure 171: dialogue box Pocketing
Description; description of the type of machining for each individual pocketing operation. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the pocketing icon.
Buttons defining the types of machining operation ; select the type of machining operation by
clicking on one of the following buttons:
Pocketing by machining in parallel lines.
Pocketing by continuous machining in parallel lines.
Pocketing using concentric profiles that go from the outside of the profile inwards.
Pocketing using concentric profiles that go from the inside of the profile outwards.
Profile finishing.
Geom. identif.; list of the geometries created. Select the code that identifies the geometry to be
pocketed.
Compensation; activates the fields present at the bottom of the window. Click on the marker box.
Activ. islands; displays the field Islands list containing a list of the geometries created.
Diameter; tool diameter. Insert the tool diameter value or, if you wish to select a mill directly,
remove the adjacent lock, clicking on its marker box, and select a code in the data field Tool Code.
Depth; total depth of the machining operation.
246 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Tool Type; predefined list of the types of mill present in the database. Select an item from the list,
if a value has been entered in the field Diameter. The CAM will find a tool with the diameter
indicated from among all those of the type selected.
Tool Code; predefined list of the mills present in the database. Select the tool with which to carry
out the machining operation directly, only if the lock adjacent to the Diameter field has been
removed.
Islands list; list of the geometries created. Select the code for the drawing to be converted into an
island.
Step; depth of each run. Write the value of the depth of each run in millimetres. For example, if a
pocketing operation has been set to be carried out in three runs, with a total depth of 30 millimetres
and a step of 10 millimetres, this means that, to machine to a depth of 30 millimetres, the
electrospindle will carry out three runs at a depth of 10 millimetres.
Overlap; overlap value for repeated milling operations.

Angle; pocketing inclination. If pocketing is to be carried out with an inclination in the tool path
around the profile, set the value of the angle.
Rev. Finish.; obliges the tool to reverse infeed direction during the finish machining operation.
Reverse; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and description of
the fields present in the milling windows” on page 232.
Lead-in Type ->; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
description of the fields present in the milling windows” on page 232.
Lead-in Angle; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Correction in air; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Lead-out Type ->; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Lead-out Angle; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Correction in air; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Ini. Extens. mm; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Decel. Dist. mm; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Fin. Extens. mm; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Percent Radius; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Rot.Speed [rpm]; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

247
LowerSpeed [mm/min]; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
A/Ex Speed [mm/min]; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Work.Speed [mm/min]; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
ISO instruction; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and description of the fields
present in the milling windows” on page 232.
Spindle; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and description of
the fields present in the milling windows” on page 232.
Over-material; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Hood position; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Aggr21 angle; for the description see the field by the same name in paragraph “List and
Example of pocketing with island inside the pocketed profile.

POCK GID="P1002" ISL="P1048" DIA=10 DP=10 TYP=ptZZ A=0 TC=NO CKI=YES ZST=10
248 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Milling applied to the profile in the form of text

To obtain an incision on a piece in the shape of text (see figure172), create the text with the
GEOTEXT command (see paragraph 13.4, page 217), click on button , position the cursor
inside the command area on an empty row and click button (ROUTG command).
Figure 172
Input in field Geom. identif. the identification code of the text to which the machining operation is
associated and complete the technological data fields (for the description of the data fields consult
paragraph “List and description of the fields present in the milling windows” on page 232).
As for the setting of the tool correction, the option defined in data field Correction is applied by the
system only to the outer letter edge, in the inside parts of the letters the correction opposite the
one chosen is automatically applied. For example, let's say you want to cut the letter R by using
the right correction, in such a case, this correction (ref. A, figure 173) is applied to the outside
perimeter of the letter while in the inside part is applied the left-hand correction (ref. B, figure 173).
Figure 173
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

249
Emptying applied to the profile in the shape of text

To create a text in relief A or sunken B (see figure 174), do the following:
Create the text using the GEOTEXT command (see paragraph 13.4, page 217). The text in
relief also needs the creation of the geometry of the piece to be pocketed (GEO command).
Click on the button, position the cursor inside the command area in an empty row and
click on the button (POCK command).
Figure 174
A B
Insert the identification code of the text in field Geom. identif..

To generate the text in relief, input the identification code of the geometry of the piece to empty
in field Geom. identif., enable box Activ. islands and choose the identification code of the text
in field Islands list (for the description of the data fields consult paragraph “Geometric profile
pocketing” on page 245).
15.2 Programming boring operations

When programming boring operations, there are a number of different commands that can be
used as and when required .
The following paragraph shows a list of the machining operations that can be programmed and the
description of all the fields present in the boring dialogue boxes.
To carry out boring operations on any side of the piece using the vertical spindle or the
horizontal spindle, click on and on .
250 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Figure 175: dialogue box Generic bore
To create a boring operation to be carried out using the vertical spindle on side five or side
zero of the piece, click on and on .

To create a boring operation to be carried out using the horizontal spindle on side one, two,
three or four of the piece, click on and on .

To carry out a repeated boring operation in which the parameters are set on side zero and side
five of the piece, to be machined using the vertical spindle, click on and on .
Figure 176: dialogue box System bore
To carry out a repeated boring operation with the C axis on a non standard side of the piece
with a flat surface, click on and on .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

251
Figure 177: dialogue box Bore with C axis on straight side
To carry out a repeated boring operation with the C axis on a non standard side of the piece
with a curved surface, click on and on .
Figure 178: dialogue box Bore with C axis on circular side
To carry out a boring operation by assigning technological data to circular figures that have
been created as geometries, that is to say by calling up a geometric profile created using the
command GEO, click on and on .
252 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Figure 179: dialogue box Bore from geometry
List and description of the fields present in the boring windows
Seeing that the appearance of some data fields in the first card of the boring windows can
Geom. identif.; identification code of the drawing to which the machining is to be associated. Only
visible in dialogue box Bore from geometry.
Description; description of the type of machining operation for each individual bore. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the boring icon.
Enable data settings taking the side created to be a two-dimensional plane X, Y.

Enter the X axis co-ordinate of the centre of the bore in field X.
Enable data settings taking the side created to be a three-dimensional plane X, Y, Z.

In field Starting angle,enter the value for angular aperture (ref. A , figure 180) between the bore
and the starting angle of the curved surface side.
Figure 180
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

253
Types of repeat bores. Select the type of repeat by clicking on one of the following buttons.
For a detained description of the functions of these four types of boring operation, consult
the paragraph “Boring operations” page 77.
X; X axis co-ordinate for the centre of the bore.
Y; Y axis co-ordinate for the centre of the bore.

For horizontal bores it is possible to select whether to bore to midway through the thickness of the
piece, or to insert the value of co-ordinate Y. In the former case, leave the adjacent marker box
enabled; in the latter case, disable the marker box and enter the position required in the data field.
Diameter; tool diameter. Insert the tool diameter value or, if you wish to select a tool directly,
remove the adjacent lock, clicking on its marker box, and select a code in the data field Tool Code.
Depth; depth of the bore or the perforation offset value for through bores. When needing to
execute a through bore, click on the adjacent marker check box; the number displayed represents
the distance between the bottom surface of the piece and the bottom of the bit (ref. A, figure 181)
defined in field Piercing Z in card Machining operations of the Setup.
Figure 181
Tool Type; predefined list of the tool types present in the database. Select an item from the list, if a
value has been entered in the field Diameter. The CAM will find a tool with the diameter indicated
from among all those of the type selected.
Tool Code; predefined list of the tools present in the database. Select the tool with which to carry
out the machining operation directly, only if the lock adjacent to the Diameter field has been
removed.
Minimum X; distance from the last bore to the end of the piece.
Distance; value for the distance between centres of the rows of bores.
Groove; movement position of the surface to be machined compared with the main piece surface
(figure 159, page 239). For the description of the adjacent TOS field, consult the example on page
239 (data field “Groove”).
Rot.Speed [rpm]; tool rotation speed.
For boring with the spindles of the boring unit, leaving the field empty, the system uses the value in
the “Rotation Speed” field in the “INVERTER DATA FOR T,TH” of the NC. For the borings with the
use of the electrospindle, see the description of the data field “Rot.Speed [rpm]” on page 239.
A/Ex Speed [mm/min]; represents the speed at which the tool moves from the safety position A to
the surface of the piece B. For the borings with the use of the electrospindle, see the description of
the data field “A/Ex Speed [mm/min]” on page 239.
254 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Figure 182
A C
Work.Speed [mm/min]; speed at which the tool makes the bore. For the borings with the use of
the electrospindle, see the description of the data field “Work.Speed [mm/min]” on page 240.
(AZ); tool angle of inclination; that is to say the angle of inclination of the spindle axis of rotation
with respect to the plane X, Y (see figure 161 on page 240).
To tilt the tool it is possible to select one of two options:
(AZ) -incr: (ref. A, figure 162) the angle is calculated taking the axes X/Y of the side required,
for example side 1, as reference axes.
(AZ) -abs : (ref. B, figure 162) the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as
reference axes.
(AR); tool angle of rotation; that is to say the angle of rotation of the spindle axis on plane X, Y (see
figure 163, page 241).
To rotate the tool it is possible to select one of two options:
(AR) -incr: (ref. A, figure 164) the angle is calculated taking the axes X/Y of the side required,
for example side 1, as reference axes.
(AR) -abs : (ref. B, figure 164) the angle is calculated taking the machine axes X/Y/Z as
reference axes.
OPT; bore optimisation. Mark the box to enable optimisation of the bore. If the box is not marked
the bore program row will be carried out in the order set down in the Editor application software
commands area. If the box is enabled the optimiser performs a process modifying the sequence of
execution of the bore programming row.
Vertical runs; the number of passes that have an affect on the depth of the programmed
machining operation. For example, if the number 2 is entered, the machining operation is split into
2 parts until the depth indicated in field Depth has been reached.
X step; value for the distance between centres along the X axis that defines the distance
between bores.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

255
Y step; value for the distance between centres along the Y axis that defines the distance
between bores.
Button is used to set the following fields:

X step; value of the distance between centres in the direction of the X axis of the distance
between the holes.
between bores.
No.Repeats; number of repeats.
Button makes it possible to fit the following fields:

Angular step; value of the angular step (DA) there must be between one repetition and
another.
between bores.
No.Repeats; number of repeats.
Angle; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are carried out.
L. step; distance between bores.
Repeats along the circumference; set the following fields:
Starting angle; makes it possible to set angle A from which to leave to carry out the
repetitions (see chapter 13, figure 122 and figure 123). This is activated by removing the
marker from the data field First Item.
next one.
Radius; radius of the circumference around which the repeats are carried out (see chapter 13,
figure 122 and figure 123). This is activated by removing the marker from the data field First
Item.
XRC; X position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
YRC; Y position of the centre of rotation of the circumference around which the repeats are
carried out.
First Item; eliminates the field Starting angle and the field Radius, and enables the first bore
ER as the start bore in the repeat (see chapter 13, figure 120 and figure 121).
Tool Class; list of tool classes. Select the item C_Drilling to use the boring unit spindles, or the
item C_Routing to use the electrospindle.
Spindle; this is used to indicate the spindle of the boring unit or the electrospindle with which to
carry out the machining operation. You should check that the electrospindle chosen is present on
the machine or that it is compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is housed in, if it is not
256 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

the optimisation will not be successful. The empty data field authorises the CAM to choose the
electrospindle.
Lower. dist.; position in millimetres at which the bit must start to slow down before perforating the
piece in through boring operations. This value depends on the one set in the field Depth.
For example, if a value of 3 is set in this field and a value of 5 is set in the field Depth and the
adjacent box has been marked, this means that the bit will start to slow down its speed of descent
when it reaches 3 millimetres from the bottom surface of the piece.
LowerSpeed [mm/min]; speed of the bit during the phases of the piece collapse, usable only for
through machining operations. After reaching the value set in field Lower. dist., the bit will perform
the last section of the machining operation at the speed set in this field. When the field is left
empty, the system uses the speed defined in the field Std LowSpd in the dialogue box Tool
parameters of the milling tool used for the machining operation.
To save the settings and close the machining windows, click on button . To close the windows
without saving, click on button .
15.3 Programming cutting operations

When programming machining operations with circular blade tools, there are a number of different
commands that can be used as and when required.
The following paragraph contains the list of machining operations that can be programmed and a
description of all the fields present in the cutting with circular blade dialogue box.
To create an angled cut on all sides of the piece, click on and on .
Figure 183: dialogue box Generic cut
To create a cut along the X axis on the top or bottom side of the piece, click on and on
.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

257
To create a cut along the Y axis on the top or bottom side of the piece, click on and on
.
To create a squaring operation centred on the top or bottom side of the piece, click on and
on .
Figure 184: dialogue box Format piece
To create a squaring operation that is not centred on the top or bottom side of the piece, click
on and on .
Figure 185: dialogue box Rectangular cut
To carry out a cut by assigning technological data to lines that have been created as
geometries, that is to say by calling up a geometric profile created using the command GEO,
click on and on .
258 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Figure 186: dialogue box Cut from geometry
List and description of the fields present in the cutting windows
Seeing that the appearance of some data fields in the first card of the cutting windows can
Geom. identif.; identification code of the drawing to which the machining is to be associated. Only
visible in dialogue box Cut from geometry.
SIDE; side of the piece. Select the side required from the figure above, or type the side number in
the field.
Description; description of the type of machining operation for each individual cut. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the cutting icon.
; set the angled cut using the end point co-ordinates a reference values. Displays the data field
End X and the data field End Y.
; set the angled cut using the length and the angle as reference values. Displays the data field
Angle and the data field Length.
; set the angled cut using the Y co-ordinate of the end point and the angle as reference values.
Displays the data field End Y and the data field Angle.
; set the angled cut using the X co-ordinate of the end point and the angle as reference values.
Displays the data field End X and the data field Angle.
X; X axis co-ordinate of the cut start point. When squaring and centring the piece, this data item
indicates the distance in X from the edge of the piece.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

259
Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the cut start point. When squaring and centring the piece, this data item
indicates the distance in Y from the edge of the piece.
Thickness; blade thickness. Enter the tool thickness value or, if you wish to select a blade directly,
remove the adjacent lock by clicking on the marker box, and select a code in the field Tool Code.
Depth; depth of the cut or of the perforation offset for through cuts. If a through cut is to be made,
click on the adjacent marker box.
The default value for the through cut must be set in the Piercing Z field in the Setup Machining
operations card.
Tool Type; preset list of the types of blade present in the database. Select an item from the list, if a
value has been entered in the field Thickness. The CAM will find a tool with the thickness indicated
from among all the ones of the type selected.
Tool Code; preset list of the blades present in the database. Select the tool with which to carry out
the machining operation directly, only if the lock adjacent to the Thickness field has been removed.
End X; X axis co-ordinate of the cut start point.
End Y; Y axis co-ordinate of the cut start point.
Angle; cut angle.
Length; cut length value.
X length; length of the cut in X starting from the position defined in field X.
Y length; length of the cut in Y starting from the position defined in field Y.
Reverse; forces the blade to reverse its direction of movement. When machining the cut the blade
does not begin at the profile start point, but at the end point.
Correction; position of the tool with respect to the working trajectory. Select one of the following
items:
• Centre Corr., positions the tool axis at the centre of the trajectory (ref. A figure 146);
• Right Corr., positions the tool axis to the right of the trajectory (ref. B figure 146) or positions
the trajectory to the right of the tool (ref. C figure 146); this type of correction must be set on
the Setup Machining operations card;
• Left Corr., positions the tool axis to the left of the trajectory (ref. C figure 146) or positions
the trajectory to the left of the tool (ref. B figure 146); this type of correction must be set on
the Setup Machining operations card.
Ini. Extens. mm; distance from the initial position of the cut, used to anticipate the start point of the
Fin. Extens. mm; distance from the final position of the cut, used to extend the machining
operation.
Groove; translation position of the surface to be worked with respect to the main surface of the
piece (figure 159, page 239). For the description of the adjacent TOS field, consult the example on
page 239 (data field“Groove”).
Rot.Speed [rpm]; tool rotation speed. If the field is left empty, the system uses the speed defined
in the field Std RotSpd in the dialogue box Tool parameters of the tool used for the machining.
LowerSpeed [mm/min]; speed with which the blade moves from the surface of the piece to the
position where the cutting operation A begins (figure 187). When the field is left empty, the system
260 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

uses the speed defined in the field Std LowSpd in the dialogue box Tool parameters of the cutting
tool used for the machining operation.
Figure 187
A/Ex Speed [mm/min]; speed used by the tool to move from the safety position B and move into
contact with the surface of the piece C, or to leave from the piece at the end of the programmed
cutting operation and return to the safety position D (figure 188). This data is also used in the
stretches for the positioning of the tool. When the field is left empty, the system uses the speed
defined in the parameters of the tool used for the machining: field Std LowSpd in dialogue box Tool
parameters.
Figure 188
B D
Work.Speed [mm/min]; speed at which the blade makes the cut. When the field is left empty, the
system uses the speed defined in the parameters of the tool used for the machining operation:
field Std WorkSpd in dialogue box Tool parameters.
(AZ); cut angle of inclination. To change the name of the field, click on the adjacent marker box.
(AZ) -abs ; absolute inclination. Define the cut angle of inclination with respect to the absolute
reference, which is perpendicular to side zero of the piece. If the angle is set to absolute, this
allows the blade to maintain the same inclination whichever side of the piece it has to
machine. When defining the angle, remember that it depends on the direction of movement of
the piece.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

261
Figure 189
(AZ) -incr; incremental inclination. Define the cut angle of inclination with respect to the
perpendicular on the side that is to be machined. If the angle is set to incremental, this allows
the blade to vary its inclination according to the side of the piece to be machined. When
defining the angle, remember that it depends on the direction of movement of the piece.
Figure 190
ISO instruction; ISO instruction.Data field used to enter an ISO instruction.
OPT; cut optimisation. Mark the box to enable optimisation of the cut. If the box is not marked the
cut program row will be carried out in the order set down in the Editor application software
commands area. If the box is enabled the optimiser makes a calculation and modifies the
execution sequence of the cut programming row.
Total Thickness; total cut thickness.

Vertical runs; number of passages that influence the depth of the programmed machining. For
example, if the number 2 is entered, the machining is split into 2 parts until the depth indicated in
field Depth has been reached.
262 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Two-direction; authorises the tool to work in alternate directions when carrying out successive
runs. The tool changes direction each time it carries out a new run. This function is enabled by
clicking on the box.
Distance; distance that must be left between one repeat and the next one.
between the cuts.
between the cuts.
between the cuts.
between the cuts.
Angle; angle of the straight line along which the repeats are to be carried out.
L. step; distance between the cuts.
Spindle; this is used to indicate the electrospindle with which to carry out the machining. This field
can be useful when you need to carry out a machining operation with an aggregate/tool that is only
supported by a specific electrospindle. You should check that the electrospindle chosen is present
on the machine or that it is compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is housed in, if it is not
the optimisation will not be successful. The empty data field authorises the CAM to choose the
electrospindle.
Over-material; value of the excess material that you wish to leave during the cut. The value
indicated in this field is linked to the type of correction (field Correction):
With left or right correction, when a negative value is set the tool removes more material and
when a positive value is set the tool will remove less material.
With a central correction, when a negative value is set the machine operation is moved
sideways to the right of the programmed trajectory and when a positive value is set the
machining is moved to the left of the programmed trajectory.
Rev. direction; forces the blade to carry out the cut reversing (ref. c) its direction of movement
(ref. a, figure 191), known as the “default direction”. Whatever the programmed direction of the
machining operation (ref. d, figure 191), the blade direction of movement will be reversed.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

263
Figure 191: a = blade default direction b = blade direction of rotation, which determines the default direction;
c= direction travelled by the blade when carrying out the machining operation, which is the opposite to the
default direction; d= programmed direction of drawing.
Poss. Reverse; enables a change in the blade direction of movement. If the programmed cut goes
from right to left (ref. d, figure 192), but the default direction of the blade is from left to right (ref. a,
figure 192), the CAM will reverse (ref. c, figure 192) the blade starting point so that it cuts correctly
using its proper direction of movement (ref. a, figure 192). It is recommended that this field be
enabled to prevent errors during program optimisation, as the programmed direction of the
drawing does not always correspond to the default direction of the blade.
Figure 192: a = blade default direction; b= blade direction of rotation, which determines the default direction;
c= direction travelled by the blade when carrying out the machining operation; d= programmed direction of
drawing.
Correct radius; enables the correction of the lead-in and lead-out blade radius from the piece.
The CAM performs a series of calculations, allowing the blade to start and finish the machining
operation at the programmed points.
When the check box is enabled, the blade effects the cut by moving down to the start point of the
machining operation with its lower tip A (figure 193). When the check box is disabled, the blade
effects the cut by moving down to the start point of the machining operation with its side extremity
B (figure 193).
264 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Figure 193
Hood position; hood position during machining operation. This data can only be utilised on
machines with the special device for correcting the hood position. Input a value from 1 to 6: value
1 represents the highest position of the hood, value 6 the lowest. The value 0 enables automatic
positioning of the hoods, which is managed according to the machining data set.
If the value entered is not compatible with the settings defined in the machining operation, the
hoods will in any case be positioned at a limit height automatically worked out on the basis of the
defined data.
To save the settings and close the machining windows, click on button . To close the windows
without saving, click on button .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

265
15.4 Programming "insertions"

This paragraph describes the procedures relating to programming "insertions". Insertions are all
those materials that can be applied to the piece, for example hinge mounting plates, hinges,
guides, cabinet suspension brackets etc..
To insert these materials it is necessary to use the command “INSERT”, if the insertion function is
to be used on pre-prepared pieces, or the command “INSERTG” if a drawing is to be created with
the shape of the material to be inserted, to which a milling operation followed by an insertion
operation are to be assigned.
To program a machining operation USING THE "INSERT" command, click on button ,

position the cursor inside the commands area on an empty row and click on button .
Figure 194: dialogue box Insertion
To program machining operations, using a geometric profile created using the command GEO
and depicting the shape of the material to be inserted, click on , position the cursor inside
the commands area in an empty row and click on . The button is used to input the string
“INSERTG” into the commands area.
Figure 195: dialogue box Insertion from geometry
266 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

List and description of the fields present in the input windows

Description; description of the type of machining operation for each individual insertion.. The text
entered in this field appears in the tree list close to the insertion icon.
X; X axis co-ordinate of the point at which the insertion is to be made.
Y :Y axis co-ordinate of the point at which the insertion is to be made.
Geom. identif.; code identifying the drawing. Select the drawing that represents the insertion to be
made on the piece from the codes in the list.
Depth; depth of the machining operation.

Tool Type; preset type identifying insertions. Select the one required. In the case of an inactive
field, click on the lock next to the field Diameter.
Tool Code; preset list of materials to be inserted in the piece. Select the one required. In the case
of an inactive field, click on the lock next to the field Diameter.
Groove; translation position of the surface to be worked with respect to the main surface of the
piece (figure 159, page 239).
Work.Speed [mm/min]; speed at which the tool carries out the machining operation. When the
field is left empty, the system uses the speed defined in the parameters of the tool used for the
machining: field Std WorkSpd in dialogue box Tool parameters.
OPT; insertion optimisation. Mark the box to enable optimisation of the insertion. If the box is not
marked the “INSERTG” program row will be carried out in the order set down in the Editor
application software commands area. If the box is enabled the optimiser carries out a calculation
and modifies the sequence of execution in the programming row.
between machining operations.
between the machining operations.
Diameter; insertion diameter. To enter the diameter value, lock the adjacent padlock by clicking on
the marker box.
Spindle; used to indicate the electrospindle with which the machining operation is to be
performed. You should check that the electrospindle chosen is present on the machine or that it is
compatible with the magazine the tool to be fitted is housed in, if it is not the optimisation will not be
successful. The empty data field authorises the CAM to choose the electrospindle.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

267
To save the settings and close the window, click on . To close the window without saving, click
on .
15.5 Programming piece thickness tracing

Thickness tracing is carried out on the piece in order to obtain the co-ordinates of a point to be
used as a reference when programming machining operations. It is normally carried out on pieces
with a shaped and not perfectly straight surface.
To insert the piece thickness tracing command between the program rows, click on , position
the cursor in the commands area on an empty row and click on .
(X); X axis co-ordinate for the tracing operation start point.
(Y); Y axis co-ordinate for the tracing operation start point

(Z); Z axis co-ordinate for the tracing operation start point
Tracer type; type of thickness tracer to be used to carry out the tracing operation.
1 = type A thickness tracer, used for vertical thickness tracing (figure 196);
2 = type B thickness tracer (RENISHAW), used for vertical and horizontal thickness tracing (figure
196).
Figure 196: A = thickness tracer used for vertical thickness tracing; B = thickness tracer used for the vertical
and horizontal thickness tracing.
Dis. correction; used to disable correction of piece dimensions.
TSpd; thickness tracing speed.

Tool Code; preset list of thickness tracers in the database.
Tool Class; tool class.
268 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

ISO instruction; used to insert an alphanumeric identification value to show the row with the QTS
parameter in which the thickness tracing position is stored, in the ISO generated file. For example,
when PP1 is input the following string: PP1 = QTS appears in the ISO generated file.
15.6 Notes on boring program symmetry

When the machine works on the mirror origin, it uses the mirror origin for each programmed
spindle. If the program has been declared as being symmetrical (check box Symmetry in dialogue
box Piece variables enabled) and the boring programmed using straight spindles is carried out in a
single descent, in order to ensure that the same machining operation also functions on the mirror
origin, the tools installed in the symmetrical spindles must be the same as those installed in the
straight spindles, as the CAM automatically searches for the symmetrical spindles. If, instead, the
program has been declared as being non-symmetrical, the programmed boring has no restrictions
and as such the CAM searches for the spindles with the programmed tools.
For this reason, when creating a machining program, it is important to remember that the machine
behaves in a different manner according to the settings defined in dialogue box Piece variables
(see chapter 12).
With field Sole origin enabled, the program is automatically considered as non-symmetrical.
When a straight origin is selected, the created ISO file stores the list of spindles as they were
created by the CAM, while if a mirror origin is selected, the created ISO file stores the list of
mirror spindles taking them from the list of spindles produced by the CAM.
With field Symmetry disabled, when the straight origin is selected as the origin, the machine
only carries out the programmed machining operations on the straight origins, whereas if the
mirror origin is selected as the origin, the machine only carries out the programmed machining
operations on the mirror origins.
15.7 Notes for programming using the chip deflector

The position of the deflector during machining is not checked by the optimiser nor by
the machine. In order to prevent interference with the objects on the work table, it is
advisable to check for any collision dangers personally.
You are advised to associate the right deflector with the tool with rightwards rotation
and the left deflector with the tool with leftwards rotation. Failure to do this means the
optimisation is not performed and the ISO file is not produced.
To enable the display of the chip deflector data, check box Chip deflector in card Milling data of
Setup.
Create the profile to machine, click on card Advanced technological data page in the milling
window and fill in the following data fields:
Use deflector; enables use of the chip deflector.

Deflector; name of the deflector to find in the list.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

269
Distance; safety distance between the chip deflector and the surface of the piece being machined
(ref. A, figure 197) or to machine (ref. A1, figure 197).
Thickness [inc]; thickness of material removed (ref. B, figure 197).
Starting distance; distance between the point of geometrical discontinuity on the machining path
and the point in which the chip deflector must start turning (ref. C, figure 197).
Final distance; distance between the point of geometrical discontinuity on the machining path and
the point in which the chip deflector must stop turning (ref. D, figure 197).
% Rotation; rotation of the chip deflector effected from the beginning point of the rotation to the
point of geometric break in the machining trajectory (ref. E, figure 197), expressed as percentage
of the total rotation necessary to turn around the break.
Figure 197: example
chip deflector
tool
point of geometrical discontinuity on the machining path
270 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

15.8 Notes for programming milling interpolated with

axis C
In order to carry out interpolated milling with the tool at right angles to the profile to be machined,
use the aggregate orientation device (C-axis) and follow the example reported below.
Suppose we need to program a horizontal milling operation as shown in figure 198.
Figure 198:
Y X
Z
To do this, proceed as follows:

Design the geometry on face 0 of the piece; GEO command (ref. A, figure 199).
Click on button ROUTG to define the milling from geometry (ref. B, figure 199).
Figure 199:
A
B

ROUTG GID="P1001" ID="P1009" Z=0 DP=20 DIA=12 AZ=90 CKA=azrABS CKT=YES OVM=-15
When programming this type of machining, the following fields must be set in dialogue box Milling
from geometry:
Geom. identif.; indicate the identification code of the geometry.
Depth; indicate the depth of the horizontal milling; how far the tool enters in the piece.
Tool Code; indicate the type of tool mounted on the aggregate to use.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

271
Correction; indicate the type of correction which, in this case, does not indicate the tool radius
correction but instead indicates the position of the aggregate with respect to the profile and its
direction of movement. Consequently, if the machining moves in an anticlockwise direction
and the aggregate must be positioned to the right of the profile, use option Right Corr..
Lead-in Type ->; choose option None, because this machining operation does not need to
indicate the type of lead-in.
Lead-out Type ->; choose optionNone, because this machining operation does not need to
Groove; indicate the machining start point on the Z-axis, i.e. the distance from the upper
surface of the piece.
(AZ) (AZ) -abs ; indicate the angle of inclination of the tool with respect to the Z-axis. To carry
out horizontal milling, enter the number 90.
Over-material; indicate the value of the surplus material. A positive value moves the point of
the tool towards the outer edge of the piece, a negative value moves the point of the tool
towards the inside of the piece.
Enable TCP; check the box to enable the use of axis C.
This type of machining can only be enabled on NC version 2001 upgrade 13.
15.9 Notes on programming vertical milling in YZ/XZ

To carry out linear or curved pocketing on the upper surface of the piece, as shown in figure 200,
follow the instructions reported below.
Figure 200
Y X
Z
Create the geometry/machining on the side faces or on the non-standard faces.
Define the following data fields:
Geom. identif.; indicate the identification code of the geometry.

Depth; indicate the depth of the vertical milling; how far the tool enters in the piece.
Tool Code; indicate the type of tool to use.
Correction; select option Centre Corr..
272 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

Lead-in Type ->; choose option None, because this type of machining operation does not
require the indication of the type of lead/in.
Lead-out Type ->; choose option None, because this machining operation does not need to
Groove; indicate the point on the Z-axis where to start machining. Distance from the side face
of the piece or from the non-standard face.
(AZ) (AZ) -abs ; indicate the angle of inclination of the tool with respect to the Z-axis. To carry
out non-inclined milling, enter the number 0.
Over-material; indicate the value of the surplus material. A positive value moves the tip of the
tool towards the outer extremity of the piece.
The L=GTPON fixed cycle called up by parameter PTCP=1 appears in the ISO file generated in
the milling string .
15.10 Notes for programming milling using aggregate

21
The position of the aggregate 21 during machining is not checked by the optimiser
nor by the machine. In order to prevent interference with the objects on the work
table, it is advisable to check for any collision dangers personally.
Before creating the machining program, enable the use of aggregate 21 by checking box
Show description in the operations windows in card Editor windows of Setup.
When programming machining operations using aggregate 21, in order to position the aggregate
under the piece, the system needs to know towards which side of the piece the aggregate must
move in order to effect the descent (see figure 201). The aggregate lead-in point under the piece is
obtained by checking box Aggr21 angle (milling dialogue box) and entering the angle of the corner
on which the machining has been programmed in the adjacent field.
For example, with corner 1 as the reference corner, enter the following angles:
0 = the aggregate descends under side 1.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

273
Figure 201: Aggregate descent under side 4 of the piece
15.11 Notes on programming milling with the sharp

corner
Carry out the following operations on the Setup card Milling data:
Mark the box Sharp corners.

Input the value of the lead-out angle of the tool from the piece to make the sharp edge in the
Corner angle data field.
Display the dialogue box Tool parameters relevant to the tool to be used for the machining and
input a value other than 0 in the data field Corner ang. .
Check the box Sharp corners in the milling dialogue box.
Create the geometry. Choose item sc1 in field Sharp corner of one of the two coinciding
segments that go together to form the sharp edge.
15.12 Notes for milling with “multipassers”

The programming of milling divided into several passes has limitations if the data field Two-
direction has been enabled. The function Two-direction does not generate errors and functions
correctly performing the same number of operations as input in field Vertical runs or in field
Horizontal runs, only observing the following settings:
Field Correction: option Centre Corr..
Field Lead-in Type ->: option None.
Field Lead-out Type ->: option None.
Field Starting Z; value 0.
Field End Z; value 0.
Field Sharp corners: disabled .
274 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

In the case where field Two-direction has been enabled and field Correction has been defined with
option Right Corr. or option Left Corr., the system generates an error and the machining is not
carried out.
Notes to be complied with just for the horizontal/vertical multipassers

For programming the milling with the vertical spindle divided into several passes to be carried out
horizontally and vertically along the surface of the face, observe the following devices:
5. In data field Correction choose option Left Corr. (ref. B, figure 202) or optionRight Corr. (ref. C,
figure 202). Option Centre Corr. is only acceptable if mention is made in field Lead-in Type ->
of option None.
6. Input in data field Horizontal runs the number of passes (ref. B or C, figure 202).
7. Indicate in data field Horizontal step the distance between one pass and the next one (ref. D,
figure 202).
Figure 202: A = geometry; B = 10 passes with left correction; C = 10 passes with right correction;
D = distance between one pass and the next.
B C
A A
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

275
15.13 Notes for programming a machining operation

with the “repositioning”
The data regarding the positioning of the tool inside a programmed machining operation is defined
in the dialogue box to generate the line (command Line given end point).
During the creation of the geometry, to generate a tool positioning trajectory, it is necessary to
create a linear segment (ref. A, figure 203) with the command Line given end point and it is
necessary to choose the option YES in data field Repositioning.
Figure 203: A = linear segment for positioning the tool; B = machining operations.
B B
A
B
B
To ensure that the program is optimised, the following settings are necessary:
In data field Correction select option Centre Corr..
In data field Lead-in Type -> select option None.
15.14 Notes on the use of the tool lead-in and lead-out

data items
When setting option Line as the tool lead-in and lead-out data item, the following procedure
must be adopted:
In field Correction select option Right Corr. or option Left Corr..
In field Lead-in Angle enter a value between -180 and 180.
When setting option Curve as the tool lead-in and lead-out data item, the following procedure
must be adopted:
In field Correction select option Right Corr. or option Left Corr..
In field Lead-in Angle enter a value between -90 and 90.
When setting option Corrected 3DLineor option Corrected 3DCurve as the tool lead-in and
lead-out data item, the following procedure must be adopted:
In field Correction select one of the three options.
In field Lead-in Angle enter a value between 0 and 90.
276 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

15.15 Notes for milling operations on the mirror origin

Enabling field Export the symmetrical section in dialogue box Customised panel parameters
exports the data for effecting the machining to the mirror origin. The generated ISO file will have
two sections, one for the straight origin and one for the mirror origin. In the mirror origin, the profile
is inverted, though the direction of the path of the milling cutter is the same as that defined in the
profile loaded on the straight origin.
Figure 204: A=straight origin; B=mirror origin.

X
A B
Y
It is advisable to set identical types of tool lead-in and type of lead-out, in that on the mirror origin
these settings do not produce any inversion. In fact, when the profile is overturned, the lead-in data
item becomes the lead-out, and vice versa.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

277
278 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0013.fm140605

16 Automatic program parameter

setting
This is the automatic updating of the programmed machining operation as the dimensions of the
piece vary. To do this it is necessary to use variables and in certain cases VBScript instructions.
16.1 Variables
The term variables is used to indicate a size or amount that can take on different values.
BiesseWorks distinguishes three types of variable: Environmental, Global and Local.
The variables of the Environmental type are valid in all BiesseWorks programs/macro. Each
modification will have an effect on all the programs/macros in which these variables are
inserted. It is therefore recommended that you avoid making modifications to this type of
variable.
The Global type variables are only valid in the program/macro in which they are created. They
can be modified from the outside on a temporary basis, for example in the variables table of a
program in a list or in the variables table of a macro inserted in a program.
The Local type variables are only valid in the program in which they are created, and cannot
be modified from the outside.
The variables declared between the programming rows using the VBScript syntax also belong
to this type of variables, however, unlike the others, they cannot be modified from the dialogue
box Program variables - [%1], but only from the programming row in which they are located.
Caution: if the name of a variable indicated in the window Program variables - [%1] and the
name of a variable declared between the program rows correspond, the value indicated in the
latter will be considered valid.
Piece variables
BiesseWorks also provides users with certain parameters that can be used as variables, known as
“piece variables”. These variables are managed differently from the others, both when displaying
and when modifying them.
If they are included in a program that is called up in a list, their values can be modified temporarily,
like global variables. The parameters known as “piece variables” are listed below.
Parameter Text in the dialogue box Description
CKOP Movement in X; Allows movement of the origin to be

Movement in Y; enabled.
Keyboard offset
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

279
Parameter Text in the dialogue box Description
CUSTSTR User data Used to indicate customised parameters.
FCN Measure in inches Used to set the unit of measurement:

0=millimetres, 1=inches.
JIGTH Jig thickness Jig thickness.
LPX LPX Piece dimension along machine axis X

(length).
LPY LPY Piece dimension along machine axis Y

(width).
LPZ LPZ Piece dimension along machine axis Z

(thickness).
MATERIAL Material Used to indicate the name of the piece

material.
ORLST Origins list Used to indicate the list of origins (use the
comma as separator).
SIMMETRY Symmetry Used to enable symmetry during machining

of the piece.
TLCHK Used to enable optimisation on the current

tooling: 0=enabled, 1=disabled. Not active.
TOOLING Used to indicate the tooling. Not active.
UNICLAMP Uniclamp enables the use of the Uniclamps. 0 =

DISABLED; 1 = ENABLED.
UNIQUE Sole origin Used to enable the sole origin (0/1).
XCUT X cut. position Safety position along machine axis X for

automatic suspension of the machining
operation.
YCUT Y cut. position Safety position along machine axis Y for

automatic suspension of the machining
operation. Not active.
280 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

16.2 Creating variables

The name of the variable must be created bearing in mind the following rules:
it must never start with a number, but always with a letter of the alphabet;
it must not contain spaces and other special characters (e.g. operators such as: +; <; >; -; x;
etc.);
it must never comprise more than 255 characters;
it can be written either in capitals or in lower case letters.
The value given to the variable must be created bearing in mind the following rules:
it can be a number;
it can be an expression containing preset variables (e.g.: LPX; LPY etc.) or variables created
by the same operator. The variables that have an expression constructed with variables
(example: VARIAB=VARX1+VARX2*2) as a value must always be inserted after the variables
contained in them.
The expressions can be constructed bearing in mind all the arithmetical operators that are
accepted by VBScript (see paragraph “Arithmetical operators”, page 282).
To create programs that are easier for other users to read and interpret, it is recommended that
you give logical names to variables. For example, a variable that has to contain or calculate the
number of repeats can be called “nrRep”, where “nr…” indicates the number and “…Rep” stands
for repeats.
The environmental, global and local variables are created in the Program variables - [%1] dialogue
box. To display it, click on or select the menu Program and the option Variables.
Figure 205: dialogue box Program variables - [%1]
1. Select the option button that corresponds to the type of variable you wish to create.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

281
2. Click on to add a new row.
3. Fill in the data fields on the row. Type the name of the variable in the column Name; caution, to
ensure that the program operates correctly, give the variables different names from the ones
indicated in appendixes B and C.
In the column Value enter the value of the variable. In the column Description type a comment
(not compulsory). In the column Type select the attribute that defines use of the variable:
• Distance; defines the value as a distance that can be processed during conversion from
millimetres to inches and vice versa;
• Generic; indicates that the value defines itself automatically according to the context in
which it finds itself, for example in the case of support variables;
• Whole; defines valid the whole part of the value only, without taking into consideration any
decimals, i.e. numbers after the comma;
• Real; defines valid both the whole part of the value and any decimals, i.e. numbers after the
comma;
• String; indicates that the value must be considered as text only;
• Speed; defines the value as a speed that can be processed during conversion from
millimetres to inches or vice versa.
4. Save the modifications by clicking on .
Arithmetical operators
As well as normal alphanumeric characters, BiesseWorks allows the value of a variable or a data
field to be defined using a set of “standard” calculation characters, and the special calculation
functions foreseen by the VBScript language.
List of standard arithmetical operators
Character Mathematical operation Syntax
+ Addition. X+X or (X)+(X)
- Subtraction. X-X or (X)-(X)
* Multiplication. X*X or (X)*(X)
/ Division. X/X or (X)/(X)
282 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

List of main VBScript calculation functions
Function Mathematical operation Syntax
Abs Calculate the absolute value of “X”. Abs(X)
Atn Calculate the tangent arc of “X”. Atn(X)
Cos Calculate the cosine of “X”. Cos(X)
Int Calculate the whole part of the value of “X”. Int(X)
Sgn Calculate the algebraic sign of “X”. Sgn(X)
Sin Calculate the sine of “X”. Sin(X)
Sqr Calculate the square root of “X”. Sqr(X)
Tan Calculate the tangent of “X”. Tan(X)
List of “advanced” VBScript arithmetical operators
Character Description of operator Example of syntax Result of the example

(a=5, b=2)
\ Whole division c=a\b 2
Mod Modulus c=a Mod b 1
^ Raise to the power of c=a^b 25
& String chain c=a & b 52
List of VBScript comparison operators
Character Description of operator
= Equal to
>= Greater than or equal to
<= Less than or equal to
<> Other than
< Less than
> Greater than
List of VBScript logic operators
Not Negation
And Logic conjunction
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

283
Or Logic disjunction
Management of variables
The following paragraph indicates the procedure to be followed to manage variables, that is to say
the procedure to be used to delete them, order them, save them, etc.
Ordering the variables
To arrange the variables in sequential order, select them and then click on or .
Modifying the type of variables
To change the type of a variable, select it and then click on . Select the new type to be
assigned to the variable and then click on .
Updating the list
Select the list of variables by clicking on the corresponding option button, and then click on .
Deleting
Select the variable to be deleted and then click on .
Cancelling all the variables

Caution, this procedure may have repercussions on all the programs containing environmental
type variables. For this reason, before you proceed, check whether any of the environmental
variables are used in other programs. To reset, click on .
Saving the variables
To save modifications, click on ; to cancel modifications, click on .
Printing the list
Select the list of variables by clicking on the corresponding option button, and then click on .
284 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

16.3 Using variables

To obtain automatic parameter setting in a program, enter the variables created for that purpose in
the data fields. Program parameter setting can be fully automatic or partially automatic, according
to the result you wish to obtain. If the variables are only entered in certain data fields then program
parameter setting will be partially automatic.
Displaying and identifying the available variables

For complete viewing of all the available variables, click on or select the menu Program >
Variables and access the Program variables - [%1] window.
To display them all simultaneously, click on the option button All. The variables of the Global type
have a (blue) icon , those of the Local type have a (blue) icon and those of the
Environmental type have a (red) icon .
16.4 Predefined VBScript instructions

The VBScript instructions allow operations to be carried out solely under certain conditions. For
less experienced users, BiesseWorks allows the syntax of certain VBScript instruction, indicated
below, to be inserted in the program rows. Subsequently, the instructions inserted will have to be
completed manually by entering or defining any variables and relative values.
In view of the widespread use of VBScript (Visual Basic Scripting) as a programming language,
certain functions only are indicated in this manual, and the consultation of texts dealing more
specifically with this subject is suggested for those wishing to go into greater depth.
Instruction “For…Next”
The instruction For…Next allows a block of instructions or program rows to be repeated for the
number of times indicated. In For cycles a counter variable is used, the value of which is increased
or decreased each time the cycle is repeated.
The instruction For specifies the counter variable i and the relative start and end values.
The instruction Next increases the counter variable by 1.
In the following example the syntax is set up to create a repeat of 5 bores with a distance between
centres of 32 (mm):
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

285
Figure 206: example of a syntax used to create a repeat.
AxisToAxis is the variable created to define the

distance between the centres of each bore;
Limit is the variable created to define the

maximum limit for repeats of the bore;
Dim i,Limit,AxisToAxis
AxisToAxis=32
Limit=5
For i=1 to Limit step 1
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=100+AxisToAxis*i Y=80 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=5
Next
Conditional instructions “If…Then” and “If…Then…Else”

The instructions If…Then…Else allow a specific instruction or a block of instructions to be run,
based on the value of a condition that can be true or false.
In the example that follows the syntax is set to create a repeat of 5 bores with a distance between
centres of 32 (mm) only if the condition LPX=>LPY*2 is true, that is to say if the size of piece along
the X axis (LPX) is equal to or higher than the result of multiplying the size of piece along the Y
axis by 2 (LPY*2).
If the condition is not met, the instruction For…Next is not carried out and the program
moves on directly to interpret the row following End If.


286 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

LPX=600
LPY=300
AxisToAxis=32
Limit=5
If LPX=>LPY*2 Then
Next
End If
In the following example the key word Else, which signifies “otherwise”, is used, that is to say if the
condition If is not met the program rows after Else and up to End If are interpreted. In this case a
bore with a diameter of 20 (mm) and a depth of 10 (mm) is created at the centre of the piece.
Figure 208
If LPX<LPY*2 Then
Next
Else
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=LPX/2 Y=LPY/2 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=20
End If
Instruction “While…WEnd”
This carries out a series of instructions for as long as a specific condition is found to be true, after
which it terminates the operation.
Thus, if the condition is true, all the instructions up to Wend are carried out. After this the condition
is checked again and, if it is still true, the process is repeated. If the condition is no longer true the
program rows after Wend will be interpreted.
The cycles While…Wend can be nested at any level. Each instruction Wend corresponds to the
most recent instruction While.
In the following example the syntax is set up to create a repeat of 5 bores with a distance between
centres of 32 (mm):
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

287


AxisToAxis=32
Limit=5
i=0
While (i<Limit)
i=i+1
Wend
288 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0006.fm140605

17 Macros
17 Macros
In BiesseWorks the term “macro” is used to define programs saved with the extension BSM, which
can be called up and used within other documents (BPP files). Macros can thus be programmed
and automatic parameter setting can be obtained in them just like a BPP program, except for the
fact that they cannot contain user sides, that is to say the sides of a piece obtained by
transformation of the geometry.
The instructions for creation and application of macros are explained using special guided
exercises, in which reference is made to a macro with automatic parameter setting, to be used to
obtain “diamond” shaped pieces by milling. The macro and the drawing will both be given the
conventional name “Diamond”.
Figure 210:
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

289
17 Macros
17.1 Creating macros

Macros are obtained from programs, starting a guided procedure that allows a new or existing
machining program to be save with extension BSM.
How to create the “rhombus” macro

1. Create a new document (see paragraph 12.9 “Creating the document” on page 165), using the
dimensions LPX=800 (mm), LPY=500 (mm) and LPZ=12 (mm). Save using extension BPP to
avoid losing the data during the creation of the drawing.
2. Create two global type variables (see paragraph 16.2 “Creating variables” on page 281), to
calculated the length (XX) and the angle (KK) of side 3:
AA=400
BB=250
3. Create two local type variables, from which to obtain the values to be used in the following to
draw the “diamond” figure:
XX=SQR((AA*AA)+(BB*BB))
KK=ATN(BB/AA)*(180/PI)
The global constant PI represents the symbol π (pi), which has a value of 3.1415926535...
4. Define the geometry with the name “diamond” and set the co-ordinates for the start point of the
diamond as follows: X= 0; Y=BB (see paragraph “How to insert the start point” on page 200).
5. Click on and then on to draw the first line (3) of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as
indicated in the following figure.
290 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

17 Macros
6. Click on to draw line 4 of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as indicated in the following
figure.
7. Click on to draw line 5 of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as indicated in the following
figure.
8. Click on , to draw line 6 of the “diamond”. Set the data fields as indicated in the following
figure.
9. Select the geometry in the graphics area, click on and then on to apply a milling
operation to the geometry “diamond”, as indicated in paragraph 15.1 “Milling programming” on
page 229. Check that the program rows correspond to the ones indicated below.
GEO ID="rombo" SIDE=0 CRN="1" DP=0 DX=0 DY=0 R=0 DA=0 RDL=NO
START_POINT X=0 Y=AA
LINE_LNAN L=XX AA=KK
LINE_LNAN L=XX AA=-KK
LINE_ANYE AA=KK YE=0
LINE_ANXE AA=-KK XE=0
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID="diamond" Z=0 DP=5 DIA=10 THR=YES
10. To save the program as a “macro” file with extension BSM, open the macro dialogue box and
follow the instructions provided (see paragraph 17.2 “Saving macros”).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

291
17 Macros
17.2 Saving macros

To save the program using extension BSM, select menu File and option Create Macro.
Figure 211: dialogue box Step 1/3 of MacroWizard
1. Enter in the data field Macro name the name of the macro file without an extension (BSM),
which is added automatically at the end of the save operation.
2. Enter the title of the command in the data field Menu text and toolbar tooltip to recall the macro
to be used.
3. Set the file containing any information on use of the macro in the data field Help file name.
This setting is not compulsory.
4. Click on to continue.
5. Select in the data field Name of the toolbar bitmap the bitmap to associate with the macro for
the toolbar.
6. Check box Show the button on the toolbar to create the macro button in the appropriate tool
bar (the dimensions of the button must be 32X32 pixels).
7. Select the bitmap image in data field Name of help bitmap.
8. Create the customised bitmap image using button . This setting is optional (the
dimensions of the image must be 288X224 pixels).
292 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

17 Macros
10. Indicate in the main box Special parameters common to all operations the boxes for the
parameters to include in the dialogue box of the macro created:
Technological data (DIA DP OPT ...); enter the machining operation's technological
parameters.
Macro from geometry (GID); enter the data field Geom. identif. to search for the drawing's ID
code.
Side (SIDE); enter the part to indicate the piece's reference corner.
Corner (CRN); enter the part to indicate the side on which to apply the machining operation.
Iso (IIS); enter the ISO data field.
11. In the main box List of global variables, select the variables that can be changed by the
operator using the macro.
13. Check that the data and setting in window MacroWizard - Summary are all correct.
14. Click on to terminate saving of the macro.
17.3 Description of dialogue box List of macros

Enabled macros; shows the list of the enabled macros.
Disabled macros; shows a list of all existing macros to be enabled.
; opens the selected macro and displays its content in the Editor application software.
; deletes the selected macro from the list Disabled macros. The macro will also be deleted
from the original folder (Biesse\BiesseWorks\Editor\Macros\....).
; closes the dialogue box and saves any settings made.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

293
17 Macros
To display the dialogue box List of macros, close all the files open, select the menu File and the
option Macros.
Figure 212: dialogue box List of macros
17.4 Opening, modifying and saving the macro

To open a macro in order to display its content in the software interface, display dialogue box
List of macros (see paragraph 17.3, page 293), select the macro to open with a double click of
the mouse or select it with a click of the mouse and click button . The contents of the
macro will be displayed in the application software; make the necessary modifications and
save the macro.
To save the macro, select the menu File and the option Macro properties.... To write over it,
click on the button , to create another with a new name, input the new name in the relevant
field and complete the fields required (for the direction of the fields, consult paragraph 17.2
“Saving macros”).
17.5 Activation/deactivation of the macros

To activate/deactivate the macros to be inserted in the active document, i.e. to display the macros
commands or not in the tool bar, in the dialogue window Call Macro and in the menu Insert of the
Editor application software, display the dialogue box List of macros (see paragraph 17.3, page
293) and observe the following indications:
To enable or disable macros commands, select the items present in window List of
macros(see figure 212) and use the button or button to move them in the area
Enabled macros or in the area Disabled macros.
To enable or disable all at the same time, click on the first, press SHIFT and then click on the
last item, press button or button .
294 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

17 Macros
17.6 Inserting macros into the program

To insert a macro between programming rows of the active document, use one of the following
methods:
Display window Call Macro by clicking menu Insert and option Macros. Double click on the
icon of the desired macro and, if necessary, edit the data field. This procedure is used to insert
the macro quickly into the active document.
Remember to enable the macros (see paragraph 17.5 “Activation/deactivation of the macros”),
otherwise the content of the above window will be void, i.e. the required commands will be
absent.
Click on the button to recall the desired machining operation (boring, milling etc.). Click on
and select the button relating to the macro to insert. Enter the data.
Click on the menu of the required machining operation (boring, milling, etc.). Click on the
option for the macro and the command for the macro to be inserted. Enter the data.
17.7 Macros for cleaning the hoods

The macro “HOOD_CLE” is used to clean the hoods at the end of machining operations. To insert
the macro into the document, follow the procedure in paragraph 17.6 “Inserting macros into the
program”.
CYCLES; the number of times the hood moves up and down during its cleaning cycle. Enter the
number value between the two ends.
SPINDLE ; number identifying the electrospindle on which the hoods to be cleaned are mounted.
Enter the number value between the two ends.
17.8 Horizontal aggregate boring macro

The “No PRK” macro is used to reduce the job time when carrying out repeated operations on side
faces of the piece with the same aggregate. Each time the machining is carried out with the
aggregate on a side face, before going to the next machining operation, the aggregate goes to its
park position, thus notably slowing down the machining time. The “No PRK” macro has been
created to by-pass this problem.
To insert the macro into the document, follow the procedure in paragraph 17.6 “Inserting macros
into the program”. Fill in the ABL data filed; this type of function is enabled with the value 1.
The following instructions must be followed to ensure that the macro works:
the machining operations must be consecutive;
the machining operations must be programmed for the same face of the piece;
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

295
17 Macros
the machining operations must be carried out using the same aggregate and the same tool.
two macros must be inserted between the programming rows: one marking the start of the
machining operations and one marking the end, as in the following example.
NOPRK ABL=1
BH SIDE=1 CRN="1" X=20 Y=20 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=10 RTY=rpX DY=0 R=0 DA=0 NRP=3
BH SIDE=1 CRN="4" X=20 Y=20 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=10 RTY=rpX DY=0 R=0 DA=0 NRP=3
NOPRK ABL=0
With this macro active, the aggregate is brought into the parking position if there is a tool change
or if the machining operation has been programmed on different sides of the piece. For example, if
two machining operations have been programmed, one on side 1 and one on side 2 of the piece,
in this case the aggregate carries out the machining on the first side, moves to the parked position
and then carries out the machining on the second side.
17.9 Macros for unloading the electrospindle

The “UNLOAD_T” macro is used to automatically tool-down the electrospindle at the end of the
This macro must be inserted at the end of the program, i.e. as the final string between the
programming rows.
The insertion of this macro between the programming rows could jeopardise the execution of
the program.
To include the “UNLOAD_T” macro in the document observe the procedure described in
paragraph 17.6 “Inserting macros into the program”.
296 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0007.fm140605

BiesseWorks can be used to import two-dimensional figures known as “profiles”, created using
external CADs. Files to be imported must have the extension DXF or CID.
Two different modes are available to carry out the import procedure:
Automatic mode.
Manual mode.
18.1 Automatic mode

Automatic mode must only be applied if the files to be imported contain not only geometrical
information regarding the drawing, but also technological information, that is to say data relating to
machining of the piece.
To carry out an automatic import, click on , or position the cursor in one of the two areas of the
application, display the quick menu and select Automatic import.... Find the file to be imported
using the relative Windows pop-up. In the case of DXF or CID files that do not contain machining
data, import may not be successful; if this is the case a short text message will be displayed
indicating why the operation has failed.
To automatically import aDXF file, the specific Setup card has to be set for the type of
formalism applied during the design stage (see the paragraph “DXF Definition card” on
page 67).
18.2 Manual mode

Manual mode allows a preview of the files to be imported to be displayed, so as to decide whether
to transport the drawing geometry data only, or the piece machining data as well into the Editor
graphics area.
To automatically importtechnological DXF files, the specific Setup card has to be set for the
type of formalism applied during the drawing stage (see the paragraph “DXF Definition
card” on page 67).
To carry out this procedure, display the import area A (figure 213) using the cursor B (figure 213).
Click on button ; alternatively, search for the command in menu File or use item Manual
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

297
import... in the quick menu. Select the file to be imported in the relative Windows pop-up and
select one of the following options:
Technological; used to import the file contents, transporting both the geometric data for the
drawing and the technological data relating to piece machining operations.
Geometric; used to import the file contents, transporting the geometric data for the drawing only.
Figure 213
To carry out the import operations, use the quick menu or the buttons on the Technology tool bar.
For a description of the Technology tool bar, consult the paragraph “Description of buttons”, page
37.
For a description of the quick menu, refer to page 299.
Structure of the import area

When a DXF or CID file is imported, the import area displays an image made up of two drawings:
drawing B represents the geometry and possibly the piece created using the CAD; drawing A
reproduces the characteristics of piece C defined in the graphics area. This reproduction (ref. A)
allows a visual comparison between the dimensions of the imported drawing B and the actual
dimensions of piece C in the graphic area.
Figure 214
298 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

Import area quick menu

Description of the quick menu options:
Manual import...; displays the Windows pop-up used to find the files to be imported.
Layer; displays the window with a list of the layers (levels) making up the drawing.
Delete; clears the import area, deleting the image.
Move; moves the drawing B (figure 214) away from the reproduction of the piece A (figure 214).
Scale; reduces the drawing B (figure 214) by the percentage required.
Rotate; rotates the drawing B (figure 214).
Centre; carries out horizontal or vertical centring, aligning the piece A with the drawing B (figure
214).
Import as; transports the selected drawing elements into the graphics area. The following is a list
of available options:
Bore; imports the selected element as a boring operation.
Cut; imports the selected element as a cutting operation.
Milling; imports the selected element as a milling operation;
Geometry; imports the selected element as a geometric drawing without technological data;
Insertion; imports the selected geometry (circle or rectangle) as the machining operation.
Straight side; imports the selected element, transforming it into a side of the piece with a flat
surface.
Circular side; imports the selected element, transforming it into a side of the piece with a
curved surface.
Piece size; imports the selected element as if it were a side of the piece. This command allows
the dimensions of the piece C (figure 214) to be changed.
Import piece size; imports into the editor's graphic area the piece dimensions as taken from the
DXF/CID file layer opened in the import area. This option can only be displayed if the file being
imported contains technological information.
Import; imports into the editor's graphic area the geometry selection as taken from the DXF/CID
file layer opened in the import area, defining it as machining operations. This option can only be
displayed if the file being imported contains technological information.
Properties; displays the window with the characteristics of the selected element.
Find paths; joins the selected segment to the following ones belonging to the same object.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

299
Importing the drawing as piece sides

To modify the characteristics of the piece in the graphics area, select segment A, B or C and click
on or on the option Piece size in the quick menu. Select the options: LPX for segment A, LPY
for segment B, LPZ for segment C.
Figure 215
Before proceeding with the above operation it is recommended that you center the drawing,
aligning it (ref. A, figure 214) with the reproduction of the piece (ref. B, figure 214) using the
command Centre in the quick menu.
Importing the drawing as cutting operation

To introduce a circular blade cutting operation into the graphics area, select one or more elements
in the drawing (e.g. ref. A, figure 216) and click on or on the option Cut in the quick menu.
Click on button to import the data from the DXF drawing. To define new parameters or modify
those indicated in the drawing, use the appropriate dialogue box fields (see paragraph “How to
create a cutting operation”, page 226).
Figure 216
300 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

Importing the drawing as boring operation

For boring operations, it is possible to display in the import area the circular or rectangular
drawings contained in the DXF/CID/PRF files. Those of rectangular form are automatically
interpreted by the system as bores to apply to horizontal faces.
Circular drawings
To introduce into the graphic area a boring operations represented as circular drawings, select one
or more circles (e.g. ref. A , figure 217) and click on or on the option Bore in the quick menu.
Click on button to import the data from the DXF drawing. To define new parameters or modify
those indicated in the drawing, use the appropriate dialogue box fields (see paragraph “How to
create a boring operation”, page 226).
Figure 217
Rectangular drawings
These drawings are interpreted by the system as horizontal bores where the diameter is
represented by segment A (figure 218) and the depth by segment B (figure 218). In the graphic
area, the imported bore is shown in reference C (figure 218).
To introduce this type of machining operation into the graphic area, select one side only of the
rectangle, the one where the bit enters, and click on or the quick menu option Bore. Click on
button to import the data from the DXF drawing. To define new parameters or modify those
indicated in the drawing, use the appropriate dialogue box fields (see paragraph “How to create a
boring operation”, page 226).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

301
Figure 218
B
C
A
Importing the drawing as milling operation

To introduce a milling area into the graphics area, select the profile drawn (e.g. ref. A) and click on
or on the option Milling in the quick menu. Click on button to import the data from the DXF
drawing. To define new parameters or modify those indicated in the drawing, use the appropriate
dialogue box fields (see paragraph “How to create a milling operation”, page 227).
If the profile is made up of a number of segments, to select it all, click on a single segment, display
the quick menu and select the option Find paths.
Figure 219
Importing the drawing as flat surface

To transform a segment into a side of the piece with a flat surface by importing it into the Editor
graphics area, select the straight segment (e.g. ref. A) and click on .
Figure 220
302 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

Importing the drawing as curved surface

To transform a segment into a side of the piece with a curved surface by importing it into the Editor
graphics area, select the curved segment (e.g. ref. A) and click on .
Figure 221
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

303
304 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a720k0008.fm140605

This chapter introduces the rules to be followed when creating profiles saved in DXF format so that
the various geometrical elements can be imported into the BiesseWorks document and recognised
as technological elements.
BiesseWorks is only able to interpret files in 2D type DXF format, commonly known as DXF-2D.
The various geometric elements in a DXF file can be associated with additional information to
allow them to be recognised as machining operations. Thus, a circle can only be interpreted as a
bore if the string that identifies the layer associated with it contains the boring data.
Geometric elements with no layer are interpreted as simple geometries.
When planning a DXF file that can be used in BiesseWorks, it is necessary to use certain
“formalisms”, that is to say a set of rules that define the structure of layers and the syntax used to
import them to the Editor application software.
These formalisms are of two types:
BIESSE type formalism;
CNI type formalism.
19.1 List of drawing commands

When creating geometries using general CAD's, in order for them to be imported into the
BiesseWorks Editor application, the following commands must be used:
Command for creating lines;
Command for creating multi-lines;
Command for creating arcs (arcs for three points, arcs with angle, etc.);
Command for creating closed polygons (rectangles, squares, stars, etc.);
Command for creating circles and ellipses.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

305
Do not use the FreeForm (SPLINE) commands, i.e. the commands that create free form
curves.
19.2 “BiesseWorks DXF” type formalism

This paragraph explains how to associate each element in the drawing created using a generic
CAD with layers, so that they can be imported correctly to the Editor application software, using
the setting BiesseWorks DXF (see “How to set the formalism” on page 328).
The layers are the “levels” present in the CAD which allow one drawing to be separated from
another, and each layer can be named by inserting numbers and keys. The operation to be carried
out thus relates to the procedure used to name the layer in such a way that the drawing associated
with it will be interpreted correctly.
The layer name (string) is made up of:

Keys: useful for defining the type of geometry and some technological data items that can be
personalised by the client (se paragraph “Personalise layer keys”).
Numbers: used to define geometric and technological values (consult paragraphs: “Sides of
the piece”, “Types of machining operation”, “Tool correction”, “Tool direction”).
To create the layers, comply with the following rules:

Each layer must start with the key TCH.
Each layer can contain linear dimensions for piece side depth, thickness, diameter and height,
which can be expressed in millimetres or in inches. Decimal figures must always be indicated.
When the values are expressed in millimetres it is necessary to specify 2 decimal figures:
when they are expressed in inches it is necessary to specify 4 decimal figures.
For example:
to indicate a depth of 30.5 mm, enter D3050, where 50 is a 2 figure decimal value;
to indicate a diameter of 5 mm, enter D500, where 00 is a 2 figure decimal value;
to indicate a diameter of 2.5 inches, enter 25000, where 5000 is a 4 figure decimal value.
Each layer can contain linear velocities relating to working speed and lowering speed, which
can be expressed in mm/min or in inches/min. When indicating the value for these speeds, if
they are expressed in mm/min the decimals need not be indicated, whereas if they are
expressed in inches/min it is necessary to indicate 2 decimal figures.
For example:
to indicate a speed of advance of 12000 mm/min for a tool, enter F12000;
to indicate a speed of advance of 5000 inches/min for the tool, enter F500000, where 00
represents the 2 decimal figures.
Each layer can contain the rotation speeds, which are expressed in rpm.
306 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

The alphanumeric values must start and end with the separator character.
For example: the characters MN$MACRO1$ within a layer indicate that the parameter MN has
a value of MACRO1.
The keys indicated in the examples for the “BiesseWorks DXF” type formalism help
explain how to generate the layer syntax and are reported in table 1, page 307.
Due to the fact that they can be personalised, the keys reported in the Setup table
may not correspond to those listed in table 1.
Personalise layer keys

In order to personalise the layer keys, display card DXF Definition of Setup. By default, each
parameter of the table corresponds to a key (see figure below).
Figure 222
Table 1: List of table parameters to which a key must be associated for insertion in the layer syntax of the DXF
files when needing to store geometric and technological data in the files interpreted by the system during
import. The keys indicated as examples are the default keys displayed in the Setup table.
PARAMETERS Keys
Face Key (e.g. W) indicating the standard face.
Generic face Key (e.g. WG) indicating the general face, to be used for
defining all the faces.
Work Key (e.g. B) indicating the type of machining.
Tool correction Key (e.g. TC) indicating the tool correction.
Working speed Key (e.g. F) indicating the feed speed of the tool in mm/
min or inches/min.
Rotation speed Key (e.g. S) indicating the rotation speed of the tool in
rpm.
Depth Key (e.g. D) indicating the depth or the position of the
tool in z in the machining in mm or inches.
Thickness Key (e.g. TH) indicating the thickness of the tool in mm
or inches.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

307
PARAMETERS Keys
MacroName Key (e.g. MN) indicating the name of the macro;
alphanumeric value.
Diameter Key (e.g. DI) indicating the diameter of the tool in mm or
inches.
Lowering speed Key (e.g. DES) indicating the descent speed of the tool
in mm/min or inches/min.
Direction Key (e.g. DIR) indicating the machining direction.
Through Key (e.g. PT) indicating through machining; 0 = no =
default; 1 = yes.
Tool class Key (e.g. TCL) indicating the tool class; code as per
database.
Tool code Key (e.g. TCD) indicating the tool code; alphanumeric
value.
Tool type Key (e.g. TTY) indicating the tool type; code as per
database.
AR Key (e.g. AR) indicating angle AR expressed in degrees,
no decimals.
AZ Key (e.g. AZ) indicating angle AZ expressed in degrees,
no decimals.
Face height Key (e.g. HF) indicating the height of the general face in
mm or inches.
Origins list Key (e.g. LO) indicating the list of origins, alphanumeric
value.
Symmetrical Program Key (e.g. PS) indicating the symmetrical program.
Aggregate tooling Key (e.g. AA) used to indicate the aggregate tooling to
which the aggregate tooling file name must be
associated.
Machine tooling Key (e.g. AM) used to indicate the machine tooling to
which the machine configuration file name must be
associated.
Magazine tooling Key (e.g. AS) used to indicate the magazine tooling to
which the magazine tooling file name must be
associated.
Input: %tool radius Key (e.g. IP) indicating the percentage value with which
to modify the tool lead-in radius.
Input: angle Key (e.g. IA) indicating the tool lead-in angle.
Input: type Key (e.g. IT) indicating the type of tool lead-in.
User panel Key (e.g. CP) indicating the personalised parameters of
the piece (custom parameters).
Tool rotation Key (e.g. TR) indicating the direction of rotation of the
tool.
Output: %tool rad. Key (e.g. OP) indicating the percentage value with which
to modify the tool lead-out radius.
Output: angle Key (e.g. OA) indicating the tool lead-out angle.
308 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

PARAMETERS Keys
Output: type Key (e.g. OT) indicating the type of tool lead-out.
Sides of the piece

Associate the side number to the parameter key Face indicating the face of the piece using the
numbering shown in figure 223.
Figure 223: Numbering piece sides (faces).
Types of machining operation

The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter key Work.
Code Machining
operation
1 milling
2 Bore
3 Cutting operation
8 piece
Tool correction
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter key Tool correction.
Code Correction
0 Absent (preset)
1 Left
2 Right
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

309
Tool direction
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter key Direction.
Code Direction
0 Direction indicated in the drawing
1 Direction opposite to that in the drawing
Tool lead-in/lead-out
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter Input: type and to the
parameter Output: type key.
Code Type of lead-in/lead-out
0 None
1 Curve
2 Line
3 Tg LineCurve
5 Helix
6 3DLineCurve
7 Corrected 3DLine
11 Corrected 3DCurve
Tool type
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter key Tool type.
Code Types
0 NORMAL (boring tools)
1 LANCIA (boring tools)
2 COUNTER SUNK (boring tools)
3 NORMALEG (boring tools)
100 CANDLE (mills)
101 SHAPED (mills)
102 ROUT0 (mills)
103 ROUT1 (mills)
104 - 111 ROUT2 - 9 (customised mills)
200 CUTT0 (blades)
201 CUTT1 (blades)
202 - 209 CUTT2 - 9 (customised blades)
250 HEAD0 (trimming blades)
251 HEAD1 (trimming blades)
310 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

Tool class
The following table shows the list of numbers to associate to the parameter key Tool class.
Code Class
0 C_Drilling
1 C_Routing
2 C_Cutting
19.2.1 How to represent the piece

The piece must be geometrically represented either by using a rectangle or by using the command
to create figures formed by one or more segments of lines or circular arcs connected together
(multi-lines), and can be designed in two different ways:
using a single rectangle, to which the three dimensions (width, thickness, height) are
assigned. The dimensions relating to the length of the piece along the X and Y axes are
provided directly by the geometry, whereas the thickness must be inserted in the layer
associated with the rectangle. If the depth is not specified it will be taken to be zero.
Example:
To draw a panel with dimensions 1000 x 300 x 30.20 (mm), it will be necessary to associate a
rectangle 1000 mm wide and 300 mm high with the layer TCHW0B8D3020:
TCH ; prefix identifying the BIESSE layer.
W0; W = parameter key Face; 0 = face number.
B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece.
D3020; D = parameter key Depth; 3020 identifies the value, i.e. 30.20 mm (the last two
numbers represent the obligatory decimals).
Figure 224
using a number of rectangles, to create the standard sides of the piece or lines internal to side
zero associated with rectangles to create generic sides of the piece (see paragraph “Creating
and naming standard panel faces” and paragraph “Creating and naming generic faces”). A
layer must be associate with each side created.
Standard sides are the 6 sides of the piece: the top, bottom and side faces. Generic sides
are the sides created by the user.
For piece recognition, always insert the parameter key (e.g. B) and the value 8 (e.g. B8) in the
layer associated to the rectangle describing the single face Work.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

311
Creating and naming standard panel faces

The standard panel faces can be created in two different ways:
With rectangles drawn around face 0 of the panel. The external segments of the rectangles
are the ones that are considered as reference sides to define the surfaces and direction of the
panel face (see corner 2 ref. A figure 225).
Figure 225:
1 0 3
With rectangles drawn under face zero of the panel (see figure 226). The bottom segments of
the rectangles are the ones that are considered as reference sides to define the surfaces and
direction of the panel face (see corner 2 ref. B figure 226).
Figure 226:
1
B
2
The parameter key Generic face (e.g. WG) can be used to define any face, while parameter key
Face (e.g. W) can only be used to define the 5 standard faces of the piece when they are
represented by a central rectangle and by rectangles drawn around it (figure 225).
The syntax to be used to create the layers differs according to the type of creation.
If the length of the side faces (ref. 1, 2, 3 and 4) constructed as rectangles does not coincide with
the length of the segments of the rectangle for face 0 (ref. A, B, C and D), the length of the
segments of the rectangle for face 0 will be considered valid (figure 227).
312 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

Figure 227
D
A 0 C
Examples
If the faces are drawn around face 0 (see figure 225), then face 1 must be associated with the
layer TCHW1B8:
If the faces are drawn under face 0 (figure 226), then face 1 must be associated with the layer
TCHWG1B8:
WG1; WG = parameter key Generic face; 1 = face number.
Creating and naming generic faces

A generic face must be represented by a line or a curve, according to whether it is a straight or
circular face. The curves and lines must be drawn inside face 0, in the exact point in which a new
side of the piece is to be created.
The layer must indicate the key for the generic face and the identification number for the new side,
and it must provide the height of the side. If the height is not indicated, the height of the panel will
be used.
Example:
To create a generic linear face associated with a line drawn inside face 0 of the piece with a height
of 30 mm, the face must be associated with the layer TCHWG6B8HF3000:
WG6; WG = parameter key Generic face; 6 = face number (ref. 6 figure 228).
B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece (obligatory).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

313
HF3000; HF = parameter key Face height; 3000 identifies 30 mm (the last two numbers
represent the obligatory decimals).
Figure 228
1 0 3
The surface of the machinable side of the piece is determined by the direction in which segment 6
shown in figure 228 is drawn. The direction of the segment thus has a start point P1 and an end
point P2. The part of the segment that identifies the machinable face (ref. A and B, figure 229) is
the one that goes from the start point P1 to the end point P2 (on the left of the segment along
directrix P1-P2). It is possible to force one corner of the segment by drawing a circle around it,
defining it as the start point. This operation cancels the order in which the corners of the segment
were drawn, so that the machinable face will always be recognisable.
Figure 229: Machinable surface of face 6 (ref. A and B) identified by the start point.
P1 A P2
6 6
0 P2 0 P1
B
Figure 230: Forced setting of the segment corner to establish the start point P1, i.e. the machinable surface of
face 6 (ref. C).
P2 C
0 P1
When a curve is created to represent a generic curved face, the system interprets it as if it were
created anticlockwise irrespective of the direction of what has been created. For this reason it is
advisable always to use forcing, i.e. the circle to establish the arc's initial vertex (figure 231).
If for example, we wish to create a curve going from P1 to P2, figure 231, in a clockwise direction.
The system will interpret P2 as the first vertex of the curve and P1 as the second vertex; therefore,
to establish the vertex P1 as the first vertex of the curve, it is necessary to using forcing on P1 to
mark it with a circle.
314 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

Figure 231: Curve vertex forcing to establish the starting point P1
P2
P1
Machining operations on generic faces

If the generic face is to contain machining operations, it must not only be drawn as a line/curve
inside the piece, but also as an horizontal rectangle located under face 0 of the piece. In this case
different layers must be assigned to the line/curve identifying the face and to the rectangle.
To create generic faces with identification numbers higher than 5 Generic face, always use
parameter key (e.g. WG) and draw the rectangle that represents them under face 0 or adjacent to
it, with corner 2 facing towards the bottom left hand corner of the rectangle.
The dimensions of the rectangle drawn to represent the generic face do not have to coincide with
those of the segment (line or curve) associated with them, as this value will be detected from the
segment geometry and layer.
Example:
If the line or arc describing the position of the face has a layer named TCHWG6B8HF3000, the
rectangle that represents it and on which the machining operations are to be carried out has a
layer named using the same code used for the line, which may or may not include the face height
data (H3000); it is thus possible to use two types of code, code TCHWG6B8HF3000 or code
TCHWG6B8.
WG6; WG = parameter key Generic face; 6 = face number.
B8; B = parameter key Work; 8 = identifies the piece (obligatory).
HF3000; HF= parameter key Face height; 3000 identifies the value, i.e. 30 mm (the last two
numbers represent the obligatory decimals).
19.2.2 How to represent bores

Bores can be represented in two different ways:
by a circle, which can be drawn directly on the standard or generic faces created as
rectangles. In this way it is possible to machine bores with the vertical spindle on face 0 or on
face 5 of the panel (see “Vertical bore represented by a circle”), and bores with the horizontal
spindle on side 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the piece or on the generic sides (see “Horizontal bore
represented by a circle”).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

315
Figure 232
by creating a rectangle or a closed polygonal line. In this case the rectangle must be created
directly on face 0 of the piece, and indicates a bore to be applied to the relative side face, for
example face 4 of the piece. This method can be used to machine bores with the horizontal
spindle on side 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the piece (see “Horizontal bore represented by a rectangle”).
Figure 233
Vertical bore represented by a circle

The vertical bore, which can be machined on face 0 or on face 5 of the piece, must be represented
by a circle, which must be drawn inside the rectangle representing the face required.
The diameter of the bore is given by the diameter of the circle, whereas the depth must be
specified in the layer. If the depth is not specified it will be taken to be zero. The bore application
point coincides with the centre of the circle.
Example:
To create a bore with a depth of
25.5 mm on face 0 of the piece, associate the bore drawing with the layer TCHW0B2D2550:
W0; W = parameter key Face; 0 = standard face number.
B2; B = parameter key Work; 2 = identifies the boring.
D2550; D = parameter key Depth; 2550 = identifies the value, i.e. 25.50 mm.
Horizontal bore represented by a circle

A horizontal bore can be represented by a circle drawn on one of the side faces of the piece.
The diameter of the bore coincides with the diameter of the circle, while the depth must be
specified in the layer.
316 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

Example:
To create a bore with a depth of
25.5 mm on face 3 of the piece, associate the bore drawing with the layer TCHW3B2D2550:
W3; W = parameter key Face; 3 = standard face number.
Horizontal bore represented by a rectangle

When a bore is created using a rectangle, the diameter and bore depth are obtained from the
geometry. The diameter is indicated by the length of segment A (figure 234) made on segment C
(figure 234) which represents face 1 on which to machine the bore, whereas the depth is indicated
by the length of segment B (figure 234). The point of application is given by the mid-point of the
segment representing the bore diameter.
Figure 234 shows a rectangle drawn on side 0 of the piece, to be interpreted as a bore to be
machined in side 1 of the piece.
Figure 234
A
B
C
0
To indicate the point at which the bore must be machined, type the value of the distance between
the bore and the top side of the face in the string for the layer associated with the bore rectangle. If
this value is not set, the bore will be considered by default to be positioned half way down the
panel thickness.
Examples of horizontal forcing

To represent a horizontal bore to be machined on face 1 at a position equal to half the
thickness of the piece, drawn as a rectangle on face 0, associate the drawing with layer
TCHW1B2:
W1; W = parameter key Face; 1 = face number (side face).
To represent a horizontal bore machined on face 1 at a distance of 20 mm from corner 1 of the
face, drawn as a rectangle on face 0, associate the drawing with layer TCHW1B2D2000:
W1; W = parameter key Face; 1 = face number (side face).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

317
Figure 235: example of how to interpret the rectangle created on face 0.
SP1
X A, bore;
20 mm B, face 1;
Y A 20mm; distance of bore from top side
of face.
B
Should you wish to apply a milling groove on the piece within which to machine a bore, the milling
groove is represented by the distance (ref. A) between the bore application point and side 1 (ref.
B) of face 0.
Figure 236: example of a milling groove.
B
0
Angular bore
The BIESSE formalism makes it possible to define inclined bores. To identify these bores it is
necessary to provide the application point and the angles AR and AZ. The following figure shows
the angles AR and AZ.
Angle AR represents rotation of the spindle axis on plane X, Y.
Angle AZ represents the angle of inclination of the spindle axis of rotation with respect to plane X,
Y.
Figure 237: Angles AR and AZ
Angular bores can be illustrated by a circle, a rectangle or a closed polygonal line on the 0 face.
318 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

Angular bore represented by a circle

If the angular bore is represented by a circle, the depth and the angles AR and AZ must be
specified in the layer.
The preset value for angles AR and AZ è zero.
Example:
To create a bore applied to face 0 of depth 10 mm, angle AR 45° and angle AZ 30°, associate the
layer TCHW0B2D1000AR45AZ30 to the hole drawing.
D1000; D = parameter key Depth; 1000 identifies the value, i.e. 10 mm (the last two numbers
AR45; AR = parameter key AR; 45 = angle value.
AZ30; AZ = parameter key AZ; 30 = angle value.
Angular bore represented by a rectangle

If the angular bore is represented by a rectangle, the diameter is given by the length of the first
side, the one between corners 1 and 2 (ref. A, following figures), and the depth is given by the
length of the second side, the one between corners 2 and 3 (ref. B, following figures).
The angle of inclination is between the second side and the positive X axis, similarly to the CNI
formalism. In this case the corners of the rectangle must be drawn in the correct order. If the angle
AZ is other than zero, this must be specified in the layer.
To specify the side of the rectangle that represents the diameter, it is possible to use a line to be
drawn on this side (see figure 239).
Figure 238: Definition of the diameter of an inclined rectangular bore using the order of corners.
3 4
4 B 1
2 A 3
A
1 2
B
Figure 239: Definition of the diameter of an inclined rectangular bore using a line.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

319
19.2.3 How to represent cuts

A cut is represented geometrically by a line. The layer associated with the line is used to specify
not only the type of machining operation and the face on which it is carried out, but also the cut
depth and other technological parameters.
If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be zero.
The BIESSE formalism can therefore also be used to manage cuts on the side faces.
Example:
To create a cut applied to face 2, depth 15 mm and width 2 mm, associate the following layer
TCHW2B3D1500TH0200 to the drawing:
B3; B = parameter key Work; 3 = identifies the cut.
TH0200; TH = parameter key Thickness; 200 = identifies the value, i.e. 2 mm.
19.2.4 How to represent a milling operation

A milling operation can be represented geometrically by lines, curves, circles and closed or open
polygonal lines.
The layer associated with the geometric elements is used to specify not only the type of machining
operation, but also the milling depth and other technological parameters (tool lowering speed, tool
type, etc.). If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be zero.
Example:
To create a milling operation on face 1 depth 10 mm, associate layer TCHW1B1D1000 to the
drawing:
B2; B = parameter key Work; 1 = identifies the milling.
When creating a drawing that is to be used to carry out machining operations, if every geometric
element in the drawing is to be given specific technological data for milling, associate a different
layer with each element, for example TCHW0B1DP1000 ref. B, TCHW0B1PT1 ref. C,
TCHW0B1DP2000 ref. D. To ensure that all the geometric elements in the drawing form part of the
320 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

same milling operation, associate a single layer with the whole drawing, for example
TCHW0B1DP1000 ref. A.
A B C
The BIESSE formalism can also be used to manage milling operations on the side faces.
19.2.5 Using blocks

Blocks can only be used to represent bores. For a block to be recognised as a bore it is necessary
to enter information on the diameter, depth, tool characteristics, etc. in the symbols section of the
BIESSE format DXF file.
Figure 240: Definition of symbols in the software settings (setup)
The block must be drawn directly on the destination face; the face must be specified in the layer.
It is not possible to draw a block on face 0 of the panel and then specify in the layer that the bore is
on another face.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

321
Unit of measurement
It is possible to import DXF files expressed using the following units of measurement:
millimetres;
inches.
If the geometric data are expressed in millimetres, the unit of measurement for the data in the layer
must be millimetres. If the geometric data are expressed in inches, the unit of measurement for the
data in the layer must be inches. The two units of measurement must not be used simultaneously.
The blocks are an exception to this, and follow the rule whereby if the units of measurement in the
drawing in which the block is used are expressed in inches, the values for ‘Diameter’ and ‘Depth’
set in the setup program must be such that:
the value assigned to the diameter is expressed in millimetres,
the value assigned to the depth is expressed in inches.
According to the unit of measurement used it will be necessary to specify a certain number of
decimal figures. The following table summarises the various situations.
Unit of Dimension expressed in the layer Number of compulsory

measurement decimal figures
Millimetres Depth 2
Millimetres Thickness 2
Millimetres Diameter 2
Millimetres Face height 2
Millimetres Pocket depth 2
Millimetres Working speed 0
Millimetres Descent 0
Inches Depth 4
Inches Thickness 4
Inches Diameter 4
Inches Face height 4
Inches Pocket depth 4
Inches Working speed 2
Inches Descent 2
322 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

19.3 “CNI DXF” type formalism

This paragraph explains how to associate each element in the drawing created using a generic
CAD with layers, so that they can be imported correctly to the Editor application software, using
the setting CNI DXF (see “How to set the formalism” on page 328).
The layers are “levels” present in the CAD that allow one drawing to be separated from another,
and each layer can be named by inserting keys (consult the table in paragraph “Personalising
layer keys”) and numbers. The operation to be carried out thus relates to the procedure used to
name the layer in such a way that the drawing associated with it will be interpreted correctly.
The keys indicated in the examples for the “CNI DXF” type formalism help explain
how to generate the layer syntax and are reported in table 2, page 323.
Due to the fact that they can be personalised, the keys reported in the Setup table
may not correspond to those listed in table 2.
Personalising layer keys

In order to personalise the layer keys, display card DXF Definition of Setup. By default, each
parameter in the table corresponds to a key.
Table 2: List of table parameters to which a key must be associated for insertion in the layer syntax of the DXF
files when needing to store geometric and technological data in the files interpreted by the system during
import. The keys indicated as examples are the default keys displayed in the Setup table.
PARAMETERS Keys
Panel Key indicating the piece (e.g. PANEL).
Cut Key indicating the cutting operation (e.g. BLADE).
Electrospindle Key indicating the milling operations (e.g. MILL).
Boring side 1 Key indicating the horizontal boring on side 1 (e.g. SIDE1).
Vertical Boring Key indicating the vertical boring on side 0 (e.g. VERTICAL).
Angular Boring Key indicating the inclined boring operations (e.g. BORESA).
Point Key indicating the decimal separator (e.g. K).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

323
PARAMETERS Keys
Disable groove (Z) Keys for indicating whether to consider the co-ordinate Z of
the machining/geometry indicated in the imported DXF layer
or not. The values to be input are:
0 = the Z co-ordinate is considered and is seen as position of
translation of the surface to be worked with respect to the
main piece surface.
1 = the Z co-ordinate is not considered.
19.3.1 How to represent the piece

The piece must be represented geometrically by a rectangle or the multi-line command. The
dimensions along the X and Y axes are provided directly by the geometry, whereas the thickness
must be entered in the layer associated with the rectangle.
If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be zero.
Example:
To draw a panel with dimensions 1000 x 300 x 30.20 (mm), it will be necessary to associate a
rectangle 1000 mm wide and 300 mm high with the layer PANEL30K20(see table 2, page 323).
Generic Face
The concept of generic face does not exist in the CNI formalism.
19.3.2 How to represent bores

Bores can be represented in two different ways:
by a circle used to represent a vertical bore, to be machined on face 0 or on face 5 of the
piece.
by a rectangle or a closed polygonal line to be drawn on face 0, used to represent bores to be
machined with the horizontal spindle on the side faces of the piece.
324 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

Vertical bore represented by a circle

The vertical bore, which can be machined on face 0 or on face 5 of the piece, must be represented
by a circle, which must be drawn inside the rectangle representing the face required.
The diameter of the bore is given by the diameter of the circle, whereas the depth must be
specified in the layer. If the depth is not specified it will be taken to be zero.
The bore application point coincides with the centre of the circle.
Example:
To create a vertical bore of depth 15 mm, associate layer VERTICA15 to the bore drawing (see
table 2, page 323).
Horizontal bore represented by a rectangle

When a bore is created using a rectangle, the diameter and bore depth are obtained from the
geometry. The diameter is indicated by the length A of segment D (figure 234) parallel to segment
C (figure 234) on face 0 which represents face 1 on which the bore is to be machined, whereas the
depth is indicated by the length of segment B (figure 234) perpendicular to segment C (figure 234).
The point of application is given by the mid-point of the segment representing the bore diameter.
Figure 234 shows a rectangle drawn on side 0 of the piece, to be interpreted as a bore to be
machined in side 1 of the piece. Figure 235, on the contrary, shows how this bore is interpreted.
To indicate the point at which the bore must be machined, type the value of the distance between
the bore and the top side of the face in the string for the layer associated with the bore rectangle. If
this value is not set, the bore will be considered by default to be positioned half way down the
panel thickness.
Should you wish to apply a milling groove on the piece within which to machine a bore, the milling
groove is represented by the distance (ref. A, figure 236) between the bore application point and
side 1 (ref. B, figure 236) of face 0.
Examples
To drawing a rectangle that represents a horizontal bore to apply to face 1 of the piece at a
distance of 20 mm from corner 1 of this face, associate layer SIDE120 to the rectangle (se
table 2, page 323).
To drawing a rectangle representing a horizontal bore to apply to face 1, half of the thickness
of the piece, associate layer SIDE1 to the rectangle (see table 2, page 323).
Angular bore
The CNI type formalism can only be used to manage “AR” rotations of the spindle axis on the X-Y
axis, and not “AZ” inclinations of the spindle axis of rotation with respect to the plane X, Y (i.e.
inclination of the spindle in space).
It is thus possible to create bores on side faces (ref. A figure below) by rotating the axis of the
spindle on plane X, Y.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

325
Figure 241
In this case, the diameter of the bore is given by the length of the first side, the one between
corners 1 and 2 (see ref. A in the figure below) and the depth is given by the length of the second
side, the one between corners 2 and 3 (see ref. B in the figure below). The angle of inclination is
between the second side and the positive X axis. It is therefore necessary to draw the corners of
the rectangle in the correct order.
Figure 242
4 B
2
A
1
19.3.3 How to represent cuts

A cut is represented geometrically by a line. The layer associated with the line can be used to
specify both the type of machining operation and the cut depth. If the depth is not specified it will
be assumed to be 0.
Cuts on side faces are not managed.
326 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

19.3.4 How to represent milling operations

A milling operation can be represented geometrically by lines, curves, closed polygonal lines, open
polygonal lines and dots. The dot is generally used to specify the co-ordinates for the start of the
milling operation.
The layer associated with the geometric elements is used to specify both the type of machining
operation and the milling depth. If the depth is not specified it will be assumed to be 0.
When creating a drawing that is to be used to carry out machining operations, if every geometric
element in the drawing is to be given specific technological data for milling, associate a different
layer with each element (ref. B, C, D). To ensure that all the geometric elements in the drawing
form part of the same milling operation, associate a single layer with the whole drawing (ref. A).
A B C
The CNI type formalism does not manage milling operations on side faces.
19.3.5 Using blocks

Blocks can only be used to represent bores. To enable a block to be recognised as a bore, the
values for diameter, depth and tool type must have been entered in the software settings (setup).
Figure 243: Definition of symbols in the software settings (setup)
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

327
A block indicating a bore on a side face must have a layer specifying that face. Management is
totally similar to that of horizontal bores represented using a rectangle.
Unit of measurement
It is possible to import DXF files expressed using the following units of measurement:
millimetres;
inches.
If the geometric data are expressed in millimetres, the unit of measurement for the data in the layer
must be millimetres. If the geometric data are expressed in inches, the unit of measurement for the
data in the layer must be inches. The two units of measurement must not be used simultaneously.
The blocks are an exception to this, and follow the rule whereby if the units of measurement in the
drawing in which the block is used are expressed in inches, the values for ‘Diameter’ and ‘Depth’
set in the setup program must be such that:
the value assigned to the diameter is expressed in millimetres,
the value assigned to the depth is expressed in inches.
19.4 How to set the formalism

To define the type of formalism to be applied to imported files, run the Editor application software,
select the menu File and the option Settings..., or the button provided on the tool bar. Click on the
DXF Definition card.
In the data field Active type select the item BiesseWorks DXF for the BIESSE type formalism or the
item CNI DXF for the CNI type formalism.
Make sure that the keys indicated in the table below correspond with the ones used in the DXF file
to be imported.
328 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a721k0004.fm140605

The following chapter describes the procedures necessary to use machining programs with
extensions CID, DXF and BPP, allowing them to be run on the machine. These machining
programs can be run individually or using a work list. The job list is a table that is used to prepare a
sequence of programs to be used to run the machining operations on a pre-set number of pieces.
Program running phases relate to creation of the ISO files, creation of the job list and use of the
machine during program suspensions to carry out any movement of the piece on the work table.
20.1 Creating ISO files using BatchRun

In order for the files to be executed they must be processed. The operation can be performed
using the bar button Tools in the Editor application or the utility BatchRun. For a detailed
description of this utility, see chapter 3.
To execute files with extension BPP, the creation of an ISO file is not necessary.
Default settings
To define the BatchRun default data, click on .
Figure 244: dialogue box Settings (ALT+S)
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

329
In the field File extensions that can be processed, define the types of file to be imported for
processing and creating of an ISO file with the same name. Enable or disable the boxes that
correspond to the type of file required.
Enable the marker check box Show date of creation and last modification to display the box
with the job creation date and modification date alongside the job area.
Enable the markers box Show CAM buttons to view the CAM buttons .
In the data field Dxf key file, define the file with extension LAY to be used as reference for the
imported DXF files. This file contains the keys to be used to read the layers associated with
the DXF file geometries. If DXF files created using a CNI formalism other than the one defined
in the Setup card DXF Definition are imported, the system uses the setting defined in this field.
If even this setting is not correct it will be necessary to associate a LAY with each file (see
“Importing dxf files” on page 333), otherwise it will not be possible to interpret the file.
To store the LAY file, click on the adjacent search button and select the file required.
In the field Piece data, define the default data for certain panel characteristics, only if they are
not mentioned in the imported BPP files.
Enable the marker box Add extension to name of iso files generated by DXF and CID if it is
necessary to generate the ISO file while keeping the acronym DXF or CID in the name.
For example, by enabling the box, the Milling.CID file is renamed during the conversion with
the insertion of an underscore between name and acronym (Milling_CID.ISO). To leave the
name unaltered and only changing the extension, disable the box.
Saving data
Click button to store the data without closing down BatchRun.
Click button to store the data and close down BatchRun.
File processing procedure

1. Create a new job to be associated with a number of files to be processed (see “Job” on page
332)
1. In the Output settings box, select the name of the machine being used, which must be the
same as the one in the Setup User card. Use the search button to find the path to be used to
store the ISO files, if you wish to use a path other than the default one indicated in the field
adjacent to the machine name.
2. In the Subfolder field, write the name of the sub folder in which to save the ISO files, which is
created and stored in the directory defined in the preceding field. This setting is optional and
may be useful for splitting up files grouped together in each job, saving them in different
subdirectories in order to speed up the search for the processed files.
3. Carry out the operations required within the import area. The following operations are
possible:
330 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

• Import of DXF, CID or BPP files; paragraph “Procedure for import of files to be processed”
on page 333.
• Modification of required file data, piece data and variables; paragraph “Modifying imported
files” on page 334.
• Creation of copies of files; paragraph “Creating copies of files” on page 334.
• Deletion of files; paragraph “Deleting imported files” on page 334.
• Optimisation of files required; paragraph “Optimising and simulating imported files” on page
334.
• Simulation of files required; paragraph “Optimising and simulating imported files” on page
334.
• Processing of single files; paragraph “Processing the selected file” on page 334.
• Definition of keys for DXF files; paragraph “Default settings” on page 329.
4. Enable the option button Process all to process all the files in the import area. Enable the
option button Process selected files to process selected files in the import area only.
5. Click on , to start processing the files and creation of the ISO files. The second page of the
application will be displayed, containing the list of files to be processed. The files being
processed are marked in yellow, those that have already been processed correctly are marked
in green, whereas those for which processing has not been successful are marked in red.
When the file processing operation has been completed, click on to return to the main
page. To terminate processing, click on .
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

331
Job
The term “job” is used to indicate a work group used to hold the files to be processed, so that they
can be recognised and distinguished from others.
For example, the same files may be imported to various jobs, to which a specific name is given
(figure 245), so as to distinguish various types of machining operation. In this case, the files in
each job must be saved in different folders, otherwise during processing the ISO file obtained from
one of the files with the same name present in various jobs would be overwritten, as it is not
possible to have two ISO files with the same name in the same folder.
Figure 245
When the files are processed, the sub folders defined in the field Output settings will be created in
the directory set in field Subfolder (see figure below).
Figure 246
Creating a job
To create a job, press and rename the job (see “Renaming a job” on page 333). The job
created must always be associated with the name of a machine (figure 245). Failure to do this will
make it impossible to save BatchRun; information is displayed by means of an error message, in
which the operator is requested to associate a machine to the job in question.
The jobs created are added after the existing ones, but their order can be changed and they can
be moved using the drag and drop method.
332 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

Renaming a job
To rename a job, select it and press the F2 key on the PC keyboard or button , or alternatively
click twice with the left mouse button. Type the new name and press ENTER on the keyboard.
Deleting a job
To delete a job, select it and press CANC on the keyboard or the quick menu option, or
alternatively click on .
Disabling a job
To disable a job, so that the files it contains are not processed, click with the mouse to remove the
marker in the marker box alongside the name of the job.
Procedure for import of files to be processed

To import the files, click on button and follow the suggestions provided below:
To import the contents of a whole folder, find the folder that contains the files to be imported
and type the code “*.*” in the field provided.
To import certain files only, for example files with the extension DXF, type the code “*.DXF” in
the field provided.
To import different files, select them by pressing holding the SHIFT key on the keyboard.
A single BatchRun job cannot contain two files with the same name, so that if files that are already
present are imported a message will be displayed allowing a copy to be made. On the contrary, a
number of different jobs can contain identical files, but for each job it will be necessary to create a
sub folder in which to store the processed filed (figure 245).
Importing dxf files

In the case of DXF files, check that the correct LAY file has been defined in the BatchRun dialogue
box Settings (ALT+S), and if this is not the case associate each file with a LAY manually (see
“Default settings” on page 329) by clicking on .
For example, if CNI DXF type has been set as the current key in the Setup DXF Definition card
and in the BatchRun dialogue box Settings (ALT+S) and you wish to import a DXF file created
using BiesseWorks DXF type keys, it will be necessary to associate the correct LAY to the file to
be imported, otherwise it will not be possible to interpret the file.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

333
Modifying imported files

The imported files can be modified, that is to say it is possible to access and modify data relating to
variables and the panel.
To modify data relating to the panel, select the file required and press . The modifications
made to the panel will not change the file, as they are simply temporary modifications that are
stored by BatchRun.
To modify data relating to variables, select the file required and press . The variables can
only be modified: it is not possible to eliminate them or create new ones. The modifications
made to the variables will have no effect on the file, as they are simply temporary
modifications that are stored by BatchRun.
When the panel or variable data in a file is modified, the file is not actually changed, so that if it is
opened using the Editor application software it will still show the settings entered when it was
created. The modifications will only become effective if they are made using the Editor, which
interacts with BatchRun.
Creating copies of files

To create a copy of one or more files, select the file/s to copy. If more than one file is to be copied,
select them using the SHIFT key on the keyboard, then press and . The file is created with
the same name and the addition of the symbol “_#” followed by a progressive number.
Deleting imported files

To delete files from the import area, select one or more files (using the SHIFT key if necessary)
and press .
Optimising and simulating imported files

To optimise a single file from the import area, select it and press . This operation may be useful
to check whether or not the imported file is correct and therefore whether it can be processed.
To simulate a single file from the import area, select it and press .
Processing the selected file

To process a single file from the import area, select it and press .
334 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

20.2 Running the programs and the list

The machining programs can be run singly or using a list. For a detailed description of how to run
a machining program or a job list, consult chapter 21.
To activate the files in DXF format, you are recommended to check that the reading keys of
the layers associated with the geometries correspond with the formalism imposed in the
Active type field on the DXF Definition card of the Setup.
20.3 Restarting the program after a machining

suspension
When a program that contains a machining suspension is run, consult the “User Instruction
manual” for the machine on how to restart machining operations.
20.4 Stop/cancel running of the program

1. Press STOP to stop movement of the axes.
2. Press RESET to cancel running of the program or START to resume running of the program.
If any error messages are displayed in the bar provided, press CLEAR to delete them, after taking
note of the contents of the message.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

335
336 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0043.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
21 Using the XNC
On the machine the part relating to management, axis drive and running of machining operations
is carried out entirely by the integrated XNC. Only certain application softwares (POSITIONS,
LIST, DEBUG) and the Errors window of this software are used (The Positions application
software, Job list, Debug application software) .
21.1 The Positions application software

The POSITIONS application software is used to display the axis co-ordinates, the machine
operating status (manual, automatic), the panel origin, the type of spindle selected and the
percentage override.
Using this application software it is possible to carry out reset, movement and positioning of the
machine axes, command lowering of the operating section to tool-up the machine, and run a single
machining program or a job list.
Figure 247: POSITIONS application software
Description of the application software:

A Menu bar (see “Description of the menu bar”on page 338).
B Axis override (see “Axis override” on page 340).
C Errors present indicator (see “Errors present warning indicator” on page 341).
D Machine status indicator (see “Machine status indicator” on page 341).
E Axis positions box (see “Axis positions box” on page 341).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

337
21 Using the XNC
F Machine environments box (see “Machine environments box” on page 342).

G Command buttons (see “Command buttons” on page 343).
H Information bars (see “Information bars” on page 343).
Description of the menu bar

The following are the menus with a description of their options.
Some of these options may not be enabled, as they may require a suitable password. To
enter the correct level of password, please consult paragraph 4.3 “Password” on page 4.3.
OPTIONS:
CONFIGURATION;
displays the CONFIGURATION window with the current Configuration. To change the current
configuration, type the number corresponding to the new configuration and press Enter (or Return)
on the keyboard, or the Confirm button.
VERSIONS;
displays the versions of the XNC application softwares.
SIMULATION;
used to enable or disable NC simulation state. This state is indicated by the icon .
RESET
select the type of machine reset. There are four types of reset foreseen:
GLOBAL;
CENTRE;
SINGLE;
MANUAL.
MOVEMENTS MODE;
used to display the exact position of the tool installed on an axis of rotation, when working in TCPM
(Tool Center Point Management).
AXES;
the positions displayed refer to the connection point of the spindle or aggregate on which the
tool is fitted.
CARTESIAN;
the positions displayed refer to the position of the end of the tool.
TOOL;
fixes the NC reference system so that the Z axis coincides with the working direction of the
tool (this function is particularly useful when programming inclined bores).
For further information, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
338 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
WINDOWS:
PROGRAM;
displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window used to select the program to be run. The option is
only active in the AUTOMATIC environment with the LIST application software closed.
LIST;
displays the LIST application software. The option is only active in the AUTOMATIC environment.
DEBUG;
displays the DEBUG application software. This is used to debug the program in START. The option
is only active in the AUTOMATIC environment.
ACTIVATE SPINDLES;
displays the ACTIVATE SPINDLES application software. The option is only active in the MANUAL
MOVEMENTS environment. If no spindles are present in the machine, the option ACTIVATE
SPINDLES will never be available.
ERRORS;
displays the ERRORS window to check Errors caused by software malfunctions.
MESSAGES
displays the MESSAGES window containing the messages controlling the machining programs
being run and the PLC program.
ERROR MESSAGES;
displays the window with the messages that the numerical control sends when it encounters a
malfunction in certain of its parts. Some messages may not be visible, as they require a suitable
level password. To enter the correct level of password, please consult paragraph 4.3 “Password”
on page 4.3.
POSITION:
RELATIVE
displays the position for the origin and the spindle selected.
ABSOLUTE;
position between the reference spindle (typically T1) and the machine zero.
RESIDUAL;
difference between the target position and the absolute position, when the axis is controlled.
THEORETICAL;
ideal absolute position in which the axis should be were it to respond immediately to input (speed
data) received from the NC.
REL. THEOR.;
ideal position, for the reference in consideration, in which the axis should be were it to respond
immediately to input (speed data) received from the NC.
TARGET;
absolute final position for the row being run.
REL. TARGET;
final position, for the reference in consideration, for the row being run.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

339
21 Using the XNC
ERROR;
difference between the theoretical position and the absolute position of the axis.
SPEED;
speed at which the axis moves.
MILLIMETRES (INCHES);
displays the positions in the axis positions box according to the unit of measurement selected:
millimetres or inches.
ORIGIN;
displays the list of origins used to select the reference origin.
SPINDLE;
displays the box used to modify the reference spindle.
CENTRE:
This item is only present in software connected to multiple centre machines.
HELP:
Displays the on-line help manual.
Axis override
The axis overrides are boxes used to display the percentage value of axis speeds.
The Axis Override is a tool that is particularly useful when running test boring or profiling
operations to check machining operations. Using the Axis Override it is possible to very the speed
at which the machine axes are moved, using a percentage value with respect to the value set in
the machine data or in the program.
To activate this function, use the “Remote override” knob on the machine axes control button pad
(see the Machine User’s manual provided with the machine).
Spindle override
The spindle overrides are boxes used to display the percentage value of spindle speeds.
To modify the speed, insert suitable instructions in the machining programs or use the “Remote
override knob on the machine axes control button pad (see the Machine User’s manual provided
with the machine).
340 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Errors present warning indicator

The errors present warning indicator has the job of indicating the presence of a generic error. It
normally shows the CNI device; if an error occurs, the CNI device will disappear and an
exclamation mark will be displayed.
Icons Description
No error active.
Active errors present.
NC in “Simulation” status.
Machine status indicator

Indicates the current status of the machine using the icons listed below.
Icons Description
Reset
Manual movement
Positioned movement
Start program
Start cycle from PLC
Stop (program suspended)
Break (programmed suspension)
PLC disabled. Also indicates the absence of certain application softwares necessary
to operate the NC.
Axis positions box

This box contains the names of the axes with their respective positioning values. The reference
spindle, if there is one, is displayed alongside the axis name.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

341
21 Using the XNC
Figure 248
Machine environments box

This box contains the commands used to move the machine.
COMMANDS Description
Used to access the RESET environment and display the type of
machine axes reset enabled from the OPTIONS menu; see
“Resetting the machine axes” on page 157.
When the button is blue this indicates that the environment is
active.
Enables manual movement of the axes see “Manual axis
movement mode” on page 346. When the button is blue this
indicates that the MANUAL MOVEMENTS environment is being
used.
Enables MDI axis movement mode; see “MDI axis movement
mode (positioned)” on page 346. When the button is blue this
indicates that the POSITIONED MOVEMENTS environment is
being used.
Allows access to the AUTOMATIC environment. In this
environment it is possible to search for the single programs to be
run (see “Running single programs”, page 349), control the
programs being run (see “Debug application software”, page
367), and fill in or call up a job list to be run on the machine (see
paragraph “Command buttons” on page 343).
When the button is blue this indicates that the environment is
active.
342 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Command buttons
Each command button, flanked by a reference icon, allows access to an application software and
can only be activated from within the correct environment.
If the button is red this indicates that the application software to which it is connected has been
displayed, although it might not be visible but merely appear as an icon on the Windows
applications bar.
Buttons/icons Description
Displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window, only with the AUTOMATIC
environment active.
Displays the LIST application software, only with the AUTOMATIC
environment active.
Displays the DEBUG application software, only with the AUTOMATIC
environment active.
Displays the Enable Spindles application software, only with the MANUAL
MOVEMENTS environment active.
Information bars
Figure 249
A Shows information relating to:

The code for the main/auxiliary axis selected.
The centre to which the selected axis is connected.
Optionally, a text describing the axis.
The active origin for the centre to which the axis belongs.
The type of position displayed.
B Shows information that varies according to the machine environment being used.
In the MANUAL RESET environment, when the type of machine axes reset is selected, the
centre selected from the menu bar is displayed, along with a message relating to the type of
reset.
In the MANUAL MOVEMENTS environment the slow and fast speed values are shown. In the
POSITIONED MOVEMENTS environment the data item relating to movement of the selected
axis (ref. A, figure 250) and the field used to enter a program row (ref. B, figure 250) are
shown.
In the AUTOMATIC environment the name of the selected program (ref. C figure 250) and the
field used to enter a program row (ref. D, figure 250) are shown.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

343
21 Using the XNC
Figure 250
Information bars quick menu

In the AUTOMATIC environment it is possible to display a quick menu that is used to carry out
certain operations rapidly. To display it, click with the right mouse button on the bar with the
program name.
Figure 251
Description of the quick menu options

EDIT; starts the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application. The BiesseWorks Editor application is
only started if the selected file displayed in the information bar has one of the extensions DXF, CID
and BPP.
DRAW; starts the BiesseWorks Simulator for programs with extension DXF, CID and BPP, or the
XNC graphic window for programs with other extensions.
SUCTION CUPS; starts the WorkTableTooling application, for programs with extension DXF, CID
and BPP, or the XNC Tooling System for programs with other extensions.
OPTIMISE; optimises the selected machining program. Programs with the extensions DXF, CID
and BPP are optimised with the BiesseWorks optimiser.
344 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
PRINT; prints the program. For further information, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
PARAMETERS; displays the dialogue box used to create or modify the variables. When the quick
menu is displayed on a file with extension BPP the dialogue box Program variables - [%1] will be
displayed.
RESET PIECE COUNTER; resets the values in the fields in column COUNT.
PANEL; displays the dialogue box used to create or modify the piece parameters. When the quick
menu is displayed on a file with extension BPP the dialogue box Piece variables will be displayed.
21.2 Machine axes reset

Resetting is a procedure that serves to bring the axes to a position known to the NC, so that it can
calculate their movements correctly. This position is established during testing of the machine,
taking the absolute machine origin as a reference point.
Carry out the reset after starting the software or when an error message appears requesting that
you do so.
1. In the OPTIONS menu, select the item RESET and one of the following options: GLOBAL,
CENTRE, SINGLE, MANUAL (see “The Positions application software”, page 337).
2. Press START to carry out the reset operation required. Before proceeding make sure that
there is nothing liable to obstruct normal movement of the axes.
Description of options
GLOBAL; used to carry out automatic reset of all the axes.
CENTRE; used to carry out simultaneous reset of all the axes in the selected centre.
SINGLE; used to carry out automatic reset of the selected axis.
MANUAL RESET; used to carry out a reset of each axis singly. Select an axis, for example the X
axis, press Enter (or double-click on the axis), enter the reset position in the window provided and
press START. In this case the axis does not move, as the operation only serves to define the
actual position of the axis manually. The manual reset position for the selected axis is displayed in
the specific information bar (figure 247).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

345
21 Using the XNC
21.3 Moving the machine axes

To move the axes there are two modes available: manual and MDI. Before reading this paragraph,
see paragraph “The Positions application software” on page 337.
Manual axis movement mode

Manual movements of the axes are known as “JOG movements”, because the JOG keys on the
main control panel are used to perform them. Generally speaking this type of movement is used
during preparation of the machine. To carry out this type of movement, proceed as described
below:
1. Select the specific command in the Machine environments box (consult the table on page
342);
2. Select the axis to be moved in the axis positions box. The active axis is indicated by a blue
surround (figure 248).
3. Use the JOG keys to carry out the movement. For a detailed description of the JOG keys, see
the “User Instruction manual” for the machine. To define the speed of the axis during
movement, see paragraph “Variation of the axis manual movement speed”.
Variation of the axis manual movement speed

To set the speed of manual axis movements, select the axis to be moved in the box and press
Enter, to display the data dialogue box. Define the values in fields Slow speed and Fast speed.
The first of these fields defines the slow speed for movements carried out using the JOG keys,
while the second field defines the fast speed used for movements carried out using the JOG keys
plus the VEL key (for a description of the following keys, see the “User Instruction manual” for the
machine). The data entered in this dialogue box will not modify the default data, and will only
remain active until the machine is switched off.
By default these items will take the values indicated in the corresponding machine data, and will be
displayed in the specific information bar (figure 249).
Modification of these data items will not make any change to the machine data, as the
modifications will only be valid until the next time the machine data are saved (when this happens
the original data will be restored) or until the next time the NC is turned off.
The percentage variation in the set movement speed of the axes can be effected when needed by
rotating the machine OVERRIDE.
MDI axis movement mode (positioned)

The MDI axis movement mode is known as “positioned”, because it allows the position to which
the axis must move to be entered.
There are three types of positioned movement:
1. “Single step” type
2. “Positioned” type
346 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
3. “Step” type
“Single step” type

The movement is carried out using a programming row that can be written in field B shown in
figure 250. Press START to perform the inserted row.
“Positioned” type
Movement of the selected axis is carried out by setting the position required and pressing START.
To set the position, press ESC on the keyboard, double-click on the box for the axis required and
type the value into the Target position field.
To define the reference spindle, click on the following button.
The name of the reference spindle is shown in the Spindle field.
For a description of the remaining fields in the window, see paragraph ““Step” type”.
“Step” type
It is used to move the selected axis with the JOG and VEL keys, but with definition in millimetres of
the length of each step and the speed of the axis.
These values are set using the fields provided in the window described in paragraph ““Positioned”
type”, or displaying the window illustrated in figure 252.
Figure 252: AXIS DATA window
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

347
21 Using the XNC
To display the window, double-click on the axis required.
Description of fields:
Movement; used to define the value in millimetres of each movement made using the JOG keys.
Extended Movement; used to define the value in millimetres of each movement made using the
JOG keys, plus the VEL key.
Speed; used to define the value of the axis speed during each movement.
21.4 Moving the operating section elements

Movement of the operating section parts may be of use to facilitate installation of tools or to carry
out maintenance operations. To carry out this operation, proceed as follows:
1. Enable the MANUAL MOVEMENTS environment in the machine environments box.
2. Select the menu WINDOWS and the option SPINDLES or the icon .
3. Select the menu SPINDLES to develop the list of the spindle type.
4. Enable the item VERTICAL to view the vertical spindles (T) in the boring unit, the item
HORIZONTAL to view the horizontal spindles (TH) in the boring unit, or the item ROUTERS to
view the electrospindles (TP). The button for the active type will turn red.
5. Select the spindles required to activate their pneumatic drive.
6. Carry out the tooling or maintenance operations.
7. Restore the lowered spindles to their original position, by selecting them again.
8. Close the SPINDLE ACTIVATION window by selecting the item CLOSE.
It is recommended that you use this procedure after turning the Tooling selector key,
so as to cut off power to the machine and carry out tooling or maintenance
operations in full safety.
348 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
21.5 Running single programs

To run single programs, display the AUTOMATIC environment by clicking on the command
provided in the machine environments box (see paragraph “Machine environments box” on page
342), call up the program and select one of the two running modes: Automatic or Manual.
The BPP format file, which for a number of reasons cannot be optimised, is not executed.
Whenever an attempt is made to execute the file, the system produces an error message.
Procedure used to call up a single program to be run

1. Check that the LIST application software has been closed and click on command button
. The SELECT PROGRAMS window will be displayed (figure 253) in which it is possible
to find the program to be run on the machine.
2. Select the program required and press Confirm. The name of the program selected will appear
in the POSITIONS application software information bar.
3. Run the program in Automatic or Semiautomatic mode.
To disable the command button and close the SELECT PROGRAMS window, press Cancel
(ref. E figure 253).
How to run the program in Automatic mode

Running the program in Automatic mode is a one-off type of running, that is to say one that is
carried out in a single operation. The machine runs the whole of the program and only suspends
machining operations if it encounters suspensions in the program itself.
To carry out machining operations in Automatic mode, call up the single program and press
START on the main control panel.
To run the program via the DEBUG application software, proceed as follows:
1. call up the single program (see “Procedure used to call up a single program to be run”, page
349).
2. display the DEBUG application software and press to enable Automatic mode.
3. press START on the main control panel. If the program to be run is not a file with extension
ISO it will first be optimised and then run. If the program to be run is already an ISO file, having
been transformed previously, for instance using BatchRun, it will be run immediately.
The ISO strings area in the DEBUG application software will display the content of the single
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation.
For the procedure used to load and lock the panel on the work table, consult the “User Instruction
manual” for the machine.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

349
21 Using the XNC
How to run the program in Semiautomatic mode

Running the program in Semiautomatic mode is a running method that is controlled and guided by
the operator. To use this method, proceed as follows:
1. call up the single program (see “Procedure used to call up a single program to be run”, page
349).
2. display the DEBUG application software and press .
3. press START on the main control panel to start step-by-step machining of the program. If the
program to be run is not a file with extension ISO it will first be optimised and then run. If the
program to be run is already an ISO file, having been transformed previously, for instance
using BatchRun, it will be run immediately.
4. to move on to the next step in the program, press START again; repeat this operation until the
machining operation has been completed.
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation in
detail.
To check the types of parameter used in each program row to be run, use the PARAMETERS field
in the Break/Parameters Box, typing the parameter codes separated by a space. During the
machining operation the name and value of the parameter in the row being executed will be
displayed in the PARAMETER information bar.
Description of the SELECT PROGRAMS dialogue box

Figure 253: SELECT PROGRAMS dialogue box
A Tool bar and select directory button (see “Tool bar and select directory button”, page 351).
B Directory box; indicates the name of the directory selected.
C Central area; displays a list of files and directories.
D Names box; highlights the name of the file selected in the central area.
E Command buttons (see “Command buttons”, page 352).
350 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Tool bar and select directory button

Buttons Description
Displays the next directory up.
Updates files in the visible directory.
Displays the following tool bar:
Displays an additional tool bar, for a description of which please see the XNC
on-line manual.
Used to select the drive containing the files to be used:
Disk A; i.e. the floppy-disk inserted in the NC drive.
NC; i.e. the NC hard disk.
The name of the remote PC connected to the NC.
Buttons Description
Starts the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application. The BiesseWorks Editor
application will only be started if a file with one of the extensions DXF, CID and
BPP has been selected.
Optimises the machining program selected. Programs with the extensions DXF,
CID and BPP are optimised with the BiesseWorks optimiser.
Starts the BiesseWorks Simulator, for programs with extension DXF, CID and
BPP, or the XNC graphic window, for programs with other extensions.
Starts the WorkTableTooling application, for programs with extension DXF, CID
and BPP, or the XNC Tooling System, for programs with other extensions.
Prints the selected program. For further information, please consult the on-line
XNC manual.
Makes a copy of the selected file. For further information, please consult the on-
line XNC manual.
Pastes the copy made of the file. For further information, please consult the on-
line XNC manual.
Deletes the selected file from the directory. For further information, please consult
the on-line XNC manual.
Renames the selected file.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

351
21 Using the XNC
Command buttons
Buttons Description
Previous Page button. Used to scroll through the list of files.
Next Page button. Used to scroll through the list of files.
Confirm button. Displays the selected file in the POSITIONS application software
information bar and closes the SELECT PROGRAMS window.
Cancel button. Closes the SELECT PROGRAMS window.
21.6 Job list

The work list is a file containing a list of machining programs (BPP, ISO, DXF, CID) arranged in
sequential order for transmitting to the machine for execution. In every job list it is possible to
modify parameters in each of the programs. As these modifications have no effect on the structure
of the source file, they will only apply within the list itself.
All the files inserted in the work list must contain technological information in order
to be executed. For example, documents in DXF format containing vectorial graphics
only cannot be executed.
To display the LIST application software, click on the command button .
Figure 254: LIST application software

A Machine command mode indicator.
B Menu bar. See paragraph “Description of the menu bar” on page 354.
352 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
C List operation mode indicator. The job list can be run in one of two modes, NORMAL and
SELF-EXPIRING.
D Program (file) insertion table. See paragraph “Insert programs table” on page 356.
E Command buttons. See paragraph “Command buttons” on page 357.
F File status indicator. See paragraph “File status indicator” on page 357.
G Information bars. See paragraph “Information bars” on page 357.
LIST application software quick menu

To display the quick menu, select the row required in the table and click with the right mouse
button.
Description of the quick menu options:
EDIT; opens the program selected using the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application, if they have
been started. Only files with the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are opened with the BiesseWorks
Editor application.
DRAW; displays the XNC or BiesseWorks Simulator graphic window. Files with extension DXF,
CID and BPP are only simulated if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.
SUCTION CUPS; starts the XNC Tooling System or the WorkTableTooling application, according
to the program selected. For files with extension DXF, CID and BPP tooling of the table will only be
started if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.
OPTIMISE; optimises the selected machining program. Files with the extensions DXF, CID and
BPP are only optimised if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running (see “Optimising the
programs in the list”, page 365).
PRINT; prints the program. For further information, please consult the on-line XNC manual. Files
with the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are only printed if the BiesseWorks Editor application is
running.
INSERT; inserts an empty row in the list under the one in which the text cursor is located.
DELETE; deletes the row in the list on which the cursor is positioned, or the block of rows
highlighted using the function MARK.
COPY; makes a copy of the row in the list on which the cursor is positioned, or the block of rows
MARK; used to select one or more rows in the list. To select a number of rows, mark the first row
and the last one. This operation is used to delete or copy rows.
PARAMETERS; displays the dialogue box used to create or modify variables (see “Modifying
variables for a program inserted in the list”, page 363). If the quick menu is displayed with a file
with extension BPP, this option is only enabled if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.
PANEL; displays the BiesseWorks Editor application dialogue box Piece variables, if a file with the
extension BPP has been selected and the BiesseWorks Editor application is running. This option
is only enabled when files with extension BPP are selected (see “Modifying panel data”, page
363).
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

353
21 Using the XNC
Description of the menu bar

Some of these options may not be enabled, as they may require a suitable password. To
enter the correct level of password, please consult paragraph 4.3 “Password” on page 4.3.
FILE:
OPEN;
displays the SELECT LISTS window to open a job list.
INSERT;
displays the SELECT LISTS window to insert the contents of another job list into the current job
list.
SAVE;
saves the current job list by overwriting it.
SAVE AS;
displays the SELECT LISTS window to create a copy of the current job list with a different name.
PROGRAM;
displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window to select a program to be inserted in the current job
list.
LIST;
displays the SELECT LISTS window to select a job list to be inserted in the current job list.
PRINT;
prints the current job list.
CLOSE;
closes the LIST application software.
EDIT:
INSERT;
inserts an empty row in the insert programs table under the one in which the text cursor is located.
DELETE;
deletes the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is positioned, or the block of rows
COPY;
makes a copy of the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is positioned, or the block
of rows highlighted using the function MARK.
MARK;
used to select one or more rows in the insert programs table. To select a number of rows, mark the
first row and the last one. This operation is used to delete or copy rows.
FIND;
enables the find and replace words function, which is only valid in the column of the insert
programs table on which the cursor is positioned.
354 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
RESET PIECE COUNTER;

resets the values in the fields in column COUNT.
DELETE ALL;
deletes all the rows in the insert programs table.
PARAMETERS;
displays the dialogue box used to create or modify variables (see “Modifying variables for a
program inserted in the list”, page 363).
PANEL;
displays the BiesseWorks Editor application dialogue box Piece variables, if a file with the
extension BPP has been selected and the BiesseWorks Editor application is running (see
“Modifying panel data”, page 363).
SERVICES:
PROGRAM;
develops the following list of options:
EDIT;
opens the program selected using the BiesseWorks or XNC Editor application, if they have
been started. Files with the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are opened with the BiesseWorks
Editor application.
DRAW;
displays the XNC or BiesseWorks Simulator graphic window. Files with extension DXF, CID
and BPP are only simulated if the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.
OPTIMISE;
optimises the selected machining program, if the correct application is running. Files with the
extensions DXF, CID and BPP are only optimised if the BiesseWorks Editor application is
running (see “Optimising the programs in the list”, page 365).
SUCTION CUPS;
starts the XNC Tooling System or the WorkTableTooling application, according to the program
selected. For files with extension DXF, CID and BPP tooling of the table will only be started if
the BiesseWorks Editor application is running.
PRINT;
prints the program. For further information, please consult the on-line XNC manual. Files with
the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are only printed if the BiesseWorks Editor application is
running.
PRINT OPTIONS;
displays the dialogue box used to define advanced printing options. For further information,
please consult the on-line XNC manual.
MODE:
NORMAL;
used to define the mode used to run the job list. In this case it is run row by row until reaching the
instruction END or until reaching an empty row. For further information, please consult the on-line
XNC manual.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

355
21 Using the XNC
SELF-EXPIRING;
used to define the mode used to run the job list. In this case the rows in the list are automatically
deleted after they have been performed. The list stops running when it reaches the instruction
END or an empty row. For further information, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
HELP:
used to display the on-line manual.
Insert programs table

The insert programs table forms the central area of the application software, and is made up of
rows and columns. To scroll from one row of the table to the next or from one column to the next,
use the mouse cursor or the keys on the PC keyboard (ref. A/B, figure 255). To move the text
cursor within a field, using keyboard ALT plus the Arrow keys (ref. A, figure 255).
Figure 255: PC keyboard keys
Description of the table columns:
LABL; used to enter a numeric or alphanumeric string.
PROGRAM; displays the names of the machining programs inserted in the list. For programs
created using the BiesseWorks Editor application, the file extension (BPP) will be displayed along
with the name of the program.
QNTY; used to enter the number indicating how many times the machine must run the program.
COUNT; indicates the count of programs machined. This value is incremental, as it is connected to
the number of times the program row has to be run.
COMMENT; this is used for the input of a simple comment or global parameters and variables
useful for the program (see paragraph “Rules for compiling the COMMENT field”, page 358).
356 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Command buttons
Buttons Description
displays the SELECT PROGRAMS window (figure 253) to select a program to be
inserted in the current job list (see “Inserting files in the list”, page 359).
inserts an empty row in the insert programs table under the one in which the text
cursor is located. For further information, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
deletes the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is positioned, or
the block of rows highlighted using the function MARK. For further information,
please consult the on-line XNC manual.
makes a copy of the row in the insert programs table on which the cursor is
positioned, or the block of rows highlighted using the function MARK. For further
information, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
displays the SELECT LISTS window to select a job list to be inserted in the
current job list. For further information, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
displays the SELECT LISTS window to open a job list (see “Procedure when
opening a job list”, page 358).
saves the current job list by overwriting it (see “Saving the list”, page 364).
displays the dialogue box used to create or modify variables. (see “Modifying
variables for a program inserted in the list”, page 363).
File status indicator

Used to indicate the status of the current job list. The icon depicting a closed safe indicates that the
file has already been saved. The icon depicting an open save indicates that a modification has
been made to the file, so that it needs to be saved.
Information bars
Part in which information on the selected program field is displayed.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

357
21 Using the XNC
Rules for compiling the COMMENT field

Through this field a comment or variables can be input (piece variables or global variables). As far
as the piece variables and the global variables of the BPP files are concerned it is necessary to
observe the following rules:
Unlike the ISO files, the variables for the BPP files must not be included between the dollar
characters($).
The value of the variable must be preceded by the equals sign (=).
E.g.: LPX=300.
To separate one variable from the next it is necessary to use the space.
E.g.: LPX=300 LPY=500.
A point must go before the decimal places.
E.g.: LPZ=30.5.
The value of the variable considered as a string must be marked by two superscripts: one at
the beginning of the string and one at the end.
E.g. MATERIAL=’Beech’.
The list of values must be separated using the semicolon.
E.g.: ORLST=’1;2;3’.
21.7 Procedure when opening a job list

1. Display the LIST application software.
2. Click on the menu FILE and the option OPEN or on the button provided.
3. Select the file required and click on the Confirm button.
For further information on how to use the SELECT LISTS window, please consult the on-line XNC
manual.
21.8 Procedure when filling in a job list

1. Display the LIST application software, which always opens to show the list opened during the
last operation. Select the file menu and type the name of the list in the field provided, or delete
the contents of the list displayed and generate a new file by saving it with a different name, if
you wish to create a new list, or make any modifications and overwrite the work list.
2. Insert the files into the list (see “Inserting files in the list”, page 359). To replace a file in the list
with another one, see paragraph “Replacing a program in the list” on page .359
3. In the column QNTY (figure 256), indicate the number of times the machine has to run the
program.
4. In the column LABL (figure 256) insert the instruction regulating the order in which the single
programs are to be run (see “Using the programming instructions” on page 360).
358 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Figure 256
5. Save the list. To save the list with a different name, see “Saving the list” on page 364; to
overwrite the list, see “Saving modifications to the current list” on page 364.
Within the list it is possible to carry out the following additional operations:
Modify/insert variables in the single programs (see “Modifying variables for a program inserted
in the list”, page 363).
Modify or check data relating to the piece; this operation is only valid for programs with the
extension BPP (see “Modifying panel data”, page 363).
Optimise single programs to check operation (see “Optimising the programs in the list”, page
365).
Inserting files in the list

To insert one or more files in the list, click on , select the file and click on .
For further information on how to use the SELECT PROGRAMS window in the LIST application
software, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
Replacing a program in the list

To replace a program in the list with another one, proceed as follows:
1. Select the program in the list to be replaced.
2. Click on to display the SELECT PROGRAMS window.
3. Select the file and click on .
For further information on how to use the SELECT PROGRAMS window in the LIST application
software, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

359
21 Using the XNC
Using the programming instructions

The following table gives a list and description of the programming instructions and the name of
the list column into which they must be inserted.
Instruction Description Column
; Defining a comment row. LABL
<label> 4 character alphanumeric string. LABL
STOP Used to interrupt the job list being run. LABL
JMP Used to go to a row in the list marked with a label. PROGRAM
This passage takes place while the job list is running.
READ Used to open a file relating to a job list while running LABL
an active list.
WRIT Writes the list being viewed in a file. LABL
_NOR Enables NORMAL list running mode. LABL
_SXG Enables SELF-EXPIRING list running mode. LABL
END Terminates running of the job list. LABL
Instruction “;”
This instruction must be inserted in the LABL column field. The row preceded by this instruction
will not be run and can be used to insert comments. The fields in the row with this instruction can
also be used to insert comments.
Instruction “<label>”
This instruction must be inserted in the LABL column field. A label is an alphanumeric string with a
maximum length of 4 characters. It is used to identify a particular row in association with the
instruction JMP.
Instruction “STOP”
The instruction STOP must be inserted in the LABL column field and determines a stop during
running of the job list. Stoppage due to the presence of the instruction STOP is also known as
“programmed stoppage”.
The instruction can be entered in two different ways:

in the LABL field of the row containing the program name;
LABL PROGRAM QNTY COUN COMMENT

T
... ... ... ... ...
STOP Fori.bpp 4 0
360 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
in the LABL field of an empty row, positioned before the row containing the program to be run.

T
STOP ... ... ... ...
Fori.bpp 4 0
The function is the same; the job list will stop running when it encounters the instruction STOP.
Press the START button to run the program following this instruction the number of times indicated
in the column QNTY. If the QNTY column field does not contain a number, the NC will
automatically set it to 1.
Instruction “JMP”
The instruction JMP must be inserted in the PROGRAM column field and determines a jump, while
the job list is running, to a row marked by a label. Two types of jump are possible:
jump to a row preceding the one containing the instruction JMP;
jump to a row following the one containing the instruction JMP.
The following example shows a jump to a row preceding the one containing the instruction JMP.
T
LBL Fori.bpp 2 0
Tagli.bpp 2 0
JMP LBL 3 0
END
The job list will be run in the following way:
1. the program Fori.bpp will be run twice;
2. the program Tagli.bpp will be run twice;

3. the value in the COUNT column field of the row containing the instruction JMP will be
incremented;
4. the COUNT column fields in the rows containing the programs Fori.bpp and Tagli.bpp are
reset and the program jumps to the row containing the label LBL. The list will stop running
when the numbers in the COUNT and QNTY column fields of the row containing the
instruction JMP are identical.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

361
21 Using the XNC
Instruction “READ”
The instruction READ must be inserted in the LABL column field and is used to run a list inserted
between the rows of the current list.
T
... ... ... ... ...
Tagli.bpp 2 0
READ DistintaAnte 0
This list can be run in two different ways:

if NORMAL running mode is enabled, the instruction READ is used to jump to the list inserted
in the PROGRAM column field (e.g. DistintaAnte, table below), to open it, run it and, after
running it, to stop running, without having any effect on the remaining programs in the current
list (e.g. Fori.bpp and Antine.bpp, table below). In this case it is only possible to insert one
READ instruction.
T
... ... ... ... ...
READ DistintaAnte 0
Fori.bpp 2 0
Antine.bpp 2 0
if SELF-EXPIRING running mode is enabled, the instruction READ is used to explode the list
inserted in the PROGRAM column field, inserting its contents between the rows of the current
list, and to run the whole contents of the current list. In this case it is possible to insert more
than one READ instruction.
Instruction “WRIT”
The instruction WRIT must be inserted in the LABL column field, whereas the name of a job list
must appear in the PROGRAM column field. The instruction WRIT is used to write the list in the
PROGRAM field in a file.
T
... ... ... ... ...
Tagli.bpp 2 0
WRIT DistintaAnte 0
362 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Instruction “_NOR”
The instruction _NOR enables NORMAL running mode. It must be inserted in the LABL column
field, at the start of the block containing the list to be run.
Instruction “_SXG”
The instruction _SXG enables SELF-EXPIRING running mode. It must be inserted in the LABL
column field, at the start of the block containing the list to be run.
Instruction “END”
The instruction END identifies the last row to be run, regardless of the rows that follow it, and it
must be inserted in the LABL column field. This instruction can be used to divide the list into
various blocks, which can be run separately. This function can be replaced by an empty row.
Modifying variables for a program inserted in the list

Within the list it is possible to modify the values of machining program variables. These
modifications do not affect the program itself, but are only stored in the list.
This operation varies according to the type of file selected: BPP or non BPP.
BPP; files with the extension BPP created using the BiesseWorks Editor application. In this
case, select one of these files to display the dialogue box Program variables - [%1] (for a
description of the dialogue box see chapter 16 “Automatic program parameter setting”). The
dialogue box is only displayed if the source file has been created using variables and if the
BiesseWorks Editor application is running, that is to say if it is present in the Windows
applications bar. The values for the variables present in the dialogue box will automatically be
inserted in the COMMENT column field.
Non BPP; files with other extensions, created using other application softwares. In this case,
please consult the on-line XNC manual. The added values will appear in the COMMENT
column field.
To carry out this operation, select the button provided or the menu EDIT and the item
PARAMETERS.
Modifying panel data

Within the list it is possible, by selecting a file, to modify certain program characteristics, that is to
say to modify the panel data. This modification can only be made in BPP files created using the
BiesseWorks Editor application.
To carry out this operation, position the cursor on the row in the table containing the name of the
BPP file required, display the quick menu and click on the item PANEL, or click on the menu EDIT
and the option PANEL.
The dialogue box Piece variables (figure 257) is displayed. For a description of the fields in the
window, see paragraph 12.9 “Creating the document”.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

363
21 Using the XNC
Figure 257
Modifications made to the machining program in the list will have no effect on the program itself,
but will only be stored within the list, and will therefore only be applied within the list itself.
Enable the two-piece simultaneous machining mode

To enable the simultaneous machining of two pieces, insert the required program in the work list,
display dialogue box Piece variables and in field Origins list enter the correct pair of origins (see
machine instructions for use). The simulation and display of the double tooling is only possible
after having inserted the program in the work list.
In this way, it is also possible to run parametric programs with parametric toolings.
Saving the list

To save the job list and create a new file, click on the menu FILE and the option SAVE AS. The
SELECT LISTS window is displayed; type the name of the new list in the field provided and click
on Confirm. The new list name will appear on the LIST application software heading bar.
The icon depicting an open save will be displayed near the left hand corner of the LIST application,
to indicate that it is necessary to save the list.
Saving modifications to the current list

To save modifications made to the current, active job list, click on . The modifications will be
overwritten.
The icon depicting an open save will be displayed near the left hand corner of the LIST application,
to indicate that it is necessary to save the list following a modification.
364 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Optimising the programs in the list

To optimise a program, select it, click on the menu SERVICES and the item PROGRAM >
OPTIMISE, or display the quick menu and click on the item OPTIMISE.
Programs with the extensions DXF, CID and BPP are optimised with the BiesseWorks optimiser. If
the BiesseWorks Editor application is not running, i.e. it is not present on the Windows applications
bar, the operation will not be carried out.
The command OPTIMISE can be used to optimise, save and overwrite files with the extension
ISO.
21.9 Running the job list

The job list can be run in one of the following modes:
Automatic mode;
Semiautomatic mode.
The name of the job list selected is displayed in the POSITIONS application software information
bar.
How to run the job list in Automatic mode

Running the job list in Automatic mode is a one-off type of running, that is to say one that is carried
out in a single operation. The machine runs the whole of the work list and only suspends
machining operations if it encounters suspensions.
To carry out machining operations in Automatic mode, call up the job list and press START on the
main control panel.
To run the job list via the DEBUG application software, proceed as follows:
1. open the LIST application software and call up the list (see “Procedure when opening a job
list”, page 358).
2. display the DEBUG application software and press to enable Automatic mode.
3. press START on the main control panel. If the list contains programs that do not have the
extension ISO they will first be optimised and then run. All programs with extension ISO will be
run immediately without being processed. For this reason, to speed up operations, it is
recommended that you insert ISO files in the list.
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

365
21 Using the XNC
How to run the job list in Semiautomatic mode

Running the job list in Semiautomatic mode is a running method that is controlled and guided by
the operator. To use this method, proceed as follows:
1. open the LIST application software and call up the list (see “Procedure when opening a job
list”, page 358).
2. display the DEBUG application software and press .
3. press START on the main control panel. If the list contains programs that do not have the
extension ISO they will first be optimised and then run. All programs with extension ISO will be
run immediately without being processed.
4. To move on to the next step in the program, press START again; repeat this operation until the
machining operation has been completed.
program being run, allowing the operator to follow each step in the machining operation in
detail.
To check the types of parameter used in each program row to be run, use the DEBUG application
software PARAMETERS field (Break/Parameters Box), typing the parameter codes separated by a
space. During the machining operation the name and value of the parameter in the row being
executed will be displayed in the PARAMETER information bar.
366 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
21.10 Debug application software

In order to be run, the program files must be transformed into files with extension ISO. The
DEBUG application software displays the contents of the ISO files during running of the programs.
When a single machining program or a work list is being run, with this application software
displayed it is possible to check each machining step and intervene if necessary.
Figure 258: DEBUG application software

A Menu bar (see “Menu bar”on page 367).
B Break/Parameters box (see “Break/Parameters box”on page 369).
C Instructions box (see “Instructions box”on page 369).
D ISO strings area (see “ISO strings area”on page 369).
E Accessory command buttons (see “Accessory command buttons”on page 370).
F Instructions relating to axes (see “Instructions regarding the axes”on page 370).
G Information bars (see “Information bars”on page 370).
Menu bar
The following are the menus with a description of their options.
SELECTIONS:
LINE;
displays the window used to define the program row number from which the machining operation
is to start
RESET BREAK;
Deletes the break enabled in the box provided.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

367
21 Using the XNC
ROUTINES; button used to define whether or not to explode the routine* in the program row being
performed, to display its contents in the DEBUG application software (example shown in figure
259).
COMMENTS;
button used to define whether or not to display the comments inserted in the program being run in
the DEBUG application software, i.e. whether or not to display rows that start with “;” (example
shown in figure 259).
Figure 259: example of a comment row containing the routine L=PCDA.
CLOSE;
closes the DEBUG application software. If you exit with breaks still set, the program being run will
still stop when it encounters the breaks.
MODE:
AUTOMATIC;
enables Automatic machining program execution mode.
SEMIAUTOMATIC;
enables Semiautomatic machining program execution mode.
INSTRUCTIONS:
SPEED;
develops a sub menu containing the F instructions.
ACCELERATION;
develops a sub menu containing the E instructions.
ADVANCE;
develops a sub menu containing the II instructions.
CIRCLE/ELLIPSE;
develops a sub menu containing the R, I, J, K instructions.
HELP:
Displays the on-line help manual.
* Routine = this is the name of a sub program or fixed cycle both inserted in a single machining program. The
fixed cycle can be recognised by the fact that it starts with the letter G or P. The routine is carried out using
the instruction (e.g. L=PCDA is a routine that calls up the fixed cycle PCDA, figure 259). For a description of
the ISO instructions that appear in the DEBUG, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
368 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

21 Using the XNC
Break/Parameters box
BREAK N field;
used to suspend running of the program at the row required, typing the row number in the field
and confirming with Enter. The number is the one at the beginning of the row followed by the
letter N (figure 260).
Figure 260
If the program contains a number of rows with the same number, the program will stop at the
first row it encounters.
It is also possible to activate a break (a suspension) within a routine* called up by a program,
by typing the row number and the name of the routine required. The break will be displayed in
the first information bar. The program row highlighted in break status is the one that has
already been performed.
PARAMETERS field;
used to type the name of the parameters, to display their value during running of the program
in Semiautomatic mode.
Instructions box
Used to display the state of the following instructions in real time:
T; instruction relating to spindle activation;

G; modal instruction;
S; instruction relating to spindle rotation speed;
M and KA; instructions relating to the PLC.
ISO strings area

This area displays the ISO instruction strings for the program being run. Display of the comment
strings and routines can be disabled using the command provided in the SELECTIONS menu.
While the machining program is running the Debug rows will gradually change colour as they are
carried out.
For a description of the ISO instructions, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
* Routine = this is the name of a sub program or fixed cycle both inserted in a single machining program. The
fixed cycle can be recognised by the fact that it starts with the letter G or P. The routine is carried out using
the instruction (e.g. L=PCDA is a routine that calls up the fixed cycle PCDA, figure 259). For a description of
the ISO instructions that appear in the DEBUG, please consult the on-line XNC manual.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

369
21 Using the XNC
Accessory command buttons

Buttons Description
Enables Automatic machining program execution mode.
Enables Semiautomatic machining program execution mode.
Deletes the break enabled in the relative box.
Displays the window used to define the number of the program row from which
the machining operation is to start. The number to be entered is at the start of the
row, followed by the letter N.
Instructions regarding the axes

The instructions selected in the INSTRUCTIONS menu items appear. For each menu item the
selected instruction code and value are displayed. The following instructions are visible:
F; instructions relating to speed. FX, FY, FZ, FC are the instructions for independent
movements along each of the axes.
E; instructions relating to acceleration along the path. EX, EY, EZ, EC are the instructions for
independent movements along each of the axes.
II; IX, IY, IZ, IC are the instructions for independent movements along each of the axes.
R, RI, RJ; instructions relating to the radius of the circle.
I, J, K; instructions relating to the ellipse hemicircle and the co-ordinates of the centre.
Information bars
The Active Breaks bar displays the number of the row at which the program has been
suspended.
The Parameters bar displays the status of the parameters, requested in the Parameters Box,
at the moment the program was suspended.
370 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0044.fm140605

Appendices
A Examples
A Examples
This chapter contains a few examples demonstrating some of the techniques used to create
machining programs. The examples are explained using practical examples which include simple
boring and milling machining operations.
A.1 General boring program

Suppose we need to run a general boring program using a Ø 8 mm tool and following the
procedure explained below.
Produce the drawing as follows:

1. Create a new document and define the dimensions of the reference panel.
LPX = 810
LPY = 320
LPZ = 30
2. Carry out the first vertical boring:

X = 157
Y = lpy-64
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
Y step = 32
No.Repeats = 2
3. Carry out the second vertical boring:
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

373
A Examples
X = 157
Y = 37
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
Y step = 32
No.Repeats = 2
4. Carry out the third vertical boring:

X = lpx-64*3
Y = lpy-24.5
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 3
5. Carry out the fourth vertical boring:
X = 157+32
Y = 37
Diameter = 5
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 9
6. Carry out the fifth vertical boring:

X = 157+32
Y = lpy-32*2
Diameter = 5
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 9
7. Carry out the sixth vertical boring:

X = 195
Y = 160
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
8. Carry out the seventh vertical boring:
X = 195+346
Y = 160
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
9. Carry out the eighth vertical boring:
X = 195+346+224
Y = 160
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
10. Carry out the ninth vertical boring:

X = 157
Y = 37+32+96
374 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

A Examples
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
11. Carry out the first horizontal boring:

CRN = 1
SIDE = 1
X = 54
Y=
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 2
12. Carry out the second horizontal boring:

CRN = 1
SIDE = 1
X = 54+32+160
Y=
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
X step = 32
No.Repeats = 2
13. Carry out the third horizontal boring:
CRN = 1
SIDE = 4
X = 35
Y=
Diameter = 8
Depth = 10
X step = 64
No.Repeats = 5
14. Check that the machine has Ø 8 mm bits mounted.
The following result is obtained:
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=157 Y=LPY-64 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpY DX=0 NRP=2
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=157 Y=37 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpY DX=0 NRP=2
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

375
A Examples
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=LPX-64*3 Y=LPY-24.5 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DX=63 DY=0 NRP=3
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=157+32 Y=37 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=5 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=9
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=157+32 Y=LPY-32*2 Z=0 DP=0 DIA=5 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=9
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=195 Y=160 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=195+346 Y=160 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=195+346+224 Y=160 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BV SIDE=0 CRN="1" X=157 Y=37+32+96 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 DX=0 DY=0
BH SIDE=1 CRN="1" X=54 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=2 MD=YES
BH SIDE=1 CRN="1" X=54+32+160 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DY=0 NRP=2 MD=YES
BH SIDE=4 CRN="1" X=35 Y=0 Z=0 DP=10 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DX=64 DY=0 NRP=5 MD=YES
A.2 Boring program for a “non standard” side

Suppose we need to run a boring program with a Ø 8 mm tool on one side of a panel defined as
“non standard”, using the following procedure.
Boring on the “non standard” sides is carried out using the aggregates, for this reason
remember to insert the aggregate in the magazine or in the electrospindle after having
tooled it with an Ø 8 mm bit.
As this type of boring is carried out on a “non standard” side, the geometry from which to obtain the
side to machine, the milling of the geometry created and the non-standard side on which to carry
out the boring must be defined in order to effect the machining operation.
Follow the procedure below:
LPX = 800
LPY = 600
LPZ = 30
2. Click on button to start the drawing and enter the word “NewSide” in field Geom. identif..
376 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

A Examples
3. Click on Starting point.

Start X = 0
Start Y = 0
4. Click on Line given end point.

End X = lpx
End Y = lpy

End X = lpx
End Y = 0
6. Click on button Line given end point:

End X = 0
End Y = 0
7. Click on button .
Geom. identif. = NewSide
Depth =
Correction = Left Corr.
Lead-in Type -> = Curve
Lead-out Type -> = Curve
Lead-in Angle = 45
Lead-out Angle = 45
select the name of the tool in field Tool Code.
8. Click on button to insert a suspension; select option .
9. Click on the button to input the “WFG” instruction:

• Side Identif. = 6
• Geom. identif. = NewSide
• Panel Def.=
10. Click on button to insert the general boring:

• CRN = 1
• SIDE = 6
• X = 200
• Y = lpz/2
• Diameter = 8 (remember the Ø 8 tool must be fitted in an aggregate, which in its turn must
be inserted in the magazine or electrospindle).
• Depth = 5
• click on button and enter the value 32 in field X step and the number 8 in field
No.Repeats.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

377
A Examples
The following result is obtained:

6
8 7
8
6 7
GEO ID="NewSide" SIDE=0 CRN="1" DP=0 DX=5 DY=5

LINE_EP XE=LPX YE=LPY
LINE_EP XE=LPX YE=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=0
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID="NewSide" ID="0" Z=0 DP=0
WAIT TYP=stNT OG=1 RT=0 MR=mrrNO UK=NO
WFG ID=6 GID="NewSide" PDF=NO
BG SIDE=6 CRN="1" X=200 Y=LPZ/2 Z=0 DP=20 DIA=8 RTY=rpX DY=0 R=0 DA=0 NRP=8
A.3 Milling program

Suppose we need to create the geometry described below using a milling machining operation and
Ø 20 mm tool.
378 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

A Examples
Create the geometry using one of the following procedures.
First procedure:
LPX = 1755
LPY = 1170
LPZ = 30
2. Click on button to start the drawing. Field Geom. identif. is inserted directly by the system.
3. Click on button Starting point:

Start X = 0
Start Y = LPY/2
4. Click on button Line given end point:

End X = 0
End Y = LPY
5. Click on button Line given length and angle:

Length = 606,42
Alpha = -35
6. Click on button Line given angle and final X:

End X = LPX-584,06
Alpha = 16,46
7. Click on button Curve given angle and centre:

Centre X = LPX-455
Centre Y = LPY/2
Alpha = 106.48*2
Direction = dirCCW
8. Click on button Line given angle and final Y:

End Y =LPY/2-237.17
Alpha = 180-16.46

End X = 0
End Y = 0
End X = 0
End Y = LPY/2
11. Insert the two radiuses using the command Connector A. Enter the value 130 in field Radius
To insert radiusing between two consecutive elements, select the first one.
Second procedure:
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

379
A Examples
This procedure only differs from the previous one in the construction of the arc of the drawing:
Click on button Curve given end point and radius:
End X = LPX
End Y = LPY/2
Radius = 455
Direction = dirCCW
Solution = 1
Click on button Curve given end point and radius:
End X = LPX-584.06
End Y = 148.64
Radius = 455
Direction = dirCCW
Solution = 0
Carrying out the milling from the geometry:

position the cursor under the GEO string and click button Milling from geometry.
Geom. identif. = search for the GEO identification code
Diameter=
Depth=
Correction=Left Corr.
Lead-in Type ->=Curve
Lead-in Angle = 45
Lead-out Type ->=Curve
Lead-out Angle = 45
Fin. Extens. mm = 100
Percent Radius = 200
Select the name of the tool in field Tool Code; remember that the selected tool must be Ø 20
mm and must be inserted in the magazine or in the electrospindle.
380 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

A Examples
The result obtained between the programming rows is the following.
First procedure:
GEO ID="333" SIDE=0 CRN="1"
START_POINT X=0 Y=LPY/2 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY
LINE_LNAN L=606.42 A=-35
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_ANXE A=16.46 XE=LPX-584.06
ARC_ANCE A=106.48*2 XC=LPX-455 YC=LPY/2 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_ANYE A=180-16.46 YE=LPY/2-237.17
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID="333" ID=”P1026” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=20
Second procedure:
GEO ID="333" SIDE=0 CRN="1"
START_POINT X=0 Y=LPY/2 Z=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY
LINE_LNAN L=606.42 A=-35
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_ANXE A=16.46 XE=LPX-584.06
ARC_EPRA XE=LPX YE=LPY/2 R=455 DIR=dirCCW SOL=1
ARC_EPRA XE=LPX-584.06 YE=148.64 R=455 DIR=dirCCW
LINE_ANYE A=180-16.46 YE=LPY/2-237.17
CONNECTOR R=130
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=0
LINE_EP XE=0 YE=LPY/2
ENDPATH
ROUTG GID="333" ID=”P1026” Z=0 DP=5 DIA=20
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

381
A Examples
A.4 Boring program with parametric tooling

Suppose we need to execute a boring program using parametric tooling.
LPX = 1000
LPY = 1000
LPZ = 30
2. Define the following fields in dialogue box Piece variables:
Origins list = 1
Sole origin=
Symmetry=
3. Carry out the first general boring:

X = 100
Y = 100
Diameter = 10
Depth = 5
4. Carry out the second general boring:
X = LPX/2
Y = LPY/2
Diameter = 10
Depth = 5
5. Carry out the third general boring:

X = LPX-100
Y = LPY/2
Diameter = 10
Depth = 5
6. Save the program and launch the WorkTableTooling application.

7. Select menu Modify and enable the option Parameter tooling (relative values) with a click of
the mouse.
382 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

A Examples
8. Select the first mobile support.
In field Reference side select option Left.

Click on option button Condition and type-in the following condition:
if lpx> = 470 and lpx<=1000 then
result = 65
end if
if lpx<470 then
result = lpx/2-55
end if
Confirm the settings with button .
9. Select the second mobile support.
In field Reference side select option Centre.

result = lpx/2
end if
if lpx>=470 and lpx<720 then
result = lpx-110
end if
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

383
A Examples
10. Select the third mobile support.
In field Reference side select option Right.

result = lpx-10
end if
if lpx<720 then
result = lpx/+500
end if
11. Select the shapeable suction cups of the first row.
In field Reference side select option Top.

Click on option button Expression and insert the number 50.
Confirm the settings by clicking on the button.
384 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

A Examples
12. Select the shapeable suction cups of the second row.
In field Reference side select option Bottom.

Click on option button Expression and insert the following expression: lpy-50.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

385
A Examples
386 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a711k0049.fm140605

The BiesseWorks machining operation programming system commands or instructions appear in

the Editor application software commands area. The following is a list of the commands to create
and modify the geometrical figures, to create milling, boring and cutting operations. Each
command is associate with a list of parameters with relative description.
B.1 Boring commands
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
BCA = Bore with C axis on circular A = start angle.

side
AP = unit of measurement for parameter X.
AR = angle AR.
ARP = angular tilt.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
CRN = corner number.
DA = angular pitch.
DIA = diameter.
DP = bore depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
ISO = ISO instruction.
LRP = distance on tilted straight line.
MD = bore position mid-way through panel thickness.
NRP = number of repeats.
OPT = optimisable machining operation.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

387
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
R = radius.
RTY = type of repeat.
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through bore.
X = X co-ordinate of first bore.
XRC = X co-ordinate of centre of rotation.
Y = Y co-ordinate of first bore.
YRC = Y co-ordinate of centre of rotation.
Z = Z co-ordinate of first bore.
BCL = Bore with C axis on straight A = start angle.

side
AP = not used.
AR = angle AR.
ARP = angular tilt.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DA = angular pitch.
DIA = diameter.
DP = bore depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
R = radius.
388 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through bore.
BG = Generic bore A = start angle.
AP = not used.
AR = angle AR.
ARP = angular tilt.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DA = angular pitch.
DIA = diameter.
DP = bore depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
R = radius.
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through bore.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

389
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
B_GEO = Bore from geometry AR = angle AR.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DIA = diameter.
DP = bore depth.
GID = geometry identification number.
THR = through bore.
BH = Horizontal bore A = start angle.
AP = not used.
AR = angle AR.
ARP = angular tilt.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DA = angular pitch.
DIA = diameter.
DP = bore depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
390 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
R = radius.
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through bore.
BV = Vertical bore A = start angle.
AP = not used.
AR = angle AR.
ARP = angular tilt.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DA = angular pitch.
DIA = diameter.
DP = bore depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

391
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
R = radius.
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through bore.
S32 = System bore CRN = corner number.
DIA = bore diameter.
DIR = X or Y direction of repeats.
DP = bore depth.
DST = distance.
SIDE = panel side.
STP = step between one bore and the next.
THR = through bore.
TYP = system bore type.
XMI = X value that must not be exceeded when repeating

bores.
Z = bit position at start of bore.
392 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

B.2 Cutting commands
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
CUT_F = Format piece AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DP = cut depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
OVM = overmaterial.
RV = reverse.
SIDE = panel side.
TH = tool thickness.
THR = through cut.
TTK = total thickness.
X = X axis co-ordinate of the cut start point.
Y = Y axis co-ordinate of the cut start point.
CUT_FR = Rectangular cut AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DP = cut depth.
LX = X length of the side of the rectangle.
LY = Y length of the side of the rectangle.
OVM = overmaterial.
RV = reverse.
SIDE = panel side.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

393
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
THR = through cut.
X = X co-ordinate of the rectangle start point.
Y= Y co-ordinate of the rectangle start point.
CUT_G = Generic cut A = start angle.
ANG = cut angle.
ARP = angular tilt.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DA = angular pitch.
DP = cut depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
L = cut length.
OVM = overmaterial.
R = radius.
RDL = radial repeat.
RV = reverse.
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through cut.
TYP = cut type.
394 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
X = X co-ordinate of the cut start point.
XE = X co-ordinate of the cut end point.
Y= Y co-ordinate of the cut start point.
YE = Y co-ordinate of the cut end point.
Z = Z co-ordinate of the cut start point.
ZE = Z co-ordinate of the cut end point.
CUT_GEO = Cut from geometry AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
DP = cut depth.
OVM = overmaterial.
RV = reverse.
TH = blade thickness.
THR = through cut.
CUT_X = X cut CRN = corner number.
D = distance between repeats.
DP = cut depth.
L = cut length.
OVM = overmaterial.
RV = reverse.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

395
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through cut.
Y = Y co-ordinate of the cut start point.
CUT_Y = Y cut CRN = corner number.
D = distance between repeats.
DP = cut depth.
L = cut length.
OVM = overmaterial.
RV = reverse.
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through cut.
Y = Y co-ordinate of the cut start point.
396 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

B.3 Milling commands
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
GEO = Define geometry A = start angle.
ARP = angular tilt of the straight line on which the inclined

repeats are applied.
DA = angular pitch.
DP = geometry depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
ID = geometry identification code.
LRP = length of step at which repeats are carried out.
R = radius.
RV = reverse.
SIDE = panel side.
XRC = X co-ordinate of the centre of rotation.
YRC = Y co-ordinate of the centre of rotation.
GEOTEXT = Text A = start angle.
ACC = index defining the precision of the character.
ALN = type of alignment of the word based on the start

point (0=centred; 1= left alignment; 2= right alignment).
ANG = text angle of inclination.

BOL = bold face.
CHS = character set.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

397
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
CIR = type of path to be followed by the text; i.e. straight or

circular (0=straight; 1=circular).
DA = angular pitch.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
FNT = type of character required.
ID = text identification code.
ITL = italics.
PST = part of the circle around which to write the text

(0=external part of the circle; 1= internal part of the circle).
R = radius.
RDS = radius of the circle, only to be used if CIR=1 has

been set.
SIDE = panel side.
STR = barred.
SZE = height of the word.
TXT = text to be milled.
UDL = underlined.
VRS = direction of the word according to the start point

(0=from right to left; 1=from left to right; 2=from top to
bottom; 3=from bottom to top).
WGH = extension of the word in length.
X = X axis co-ordinate of the start point of the word or the

centre of the circle around which the text turns.
Y = Y axis co-ordinate of the start point of the word or the

398 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
Z = Z axis co-ordinate of the start point of the word or the

INSERT = Insertion A = start angle.

DA = angular pitch.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
R = radius.
SIDE = panel side.
X = X axis co-ordinate of the point at which the insertion is

to be made.
Y = Y axis co-ordinate of the point at which the insertion is

to be made.
Z = amount by which the work table is transferred with

respect to the main surface of the piece.
INSERTG = Insertion from GID = drawing identification code.

geometry
POCK = Pocketing A = angle.
CKI = enable islands.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

399
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
DIA = diameter.
DLT = pitch.
DP = pocketing depth.
ISL = list of islands.
OVM = overmaterial.
RV = reverse.
RRV = profile finishing.
TC = compensation.
TYP = pocketing type.
ZST = overlapping.
ROUT = Milling A = start angle.
AR = angle AR.

AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
CKT = enable the TCP.
DA = angular pitch.
DIA = diameter.
DP = milling depth.
DX = X step.
DY = Y step.
ER = first element.
ID = geometry identification code
400 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
OVM = overmaterial.
R = radius.
RV = reverse.
SIDE = panel side.
THR = through machining operation.
Z = position of the bit to start the machining operation.
ZE = end zeta.
ZS = start zeta.
ROUTG = Milling from geometry AR = angle AR.
AZ = angle AZ.
CKA = AR/AZ type.
CKT = enable the TCP.
DIA = diameter.
DP = milling depth.
NU = not used.
OVM = overmaterial.
RV = reverse.
THR = through machining operation.
Z = position of the bit to start the machining operation.
ZE = end zeta.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

401
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
ZS = start zeta.
B.4 Drawing commands
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
AINC_ANCE = Incremental curve A = alpha.

given angle and centre point
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
SP = rotation speed.
XI = centre X increase.
YI = centre Y increase.
ZE = end Z co-ordinate.
ZS = start Z co-ordinate.
AINC_EPRA = Incremental curve DIR = direction.

given radius and end point
FD = working speed.
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
XI = end X increase.
YI = end Y increase.
402 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
ARC_ANCE = Curve given angle A = alpha.

and centre
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
XC = X co-ordinate for centre of circumference.
YC = Y co-ordinate for centre of circumference.
ARC_ANCERATP = Curve given A = alpha.

angle centre radius and tangency
to previous item
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
ARC_CETS = Curve given centre DIR = direction.

and tangency to next element
(with previous point determined)
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

403
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
ARC_CETSPK = Curve given

centre and tangency to next
element (with previous point not DIR = direction.
determined)
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
ARC_EPCE = Curve given end DIR = direction.

point and centre
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
XE = end X co-ordinate.
YE = end Y co-ordinate.
ARC_EPRA = Curve given end DIR = direction.

point and radius
FD = working speed.
404 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
ARC_EPRATP = Curve given end DIR = direction.

point radius and tangency to
previous item
FD = working speed.
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
ARC_EPTP = Curve given end DIR = direction.

point and tangency to previous
item
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

405
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
ARC_IPEP = Curve using three FD = working speed.

points
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
X2 = X co-ordinate for mid point.
Y2 = Y co-ordinate for mid point.
ARC_RATS = Curve given radius DIR = direction.

and tangency to next element
(with previous point determined)
FD = working speed.
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
ARC_RATSPK = Curve given DIR = direction.

radius and tangency to next
element (with previous point not
determined)
FD = working speed.
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
406 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
CHAMFER = Chamfer D = distance.
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
CIRCLE_3P = Circle given three AS = start alpha.

points
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
X1 = X co-ordinate of first point.
X2 = X co-ordinate of second point.
X3 = X co-ordinate of third point.
Y1 = Y co-ordinate of first point.
Y2 = Y co-ordinate of second point.
Y3 = Y co-ordinate of third point.
CIRCLE_CR = Circle given centre AS = start alpha.

and radius
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
R = radius.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

407
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
CONNECTOR = Connector A FD = working speed.
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
CONNECTOR2 = Connector B FD = working speed.
R = radius.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
ELLIPSE = Ellipse A = alpha.
A1 = axis 1.
A2 = axis 2.
AS = start alpha.
DIR = direction.
ELM = number of elements.
FD = working speed.
MLE = maximum segment length.
UA = use.
UNE = use a certain number of elements.
408 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
XC = X co-ordinate for centre of ellipse.
YC = Y co-ordinate for centre of ellipse.
ZE = start Z co-ordinate
LINC_EP = Incremental line given FD = working speed.

end point
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
XI = start X co-ordinate.
YI = start Y co-ordinate.
LINE_ANXE = Line given angle A = alpha.

and final X
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
LINE_ANYE = Line given angle A = alpha.

and final Y
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

409
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
LINE_EP = Line given end point FD = working speed.
MVT = tool repositioning.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
LINE_EPANTP = Line given end A = alpha.

point angle and tangency to
previous item
FD = working speed.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
LINE_EPTP = Line given end FD = working speed.

point and tangency to previous
item
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
410 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
LINE_LNAN = Line given length A = alpha.

and angle
FD = working speed.
L = line length.
SOL = solution.
SC= sharp edge.
LINE_LNTP = Line given length FD = working speed.

and tangency to previous item
L = line length.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
LINE_LNXE = Line given length FD = working speed.

and final X
L = line length.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

411
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
LINE_LNYE = Line given length FD = working speed.

and final Y
L = line length.
SC = sharp edge.
SOL = solution.
OVAL = Oval AS = start alpha.
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
LKR = connection radius.
R1 = radius 1.
R2 = radius 2.
X1 = X co-ordinate of first point.
X2 = X co-ordinate of second point.
Y1 = Y co-ordinate of first point.
Y2 = Y co-ordinate of second point.
POLYGON = Polygon A = alpha.
CD = chamfer distance.
CT = chamfer type.
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
R = radius.
S = number of sides.
412 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
SC = sharp edge.
SD = start distance.
SS = start side.
XC = X co-ordinate for centre of polygon.
YC = Y co-ordinate for centre of polygon.
RECTANGLE = Rectangle A = alpha.
CRN = corner of the rectangle referred to by positions XC/

YC; only valid if USC is equal to 0.
CT = chamfer type.
DIR = direction.
FD = working speed.
H = height.
L = line length.
SC = sharp edge.
SS = start side.
USC = reference point used to establish the co-ordinates

of the rectangle. 1 = centre; 0 = corner.
XC = co-ordinate X of the centre of the rectangle or corner

of the rectangle.
YC = co-ordinate Y of the centre of the rectangle or corner

of the rectangle.
STAR = Star A = alpha.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

413
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
CT = chamfer type.
DIR = direction.
ER = first element.
FD = working speed.
IR = internal radius.
PS = number of points.
SC = sharp edge.
SS = start side.
XC = X co-ordinate for centre of star.
YC = Y co-ordinate for centre of star.
START_POINT = Starting point X = X co-ordinate.
Y = Y co-ordinate.
Z = Z co-ordinate.
B.5 Function commands
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
ISO = ISO code ISO = ISO instruction.
OFFSET = Move piece X = X position.
Y = Y position.
Z = Z position.
ROTATE = Rotate geometry AR = initial angle.
414 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
X = X co-ordinate of the centre of rotation.
Y = Y co-ordinate of the centre of rotation.
SCALE = Geometry scale FCT = scale factor.
X = not used.
Y = not used.
SHIFT = Move geometry X = X position.
Y = Y position.
TT = Tracer COR = enables correction of piece dimensions.
MD = positions the thickness tracer half way down the

thickness of the piece.
SIDE = panel side.
SPD = thickness tracing speed.
TYP = type of thickness tracer to be used for the tracing

operation.
X = X axis co-ordinate of the thickness tracing start point.
Y = Y axis co-ordinate of the thickness tracing start point.
Z = Z axis co-ordinate of the thickness tracing start point.
WAIT = Wait for piece positioning MR = panel overturning.
OG = identification for origin.
RT = panel rotation.
TYP = suspension type.
UK = panel locking.
WFC = Circular side A = circular face start angle.
AFH = automatic height of the face.
AZ = circular face angle AZ.
DA = length of the circular face.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

415
COMMANDS PARAMETERS
DIR = direction of rotation.
H = height of the circular face.
ID = number code identifying the side.
R = radius of the circular face.
RV = reverse.
UCS = system.
VF = virtual face
VRT = vertical face.
X = X co-ordinate of the face start point.
Y = Y co-ordinate of the face start point.
Z = face thickness.
WFG = Sides from geometry AZ = inclination of the side created.
GID = identification code of the drawing on the zero side of

the piece.
VF = virtual face
PDF = panel definition.
RV = reverse.
WFGL = Side from geometry on GIZ = identification code of the drawing on the standard
side faces side face (1, 2, 3, 4).
RV = reverse.
VF = virtual face
WFGPS = Side from geometry GID = identification code of the drawing on the zero side of
using section plan the piece.
GIZ = identification code of the drawing on the standard

side face (1, 2, 3, 4).
416 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

COMMANDS PARAMETERS
PS = section plan.
RV = reverse.
VF = virtual face
WFL = Straight side AR = straight face angle AR.
AFH = automatic height of the face.
AFL= automatic length of the face.
AZ = inclination of the side created.
H = height of straight face.
L = length of the straight face.
RV = reverse.
UCS = system.
VF = virtual face
X = X co-ordinate of the face start point.
Y = Y co-ordinate of the face start point.
Z = face thickness.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

417
418 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0018.fm140605

C VBscript commands and Editor

constants
This chapter gives a list of VBScript commands and certain BiesseWorks parameters (Editor
application constants) that the operator must be aware of in order to avoid incorrect procedures
when creating the “variables” to be used to program machining operations. It is recommended that
you do not use the codes listed in this chapter, so as to avoid creating duplicates of codes that
already exist.
C.1 VBscript Commands

VB functions
Abs
Array
Asc
Atn
CBool
CByte
CCur
CDate
CDbl
Chr
CInt
CLng
Conversions
Cos
CreateObject
CSng
Date
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

419
DateAdd
DateDiff
DatePart
DateSerial
DateValue
Day
Derived
Maths
Eval
Exp
Filter
FormatCurrency
FormatDateTime
FormatNumber
FormatPercent
GetLocale
GetObject
GetRef
Hex
Hour
InputBox
InStr
InStrRev
Int
Fixs
IsArray
IsDate
IsEmpty
IsNull
IsNumeric
IsObject
Join
420 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

LBound
LCase
Left
Len
LoadPicture
Log
LTrim
RTrim
Trims
Maths
Mid
Minute
Month
MonthName
MsgBox
Now
Oct
Replace
RGB
Right
Rnd
Round
ScriptEngine
ScriptEngineBuildVersion
ScriptEngineMajorVersion
ScriptEngineMinorVersion
Second
SetLocale
Sgn
Sin
Space
Split
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

421
Sqr
StrComp
String
Tan
Time
Timer
TimeSerial
TimeValue
TypeName
UBound
UCase
VarType
Weekday
WeekdayName
Year
VB constants
vbBlack
vbRed
vbGreen
vbYellow
vbBlue
vbMagenta
vbCyan
vbWhite
vbSunday
vbMonday
vbTuesday
vbWednesday
vbThursday
vbFriday
vbSaturday
422 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

vbUseSystemDayOfWeek
vbFirstJan1
vbFirstFourDays
vbFirstFullWeek
vbGeneralDate
vbLongDate
vbShortDate
vbLongTime
vbShortTime
vbObjectError
vbOKOnly
vbOKCancel
vbAbortRetryIgnore
vbYesNoCancel
vbYesNo
vbRetryCancel
vbCritical
vbQuestion
vbExclamation
vbInformation
vbDefaultButton1
vbDefaultButton2
vbDefaultButton3
vbDefaultButton4
vbApplicationModal
vbSystemModal
vbOK
vbCancel
vbAbort
vbRetry
vbIgnore
vbYes
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

423
vbNo
vbCr
VbCrLf
vbFormFeed
vbLf
vbNewLine
vbNullChar
vbNullString
vbTab
vbVerticalTab
vbUseDefault
vbTrue
vbFalse
vbEmpty
vbNull
vbInteger
vbLong
vbSingle
vbSingle
vbCurrency
vbDate
vbString
vbObject
vbError
vbBoolean
vbVariant
vbDataObject
vbDecimal
vbByte
vbArray
424 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

VBscript instructions
Call
Class
Const
Dim
Do
Loop
Erase
Execute
ExecuteGlobal
Exit
For
Each
Next
Function
If
Then
Else
On
Error
Option
Explicit
Private
Property
Get
Let
Set
Public
Randomize
ReDim
Rem
Select
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

425
Case
Set
Sub
While
Wend
With
Preset VB constants
False
True
Empty
Nothing
Null
C.2 Editor Constants

CHKCOLL
CKOP
CUSTSTR
FCN
HALF
JIGTH
LPX
LPY
LPZ
MATERIAL
NO
OPPWKRS
ORLST
PUTLST
SIDE
SIDEH
426 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

SIDEHn
SIDEL
SIDELn
SYMMETRY
TLCHK
TOOLING
UNICLAMP
UNIQUE
XCUT
YCUT
YES
azrABS
azrINC
azrNO
azrREL
cmfCIR
cmfLIN
cmfNO
cutLA
cutXA
cutXY
cutYA
dirCCW
dirCW
drX
drY
Dtr
inc
mm
mrrNO
mrrX
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

427
mrrXY
mrrY
PI (greek Pi)
ptFSH
ptIN
ptOUT
ptZIG
ptZZ
rpAL
rpCIR
rpNO
rpX
rpXY
rpY
sc1
sc2
scOFF
scON
stNT
stOR
stTR
sysCorr
sysHole
sysOffset
sysSpace
ttHOR
ttVER
428 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a704k0019.fm140605

Glossary
Glossary
Absolute origin
Basic reference used to determine the various machine offsets.
Absolute route
The absolute route shows the complete position of a file starting from the root, i.e. that reports
the name of the drive and the list of all the folders/subfolders containing the file (e.g.:
C:\Programmi\Lavori\Fresature\rettangolo.bpp).
Alphanumeric
Code made up of both numbers and letters.
Analog
Method of storing and transmitting information, sounds and images, converting them into electric
pulses, by breaking the source up into extremely small portions that remain substantially similar
to the original.
Application software
See “Application”.
Application
Synonymous with program, a software with the specific task of managing data, graphics, etc.
Area
Software interface zone.
Backup Safety copy Files are duplicated and saved on a support other than the one that is
normally used. This operation is carried out so as to have a copy of the document in case the
original is damaged.
Bar code
Bar code Parallel bars of various sizes used to identify a product.
Bitmap
Bitmap BitmapGraphic format representing the images as a series of dots (pixels). Bitmaps are
created in various file formats (GIF, JPEG, BMP etc.) and can be read by various graphics
programs (Photoshop, Paint etc.).
Block
General term used to indicate one or more AutoCAD objects that are associated to create a
single object.
Box
Box containing data or more simply a rectangle.
Button
Field sensitive to a click on the mouse, which enables a command, displays a window, etc.
(command field)
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

429
Glossary
Bypass
To avoid or exclude a data item.
CAD
Abbreviation of Computer Aided Design. Identifies a type of Editor for 2-D or 3-D graphic design
(example: AutoCAD, Solid Edge etc.).
CAM
Abbreviation of Computer Aided Manufacturing. Type of software that allows the use of a CAD
installed in a computer to control and manage operation of processing machines. A CAD-CAM
system allows planning, design and machining of a piece on a machine.
Cartesian axes
The three oriented lines (X, Y and Z) used to give the co-ordinates to a point on the table.
CD-ROM
Abbreviation of Compact Disk-Read Only Memory. Information storage support comprising a
circular disk that can be read using a laser beam. It can contain up to 700 Megabytes of data.
Chamfer
Eliminate sharp corners from the piece.
Channel
Communication path used to connect a computer to another computer connected in a network.
The information enters and leaves the computer via the channel.
CID
Abbreviation of CAD/CAM Interchange Draw. File format containing graphic information and
technological data.
Circular face
Portion of the piece resulting from the rounding of a part of the piece itself.
Click
Indicates the action of pressing and immediately releasing the mouse button on an object (icon,
button, etc.) located under the pointer on screen.
Click
Press and immediately release the left mouse button to enable a function after selecting a
command with the mouse.
Commands area
Part of the Editor application in which the program rows are entered .
Command
Tool designed to carry out a particular function/operation. For example the command “Print” is
used to print a document.
Compatible
Element with characteristics that enable it to be used with a specific program or with a specific
machine.
Connection speed
Speed at which a spindle go machining depth.
Co-ordinates
All the numbers that allow determination of the position of a point on a plane or in space.
430 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

Glossary
Coupling
Method by which the tool enters the piece.
Coupling
Part of the tool used to connect the tool to the spindle.
Crash
Block, system stoppage. When the PC blocks and stops working it is said to have crashed.
Cursor (pointer)
Mobile element visible on screen, which moves as the mouse is moved. It is usually shown as
an arrow and serves to indicate and select commands.
Data bank
See “Database”.
Database
Stored data arranged in an organised manner so that it is readily available using a search and
management program.
Debug
Process for the removal of errors from a software program, carried out using special application
softwares.
Default
Pre-defined, preset. Basic information used by the control, set in the software to respond to the
needs of users in the event of failure to input the information requested.
Desktop
Desktop Initial Windows screen, corresponding to the contents of the folder
C:\WINDOWS\Desktop. It includes the icons for the main computer resources, application
softwares, etc.
Dialogue box
Windows that allow the use to dialogue with the active application.
Directory (dir)
Container or folder used to hold files or documents.
Display
Show data, images, dialogue boxes, etc. on screen.
Display
Show the data, images, dialogue boxes etc. on the monitor.
Drag and drop

See “Dragging the selection”.
Dragging the selection

Indicates the action of pressing the left mouse button on an object in an area and, keeping the
left mouse button pressed, dragging the object into another area.
Drive
Computer hardware device (magnetic disk) displayed using a letter of the alphabet followed by a
colon (A:, C:, etc.) and used to store and read data.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

431
Glossary
DXF
Abbreviation of Drawing Interchange Format. File format containing vectored graphics.
Editor
Editor Program allowing specific files to be prepared.
EGA (Assisted Graphic Editor)

Method of designing profiles using particular geometric entities.
Encoder
Encoder Physical device capable of retaining the information transmitted to it, coding that
information and storing it in numeric form for further processing.
Executable
File that does not require the use of another application to be run. Executable files in dos/
windows systems are identified by one of the following extensions: exe, com and bat.
Extension
Indicates the type of file, that is to say the application with which the file is associated, and is
made up of three or four characters preceded by a dot. The extension txt indicates a text only file
that can be read using any text Editor; the extension bmp indicates a graphic raster file that can
be displayed using special graphic Editors, etc.
Field
Enclosed area containing data or commands.
File
Defined set of information collected in a single unit, stored in a drive under a name and an
extension.
Filter
Used to eliminate undesired data or fields to speed up certain operations, for example search
operations.
Floppy disk
Floppy-disk Information storage support comprising a magnetic disk contained in a plastic cover.
Usually measures 3.5 inches and will hold 1.44 Megabytes of data.
Floppy-drive
Device used to read a floppy-disk.
FreeForm
Commands present in the CAD interface that create freeform arcs (Splines).
Function keys Special keyboard keys (F1..F12) which, if pressed, can be used to carry out
certain functions.
Geometric data
Set of graphic information used to create a drawing
Hardware
Physical elements of the computer: cards, cables, keyboard, monitor, peripheral devices, etc.
Icon
Graphic image used to represent a button, an item in a tree list, etc.
432 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

Glossary
Id
Identification code.
In line
Two or more elements connected together.
Input
Incoming pulses.
Interactive
Used to indicate an element that acts in correlation with others.
Interface software
Visible part of a program (or operating system) that interacts with the user, allowing him to
communicate with the computer by way of icons, menus, buttons etc.
Interpolation speed
Speed used by the various machine axes when moving in unison to reach a specific point.
Interpolation
Connect the trajectories of two or more axes so that they both run along a path and reach the
end point of the machining operation simultaneously.
Inverter
Device used to feed and control the rotation speed of an alternating current motor.
ISO
Abbreviation of International Standardization Organization. International standardization body
determining technological and industrial standards. The term is currently used to indicate file
formats containing the numerical control machine programming language.
Jog movements
Movements carried out by the axis with the aid of a specific manual command.
Layer
Levels created when producing a drawing. Think of them as if they were transparent sheets of
paper, each of which contains an element in the drawing, which are placed on top of each other
to form the complete drawing.
Limit switch (micro)

Device located at the end of the machine. Used to establish the end point of the working area,
preventing the machine from going beyond that point.
Machine axis
Unit that performs a controlled movement
Machining program
Type of document (file) containing vectorial graphics and technological data.
Macro
Set of instructions written using a high level language, to be associated with a name that can be
called up every time the instructions in question are to be repeated (subprograms).
Marker (tick)
Mark put in the marker boxes or in menu options to enable certain functions/operations.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

433
Glossary
Marker box
Command field used to enable or disable certain operations.
Menu
List of options and commands to be selected with the mouse in order to carry out certain
operations.
Module
Collection of instructions or data required for the performance of a specific task. This is usually
made up of an interface with data fields and command fields, and an integral software part.
Mouse Tool used to move the cursor around the screen.
Multi-line
AutoCad command used to create figures formed of one or more segments of lines and circular
arcs connected together and which are treated as a single object.
NC Abbreviation of Numerical Control. Electronic device used to control machine operations,

employing a software interface that allows it to dialogue with the user.
Non optimised machining operation

In this type of machining operation, the order in which the machining operations are to be carried
out is decided by the operator.
Offset
Distance from a reference point.
Open
Display the internal structure of a program on screen in order to consult the alphanumeric data it
contains.
Optimised machining operation

In this type of machining operation, the order in which the machining operations are to be carried
out is decided by the NC based on the parameters indicated by the operator.
Option button
Circular button used to select the option to enable. Used in the case
where only one choice is possible.
Output
Outgoing pulses.
Overlapping
Part allowing two elements of the door and window frame to be overlapped.
Parameter
An alphanumeric symbol associated with values or mathematical expressions, to be used as a
data item during creation of a machining program.
Password
Secret alphanumeric code allowing data to be protected against tampering.
434 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

Glossary
Path
Path String with the names of the folders in which the file to be found is stored (e.g.
C:programmi\Biesse\Editor\editor.exe).
Piece profiling
Machining the profile of the piece without modifying its thickness
Pocketing
Removal from the surface of the piece of a portion of material to create a hollow.
Polar co-ordinates on the plane

Pair of values that allow the position of a point (p) to be determined on the Y
plane. The values to be used relate to the distance between the point (p) and P
the point of origin 0, and the angle (α) that the straight line (r) passing through r
the point itself and through the origin forms with one of the two axes (X or Y).
α
0
X
Processing macro
Boring and milling sub-programs with automatic parameter settings, created to be called up
during programming of the piece.
Profile
Geometrical figure created using a vectored graphic program, representing the machining
operation to be carried out on the piece
Profiling
Milling the worked piece to produce the profile established with the software.
Pure number
Number without symbols (e.g. brackets) and algebraic operators (+, -, *, /).
Quick or context menu

List of options that appears on screen when the right mouse button is pressed on an area of the
application software. According to the area in which the mouse cursor is located when the
button is clicked, this menu can be used to carry out operations relating to the specific area.
Random
Casual, made at random.
Range
Set of values bounded by a maximum and minimum, or the distance between a minimum value
and a maximum value during a specific period of measured time.
Refresh
Refresh Refreshes the graphic or text data displayed, using the new data entered.
Relative route
Partial route relative to the current observation point (e.g. current folder). The relative route
shows the position of a file or a directory in relation to the current directory.
Release
Issue, version.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

435
Glossary
Reset
Reset, zero. Indicates the procedure used to reset a software or a process and return its values
to their original state. This operation will cause all the data stored in the computer’s main
memory to be lost.
Restore
Recovery of information saved during backup to supports other than the original ones.
Rotation speed
Speed at which the tool rotates during perforation of the piece.
Run
See “start”.
Safety position
Point at a certain distance from the piece in which the drilling/electrospindle unit positions itself
during the movements in X/Y before the beginning of a machining operation for the purpose of
avoiding the tools colliding with the table elements and the piece itself.
Save
Record the information in file form on a disk or directly in a memory area.
Select
Highlight or mark a graphic element, a menu item or an option in a list. This operation can be
carried out using either the mouse or the arrow keys.
Serial cable
Cable used to connect two or more PCs in a network
Serial connection
Connection between the machine computer and another computer, for example a PC in an
office.
Serial
Communication method by which the single elements in a piece of information are transmitted
one bit at a time. .
Setup
Configure Arrange, prepare, correct and organise the data.
Software limits
Limit points in the working field, defined in the software, beyond which the parts of the machine
cannot go.
Software
Set of languages and application software programs registered in the PC ROM and displayed on
the video interface.
Spline
See “FreeForm”.
Start
To run a program; to start it working. For example, when a graphic program with extension exe is
started, this triggers a process that allows the interface, the working area in which to create the
drawings, to be displayed on screen.
436 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

Glossary
Step
Distance between two consecutive machining operations
Straight face
Portion of the piece resulting from straight cutting of part of the piece itself.
Straight or cartesian co-ordinates

Pair of values that allow the position of a point to be determined on the plane X, Y.
String
Line made up of a series of alphanumeric characters.
Stroke
The space travelled by the machine in order to carry out a certain machining operation.
Support
Device on which the data is recorded (e.g. Cd-rom, floppy-disk, etc.).
System bore
Bore repeated at a constant step.
Technological data
Set of parameters used to specify the way in which the elements of the drawing inserted in
machining programs are actually to be machined on the piece.
Technological Information
See "Technological Data".
Tool bar
Part of the software interface made up of command buttons (command fields). Some tool bars
are supplied with the software and some can be personalised by the user.
Tooltip
Small yellow boxes containing a brief help message or explanation, which appear when the
pointer passes over a data field, an item, a button, etc.
Tree list (tree structure)

List of items organised into a tree or hierarchy that develops like a tree with branching and sub-
branching. Every item on the tree makes it possible to interact with other parts of the application.
TrueType
Family of vector fonts. The icons of the TrueType font for the Windows operating system are
marked with a double T. .
Utility
Software designed to facilitate work, which has the job of carrying out extremely specific
operations or functions.
Waste
Waste left over after a machining operation.
BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

437
Glossary
438 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a729k0003.fm140605

Analytical Index
Analytical Index balluff device, 147

BatchRun
body of the utility, 57
description, 57
description of data fields, 60
how to create ISO files, 329
how to import files to be processed, 333
how to save ISO files, 330
using the quick or context menu, 59
BatchRun areas
A import area, 57
absolute position jobs area, 57
definition, 140 BatchRun files
aggregate 21 how to modify data, 334
notes on programming, 273 BiesseWorks DXF, 306
aggregates key defining the side of the piece, 309
aggregate management, 103 key defining the tool correction, 309
aggregate tooling procedures, 126 key defining the tool direction, 310
consult/modify the subspindles, 107 key defining the type of machining operation, 309
create subspindles, 107 blade cuts
delete subspindles, 107 definition, 81
management of aggregates with chips, 147 Programming, 257
notes to create the aggregate 21, 109 blocks, 321, 327
alarm indicator (ToolManager), 85 body of BatchRun, 57
angled cuts on all sides of the piece, 81 body of the application, 16
Programming, 257 Editor application software, 26
application softwares structure of applications, 16
basic concepts, 15 ToolManager application software, 41
applications WorkTableTooling application software, 50
basic concepts, 15 bore
body of the application, 16 definition, 77
areas in the body of the application, 16 list of machining operations that can be programmed,
arithmetical operators of the VBScript language, 282 77
Automatic import..., menu item, 297 notes on program symmetry, 269
automatic mode, 349, 365 Programming, 250
for import of DXF/CID files, 297 boring from geometric figures
automatic parameter setting Programming, 252
definition of automatic program parameter setting, boring operation
279 how to create in the DXF, 315
axis override, 340 how to represent in the DXF, 324
axis positions box, 341 boring operations
axis speed axis C boring definition, 78
during manual movements, 346 created with the SmartSketch application software,
226
B definition, 77
definition of generic bore, 78
backup
definition of generic boring operation, 79
machine data/tool database, 154
definition of horizontal bore, 78
machining programs, 195
definition of system bore, 79
BackupManager
definition of vertical bore, 78
description, 60
list of types that can be programmed, 77
machining program restore/backup, 195
boring with the aggregate
restore/backup machine data/tool database, 154
description of macro, 295
balluff, 147
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

439
Analytical Index
Break/Parameters box, 369 command buttons, 20

breaking up a GEO/ROUT, 219 list and description, 343
buttons command fields, 18
accessory commands (Debug), 370 description of buttons, 18
bars (SmartSketch), 224 marker boxes, 19
close application button, 16 option button, 19
command fields, 18 search button, 18
enlarge application button, 16 commands area
list and description (Editor), 37 description and structure of the area, 18
list and description (MachineConfiguration), 48 Editor application software area, 26
list and description (ToolManager), 43 notions of use, 162
list and description (WorkTableTooling), 55 consult
list/description of BatchRun buttons, 58 aggregate data, 104
marker boxes, 19 data relating to tool type, 92
option button, 19 tool class data, 90
reduce application to icon button, 16 tool magazine data, 113
search button, 18 copy
simulator Decorations, 194 files imported to BatchRun, 334
buttons for EGA buttons, see programming commands parts of the program, 164
buttons in the SELECT PROGRAMS dialogue box, 351 Copy, quick menu items, 164
copy/paste
C shapeable suction cup/clamps, 132
create
C axis boring
curved surface sides with SmartSketch, 227
definition, 78
cutting tools, 96
programming on a curved surface, 252
document, 165
programming on a flat surface, 251
file with extension ISO, 195
C_Cutting, 85
files with extension DXF, 305
C_Drilling, 85
flat surface sides with SmartSketch, 227
C_Inserting, 85
GEO/ROUT by breaking up a GEO/ROUT, 219
C_Routing, 85
jobs, 332
C_Tracing, 85
macro, 290
calculation functions of VBScript language, 283
milling and boring tools, 93
CAM bar (SmartSketch), 224
new aggregates, 104
CAM menu
new groups, 100
description (SmartSketch), 223
new tool classes, 89
CANC key
new tool types, 91
magazine unfitting procedures, 125
notes for creating the deflector, 110
to untool aggregates, 127
notes to create the aggregate 21, 109
untooling the operating section, 120
SmartSketch geometries, 227
cancelling running of the program, 335
texts with the EGA, 217
check of the positions
variables, 281
Mobile panel supports, 135
CTRL key
shapeable suction cup/clamps, 132
select various scattered drawing elements, 163
Stops, 133
to establish symmetry, 123
chip deflector
cursor, 21
catalogisation, 110
zoom in pointer, 21
notes on programming, 269
zoom out pointer, 21
circular sides, 182
curvetype tools, 208
cleaning hoods
customise tool bars, 61
use of macro, 295
Cut, quick menu items, 164
CNI DXF, 323
cuts along the X axis, 81
colours
Programming, 257
Editor, 26
440 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

Analytical Index
cuts along the Y axis, 81 Editor, 28

Programming, 257 List, 354
cuts from geometric drawing, 82, 258 MachineConfiguration, 46
cuts to square the piece, 82 Positions, 338
Programming, 258 ToolManager, 42
cutting operation WorkTableTooling, 51
how to represent in the DXF, 320, 326 description of Positions application software, 337
cutting operations description of the BackupManager, 60
created with the SmartSketch application software, Diagnostics for this line..., quick menu item, 188
226 Diagnostics..., quick menu item, 188
definition, 81 dialogue box
Aggregate manager, 103
D Aggregate tooling, 127
Aggregate, description, 104
data area
AXIS DATA, 347
description, 17
Bad tooling !, 128
ToolManager application software area, 41
Bore from geometry, 253
data fields, 19
Bore with C axis on circular side, 252
description of simulator fields, 192
Bore with C axis on straight side, 252
description of the fields in BatchRun, 60
Call Macro, 295
data restore
Cut from geometry, 259
carrying out a restore of machining programs, 195
Define geometry, 200
Debug, 367
Filters, 102
accessory command buttons, 370
Format piece, 258
Break/Parameters box, 369
Generic bore, 251
description of menus, 367
Generic cut, 257
information bars, 370
Group manager, 100
instructions, 370
Horizontal bore, 251
instructions box, 369
Insertion, 266
ISO strings area, 369
Insertion from geometry, 266
Debug application software, 367
List of macros, 294
Decorations, quick menu items, 194
List of macros, description, 293
defining colours
Machine tooling, 112, 120, 122
Editor, 26
Magazine tooling, 113, 125
delete
Milling, 230
aggregates from the list, 103
Milling from geometry, 231
files imported to BatchRun, 334
Milling from geometry, description of fields, 232
jobs, 333
Milling, description of fields, 232
parts of the program, 164
Object properties, description, 133, 134, 135
tool classes from the list, 90
Optimiser results, 189
tool types from the list, 92
Piece variables, 165, 364
tools from the database, 87
Pocketing, 246
work table tooling from the program, 145
Pocketing, description of fields, 246
description of data fields
Program variables, 281
BatchRun, 60
Rectangular cut, 258
in dialogue box Define geometry, 200
SELECT PROGRAMS, 350
in dialogue box Simulator, 192
Settings (ALT+S) (BatchRun), 329
in dialogue box Text, 217
Simulator, 192
Setup dialogue box, 62
SOFTWARE LIMITS, 116
thickness tracer window, 268
Summary, 121, 126
description of Debug application software, 367
System bore, 251
description of List application software, 352
Text, 217
description of menus
to program piece thickness tracing, 268
Debug, 367
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

441
Analytical Index
Tool class manager, 89 tool used to define a geometry, 200

Tool class parameters, description of the fields, 89 enter parameters for work table, 138
Tool holder - , description, 115 Enter password, 74
Tool magazine - , description, 113 Environmental type variable, 279
Tool parameters, 93, 98, 99 errors present warning indicator, 341
Tool parameters, description of fields, 99, 100 examples
Tool type manager, 91 angled repetitions, 201
Vertical bore, 251 how to create a curved side, 185
dialogue box Simulator how to create a drawing with the EGA, 216
description of buttons, 193 how to create a macro, 290
disabling a job, 333 how to create a piece from a geometric profile, 178
distance between spindles, 117 how to create a straight side, 188
Divide machining operation, menu item, 219 how to interpret the optimiser, 190
drawing milling with a general geometric profile, 232
circles with the EGA, 212 milling with an integrated geometric profile, 230
commands for creating DXF files, 305 profile pocketing, 248
curves with the EGA, 208 repeats on the circumference, 202
ellipse with the EGA, 210 setting parameters by inserting algebraic expres-
how to create a text, 217 sions, 141
how to define a geometry, 200 spindles symmetry, 123
how to update, 163 use of filters, 102
lines with the EGA, 204 Explode, quick menu items, 162
list and description of tools, 204 export
ovals with the EGA, 211 documents in CID format, 169
polygons with the EGA, 214 documents in DXF format, 169
rectangles with the EGA, 213 documents in WMF format, 169
select one or more elements, 163
stars with the EGA, 215 F
with EGA tools, 199
“Figure” type tools, 210
with SmartSketch, 223
file processing procedures, 330
drawing buttons, 199
file status indicator, 357
curve type, 208
files with extension MTA, 128
description, 204
files with extension MTC, 126
geometric figures, 210
files with extension MTM, 121
line type, 204
files with extension PCF, 130
DXF
files with extension TLS, 131
drawing rules, 305
files with extension WRB, 131
how to create them with the CAD, 305
filling in a job List, 358
keys created by the system while saving, 170
Filters bar, 44
forced spindle movement, 348
E freeform (splines), 305
Edit Bar, 39 Functions bar
Editor, 25 description, 171
body of the application, 26
description of menus, 28 G
information on colours, 26
General bar, 49
Editor application, 25
generic boring operation
Editor application software, 25
definition, 78, 79
Editor application software document, 75, 161
Programming, 250
EGA tools
“generic” geometric profile, 229
drawing tools, 204
definition, 199
how to use them for drawing, 199
geometric profile
text creation tools, 217
definition, 77
442 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

Analytical Index
Global type variable, 279 instruction “SCALE”, 173

Graphic output Bar, 39 instruction “SHIFT”, 174
graphics area, 118 instruction “WAIT”, 174
description and structure of the area, 17 instruction “WFC”, 182
Editor application software area, 26 instruction “WFL”, 185
how to update, 163 instructions (Debug), 370
WorkTableTooling application area, 50 instructions box, 369
groups ”integrated” geometric profile, 229
using the quick or context menu, 101 definition, 199
interpolated milling with axis C, 271
H ISO, 329
ISO code, 171
heading bar, 16
ISO files
structure of applications, 16
how to generate them from Editor, 195
Highlight non-optimised lines, quick menu item, 189
ISO strings area, 369
hoods
cleaning, 295
horizontal boring J
definition, 78 job
horizontal machining operations definition, 332
definition, 77 how to create, 332
how to delete, 333
I how to disable, 333
Implode, quick menu items, 162 how to rename, 333
import job List
machine data/database, 151 how to fill in, 358
work table configuration (TLS or WRB files), 131 how to insert files, 359
import area, 59 how to open, 358
BatchRun area, 57 how to optimise programs, 365
description of Editor area, 298 how to replace a program, 359
description of the quick or context menu, 299 how to run the programs, 365
Editor application software area, 26 how to save it, 364
importing DXF/CID files, 297 how to save modifications, 364
using automatic mode, 297 programming instructions, 360
using manual mode, 297 jobs, 59
importing to BatchRun jobs area
DXF/CID files, 333 BatchRun area, 57
files to be processed, 333 JOG movements, 346
information bars, 343, 357, 370
INS key K
magazine tooling procedures, 125 keyboard keys
to tool aggregates, 127 list of quick commands, 23
tooling the operating section, 120
insert programs table, 356 L
inserting files in the List, 359 language
insertions set the language, 74
recording/cataloguing, 99 large piece
instruction “ENDPATH”, 199 definition, 138
instruction “GEO”, 199 LAY files, 333
instruction “IIS”, 171 Layer keys
instruction “OFFSET”, 172 keys for exporting DXF files, 170
instruction “ROTATE”, 172 list of parameters, 307
instruction “ROUT”, 199 personalise keys, 307
instruction “ROUTG”, 199
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

443
Analytical Index
layers, 306, 323 machine tooling, 118

linetype tools, 204 aggregate tooling procedures, 126
List, 352 comparing two configurations, 121
description of buttons, 357 description of buttons, 118
description of menus, 354 machine tooling procedures, 124
description of the application software, 352 operating section tooling procedure, 120
description of the insert programs table, 356 structure of tooling windows, 118
description of the quick menu, 353 using the quick or context menu, 119
file status indicator, 357 MachineConfiguration, 45
how to modify data in the programs, 363 description of menus, 46
how to modify variables in the programs, 363 MachineConfiguration application, 45
information bars, 357 MachineConfiguration application software, 45
List application buttons, 357 machining operation
List application software, 352 suspending the program, 335
List instructions machining operation programming
instruction “”, 360 define the piece variables, 165
instruction “ machining operations
”, 360 how to create variables, 281
instruction “_NOR”, 363 types of machining operation that can be program-
instruction “_SXG”, 363 med, 77
instruction “END”, 363 machining program
instruction “JMP”, 361 backup/restore data, 195
instruction “READ”, 362 basic concepts, 161
instruction “STOP”, 360 copy graphics area elements, 164
instruction “WRIT”, 362 copy programming rows, 164
list programming instructions, 360 create the document, 165
Local type variable, 279 definition, 75
delete graphics area elements, 164
M delete programming rows, 164
deleting the table tooling, 145
M = description added, 50
description of the optimiser, 188
machine
description of the simulator, 192
commands to move, 342
display the properties windows, 164
machine axes, 117
enable simultaneous machining of two pieces, 364
setting the speed of manual movements, 346
how to run, 349
machine axes reset
insert comments, 162
definition and procedures, 345
insert indents in the lines, 162
machine configuration, 111
processing ISO files, 195
consult the magazine tool holders, 115
program creation phases, 164
consult the magazines, 113
program functions, 171
consult the T, TH and TP spindles, 112
show the hidden parameters, 162
customise the work table, 130
show the parameters list, 162
open the customised configuration of the tables, 132
types of machining operation that can be program-
save the configuration document, 131
med, 77
Work table configuration document, 129
update graphics area, 163
machine data
Using the command Explode, 162
backup/restore data, 154
Using the command Implode, 162
Machine data bar, 48
macro
machine environments
definition, 289
description, 342
enable/disable the buttons, 294
machine environments box, 342
how to create, 290
machine status
insertion in the program, 295
indicator, 341
opening and modifying structure, 294
machine status indicator, 341
444 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

Analytical Index
save, 292 option Open, 168

macro HODD_CLE, 295 option Print, 170
macro NoPRK, 295 option Save, 169
macro UNLOAD_T, 296 menu File (MachineConfiguration)
magazine tool holder list of options, 46
consult the data, 115 menu File (WorkTableTooling)
Main Bar, 37 list of options, 51
Main bar, 43, 55 menu Filters (ToolManager)
manual mode list of options, 43
for import of DXF/CID files, 297 option Activate filters, 102
marker boxes, 19 option Groups manager, 100
MDI, 346 menu Help (Editor)
MDI positioned movements, 346 list of options, 37
medium piece menu Help (MachineConfiguration)
definition, 138 list of options, 48
menu menu Help (ToolManager)
description (Debug), 367 list of options, 43
description (Editor), 28 menu Insert
description (List), 354 option Millings (Editor), 204
description (MachineConfiguration), 46 menu Insert (Editor)
description (Positions), 338 list of options, 30
description (ToolManager), 42 option Circular side, 182
description (WorkTableTooling), 51 option Geometry scale, 173
menu bar, 20 option ISO code, 171
menu ? (WorkTableTooling) option Move geometry
list of options, 54 option Move piece, 172
menu bar, 20 option Rotate geometry, 172
structure of applications, 16 option Side from geometry on side faces, 178
menu Database (MachineConfiguration) option Side from geometry using section plan, 180
list of options, 46 option Sides from geometry, 176
option Aggregates, 103 option Straight side, 185
option Spindles, 112 option Wait for piece positioning, 174
option Tool magazines, 113 menu Insert (WorkTableTooling)
menu Display list of options, 53
list of options, 34 menu Main (ToolManager)
toolbar customising options, 61 list of options, 42
menu Display (Editor) menu Modify (WorkTableTooling)
option ToolBar>Graphic output, 163 list of options, 52
menu Display (WorkTableTooling) option Positions, 137
list of options, 53 option Removable tables..., 145
option Display shaped piece, 145 menu Program (Editor)
menu Edit (Editor) list of options, 35
list of options, 29 option Variables, 281
option Properties..., 164 menu Tooling (MachineConfiguration)
menu Exit (WorkTableTooling) list of options, 47
list of options, 53 option Maching tooling, 120
menu Export (Editor) option Magazine tooling, 124
option To CID file, 169 optionAggregate tooling, 126
option To DXF file, 169 menu Tools (Editor)
option To WMF file, 169 list of options, 36
menu File (Editor) menu Tools (MachineConfiguration)
list of options, 28 list of options, 47
option New, 165 menu Tools (ToolManager)
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

445
Analytical Index
list of options, 42 multi-pass milling, 274

option New tool, 93, 98, 99 multiple selection
option Tool class manager, 88 Mobile panel supports, 135
option Tool type manager, 91 shapeable suction cup/clamps, 132
menu Tools (WorkTableTooling) stops, 133
option Delete table tooling, 145
menu View (MachineConfiguration) N
list of options, 47
N=new button, 56
menu View (ToolManager)
non-parametric tooling
list of options, 43
Tooling procedures, 144
menu Window (WorkTableTooling)
NOTUSED variable, 140
list of options, 54
menu Windows (Editor)
list of options, 36
O
milling open a document, 168
definition, 80 opening a job List, 358
definition of pocketing, 80 operating section
types of milling, 80 software limits, 116
milling from a general geometric profile, 231 tooling procedure, 120
milling from an integrated geometric profile, 229 operating section spindles
milling operation consult the data, 112
how to represent in the DXF, 320, 327 operating section stroke
milling operations maximum and minimum positions, 116
created with the SmartSketch application software, Operations bar, 56
227 optimise
definition, 80 files imported to BatchRun, 334
types of milling, 80 single BPP files, 195
mobile support symmetrical tooling, 135 optimiser
modify definition and use, 188
aggregate data, 104 description of symbols, 190
data in files imported to BatchRun, 334 description of table columns, 191
data relating to tool type, 92 structure of the window, 189
piece dimensions, 168 optimiser structure, 189
tool class data, 90 optimiser symbols, 190
modify variables optimiser table
inserted in the list programs, 363 description of columns, 191
modifying panel data optimising the List, 365
inserted in the list programs, 363 overturning the piece
mouse inserting the suspension in the program, 174
buttons, 21
cursor, 21 P
pointer, 21 parametric tooling
mouse buttons, 21 Tooling procedures, 139
mouse pointer, 21 Password, 74
moving machine axes, 346 Paste, quick menu items, 164
setting speed, 346 personalise layer keys, 307
moving the geometry, 174 piece
Moving the machine axes definition of standard sides, 75
manual movement, 346 how to represent in the DXF, 311, 324
MDI movement, 346 reference corners, 76
moving the operating section piece pocketing, 80
procedure, 348 piece reference corners, 76
multi-lines, 305 piece thickness tracing, 268
446 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

Analytical Index
piece variables, 279 definition of curved surface sides, 182

CKOP, 279 definition of flat surface sides, 185
CUSTSTR, 279 ISO code, 171
FCN, 279 moving the geometry, 174
JIGTH, 279 reducing/increasing the size of the geometry, 173
LPX, 279 rotating the geometry, 172
LPY, 279 sides from geometric profile, 176
LPZ, 279 sides from geometries on several faces, 180
MATERIAL, 279 suspending the machining operation, 174
ORLST, 279 temporary translation of the origin, 172
SIMMETRY, 279 program rows, 18
TLCHK, 279 programming commands
TOOLING, 279 commands and parameters list, 387
UNIQUE, 279 “ENDPATH” command, 199
XCUT, 279 “GEO” command button, 199
YCUT, 279 “IIS” command, 171
planning DXF, 305 “OFFSET” command, 172
”positioned” type, 346, 347 “ROTATE” command, 172
positioning the piece “ROUT” command button, 199
inserting the suspension in the program, 174 “ROUTG” command button, 199
Positions, 337 “SCALE” command, 173
axis positions box, 341 “SHIFT” command, 174
command buttons, 343 using the command “GEO”, 200
description of menus, 338 “WAIT” command, 174
description of the quick menu, 344 “WFC” command, 182
errors present warning indicator, 341 “WFG” command, 176
information bars, 343 WFGPS command, 180
machine environments box, 342 “WFL” command, 185
machine status indicator, 341 programming instructions
Positions application software, 337 see programming commands
preset data fields, 19 programming machining operations
printing the document, 170 basic concepts on variables, 279
procedure boring from geometry, 252
aggregate tooling/untooling, 127 boring operations, 250
for import of DXF/CID files, 297 create flat surface sides, 185
operating section tooling/untooling, 120 creating curved surface sides, 182
to create DXF files, 305 creating curved surface sides with SmartSketch, 227
to tool/unfit the tool magazine, 125 creating flat surface sides with SmartSketch, 227
process creating the ISO file, 195
single BatchRun files, 334 cut from geometric drawing, 258
single BPP files, 195 cutting operations, 257
processing files definition of macro, 289
how to use BatchRun, 329 drawing tools, 204
processing files with BatchRun DXF export keys, 170
procedure, 330 emptying applied to a text, 250
processing programs, 195 enable/disable the macros, 294
profile pocketing, 245 how to create a macro, 290
program how to create variables, 281
stop/cancel, 335 how to use SmartSketch, 223
program errors insert the macros in the program, 295
warning indicator, 341 instruction “IIS”, 171
program functions instruction “OFFSET”, 172
definition, 171 instruction “ROTATE”, 172
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

447
Analytical Index
instruction “SCALE”, 173 quick or context menu

instruction “SHIFT” BatchRun import area menu, 59
interpolated milling with axis C, 271 BatchRun jobs area menu, 59
making the boring symmetrical, 269 description, 20
milling, 229 description (SmartSketch), 225
milling applied to a text, 249 display the optimiser, 188
milling from a general geometric profile, 231 Editor application software menu, 27
milling from an integrated geometric profile, 229 List menu, 353
modifying piece dimensions, 168 MachineConfiguration application menu, 46
modifying the structure of the macros, 294 menu for Editor import area, 299
multi-pass milling, 274 menu for the Automatic environment (Positions), 344
notes about carrying out a "repositioning”, 276 ToolManager application software menu, 42
notes for creating sharp corners, 274 use for group management, 101
open the macros, 294 use for tooling the machine, 119
optimising the program, 188 use for work table tooling, 132
procedure defining a geometry, 200 use to manage tools, 87
procedures for use of EGA, 199 WorkTableTooling application software menu, 50
profile pocketing, 245
programming piece thickness tracing, 268 R
representation of the piece, 75
rapid tool search, 102
save macros, 292
rectangular cuts, 82
save the program (document), 169
Programming, 258
saving documents in different formats, 169
reducing/increasing the size of the geometry, 173
setting automatic program parameters, 279
relative position
sides from geometric profile, 176
definition, 140
sides from geometries on several faces, 180
remove from the table
suspending the program, 174
suction cups/clamps, 132
text creation procedure, 217
remove the table supports, 145
UpdatePanel function, 168
Renaming a job, 333
use of the commands area, 162
replacing a program in the List, 359
using aggregate 21, 273
repositioning of the tool
using field Export the symmetrical section, 277
using the functions, 171
restore
using the simulator, 192
machine data/tool database, 154
using the tool lead-in/lead-out data items, 276
machining programs, 195
using then chip deflector, 269
rotate
vertical milling in YZ/XZ, 272
shapeable suction cup/clamps, 132
Properties..., quick menu item, 164
rotating the geometry, 172
rotating the piece
Q inserting the suspension in the program, 174
quick keyboard commands, 23 running single programs, 349
ARROW, 23 automatic mode, 349
CTRL, 23 semiautomatic mode, 350
ESC, 23 running the job list, 365
SHIFT, 23 automatic mode, 365
TAB, 23 semiautomatic mode, 366
quick keys running the program
ARROW, 23 stop and cancel, 335
CTRL, 23
ESC, 23 S
generic, 23
save
SHIFT, 23
aggregate configuration (MTA file), 128
TAB, 23
Aggregate tooling, 128
448 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

Analytical Index
backup data, 154 structure of applications, 16

BatchRun data, 330 status bar traffic light (Editor), 26
carrying out a backup of machining programs, 195 “step” type, 346, 347
document, 169 stopping the program, 335
documents in different formats, 169 store
List, 364 machine data, 154
macro, 292 machining programs, 195
magazine configuration (MTC file), 126 tool database, 154
operating section configuration (MTM file), 121 straight sides, 185
Operating section tooling, 121 structure of BatchRun, 57
tool database data, 88 structure of the Editor application, 26
tooling magazine tooling, 126 structure of the ToolManager application, 41
saving modifications to the List, 364 structure of the WorkTableTooling application, 50
saving the database structure of tooling windows, 118
indicator disk, 88 suspending the machining operation, 335
select one or more drawing elements, 163 to position the piece, 174
selected element data area, 118 symmetrical milling
semiautomatic mode, 350, 366 notes on programming, 277
set the language, 74 system boring
Settings bar, 44 definition, 79
Setup
field Active type, 328 T
setting the formalism, 328
Technology Bar, 40
Setup dialogue box, 61, 62
Technology bar (SmartSketch)
sharp corner
how to use, 226
temporary translation of the origin
simulate
setting the new offset, 172
files imported to BatchRun, 334
thickness tracers
simulator
recording/cataloguing, 98
definition and use, 192
Tool bar, 49
description of buttons, 193
tool bars, 20
simulator buttons, 193
customising, 61
”single step” type, 346, 347
macros enabling/disabling bar, 294
small piece
SmartSketch application software bar, 224
definition, 138
structure of applications, 16
SmartSketch, 223
tool class
description of the CAM menu, 223
basic concepts, 85
description of the quick or context menu, 225
consult the class data, 90
Editor interaction procedures, 226
create new tool classes, 89
SmartSketch application, 223
delete a class from the list, 90
SmartSketch application software, 223
modify the class data, 90
software limits, 116
tool data area, 118
software tools, 20
tool database, 85
spindle override, 340
backup/restore data, 154
spindle windows
tool group
description of data fields, 112
basic concepts, 85
spindles
description of procedures, 100
how to move, 348
tool magazines
splines (freeform), 305
machine tooling procedures, 124
standard sides of the piece, 75
tool Normal cursor, 163
Starting BackupManager, 60
tool search filters, 102
status bar, 20
tool type
Editor application software bar, 26
basic concepts, 85
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

449
Analytical Index
consult/modify the type data, 92 tree list area, 118

create new types, 91 description and structure of the area, 17
delete the type from the list, 92 Editor application software area, 26
tooling ToolManager application software area, 41
cataloguing aggregates, 85 WorkTableTooling application area, 50
cataloguing tools, 85
management of tools with chips, 147 U
Tooling bar, 49
Units Bar, 39
tooling errors
untool the electrospindle
inconsistency between tooling and data, 128
description of macro, 296
tooling magazine tooling
UpdatePanel function, 168
comparing two configurations, 126
UpdatePanel instruction, 168
Tooling window buttons, 118
updating the drawing, 163
tooling windows
updating the tool database, 88
description of buttons, 118
utilities, 57
ToolManager, 41
BackupManager, 60
basic concepts, 15
BatchRun, 57
description of the quick or context menu, 87
how to update the tool database, 88
use of the data area table, 86
V
ToolManager application, 41 variables
ToolManager areas arithmetical operators of the VBScript functions, 282
data area, 41 how to arrange them in sequential order, 284
tree list area, 41 how to cancel them all from the list, 284
tools how to consult the available variables, 285
add a tool to a group, 87 how to create, 281
basic concepts on groups/types/classes, 85 how to delete them from the list, 284
cataloguing/recording, 85 how to modify the type, 284
create new aggregates, 104 how to modify them in the list, 363
create new tool classes, 89 how to print the list, 284
create new types, 91 how to store them, 284
delete aggregates from the list, 103 how to update the list, 284
delete the classes, 90 list of VBScript language, 283
delete tool types, 92 types of variable used, 279
delete tools from the database, 87 VBScript instructions
grouping tools, 100 description of certain instructions, 285
modify types, 92 instruction For...Next, 285
modify/consult aggregate data, 104 instruction If...Then, 286
modify/consult class data, 90 instruction If...Then...Else, 286
notes for creating the deflector, 110 instruction While...WEnd, 287
notes to create the aggregate 21, 109 VBScript language
quick search filters, 102 Arithmetical operators, 282
record aggregates, 103 calculation functions, 283
record insertions in the database, 99 instruction For...Next, 285
record tools in the database, 93 instruction If...Then, 286
recording thickness tracers in the database, 98 instruction If...Then...Else, 286
rename a tool, 87 instruction While...WEnd, 287
Tools Bar, 38 preset instructions, 285
tools Graphic output, 163 vertical boring
tools with chips definition, 78
cataloguing/tooling, 147 vertical machining operations
tree list, 17 definition, 77
vertical milling in YZ/XZ, 272
450 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

Analytical Index
W
WFG instruction, 176
WFGPS instruction, 180
work table
configure, 130
non-parametric tooling procedures, 144
parametric tooling procedures, 139
remove the supports, 145
save the PCF file, 131
tooling, 129
Work table configuration document, 129
work table object properties table, 145
work table tooling, 129
configure the table (PCF file), 130
deleting the tooling from the program, 145
display the shaped piece, 145
management of piece positioning, 136
management of “shapeable suction cup” positioning,
132
management of “stop” positioning, 133
non-parametric positioning, 144
parametric positioning, 138
position input window, 137
positioning point table, 145
properties table, 145
remove the work table supports, 145
save the configuration document, 131
simultaneous tooling of a number of pieces, 146
support positioning management, 135
working area
how to enlarge or reduce, 21
WorkTableTooling, 50
work table tooling, 129
WorkTableTooling application, 50
WorkTableTooling application software, 50
WorkTableTooling areas
graphics area, 50
tree list area, 50
writable data fields, 19
Z
zoom
description of tools, 21
zoom in pointer, 21
zoom out pointer, 21
zoom tools, 21
BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

451
Analytical Index
452 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073IX.fm140605

Copertina retro
BIESSE S.p.A.
Sede legale:
Via della Meccanica, 16
61100 Pesaro (PU) Italy
Tel. +39 0721 439100
Fax +39 0721 439150
sales@biesse.it
www.biesse.com

Biesseworks Instructions For Use PDF Free

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biesseworks Instructions For Use PDF Free

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Biesseworks Instructions For Use PDF Free

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BiesseWorks

Machining operation programming system

Instructions for use

Copyright © 2002 BIESSE S.p.A.. All rights reserved.

Information on trade marks

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073.fm140605

4 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073.fm140605

Publication information .............................................................................................................. 3

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

5 Basic programming concepts

7 Operating section and magazine management

8 Work table management

6 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

9 Management of the tools with the balluff device

10 Data import, backup and restore

11 Management of the machine axes and the working units

12 The machining program

13 Creation of profiles with the EGA instruments

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

13.4 Creating a text ............................................................................................................... 217

14 Creation of the profiles with SmartSketch

15 Programming machining operations

16 Automatic program parameter setting

8 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

17.8 Horizontal aggregate boring macro ................................................................................ 295

18 Importing graphic files

19 Planning DXF files

20 Running the programs

21 Using the XNC

BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

B List of programming commands

C VBscript commands and Editor constants

Glossary .................................................................................................................................... 429

10 BIESSE S.p.A. © - 5804a0073TOC.fm140605

Purpose and limits of the manual

BIESSE S.p.A. © - a701k0009.fm140605

12 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a701k0009.fm140605

BiesseWorks is a machining operation programming system, compatible with Microsoft Windows

1.1 Applications or application software

BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

1.3 Structure of applications

 Body of the application (page 16).

 Menu bar (page 20).

 Tool bars (page 20).

 Status bar (page 20).

1.3.1 Heading bar

1.3.2 Body of the application

 Data area (page 17)

 Tree list area (page 17)

 Commands area (page 18)

 Software windows (page 18)

 Quick or context menu (page 20)

16 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

Tree list area

BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

18 BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

BIESSE S.p.A. © - a702k0024.fm140605

Quick or context menu

1.3.3 Menu bar

Body of the application (page 16).

Menu bar (page 20).

Tool bars (page 20).

Status bar (page 20).

Data area (page 17)

Tree list area (page 17)

Commands area (page 18)

Software windows (page 18)

Quick or context menu (page 20)

enlarge the graphical elements in the tooling window with a click;

click once to select the tool bar buttons or menu commands;